ML17130A249: Difference between revisions

From kanterella
Jump to navigation Jump to search
(Created page by program invented by StriderTol)
(Created page by program invented by StriderTol)
 
(2 intermediate revisions by the same user not shown)
Line 16: Line 16:


=Text=
=Text=
{{#Wiki_filter:CHAPTER 10 10.1-1 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 SECTION 10.0   AUXILIARY SYSTEMS
{{#Wiki_filter:PBAPS UFSAR SECTION 10.0 - AUXILIARY SYSTEMS TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION        TITLE 10.1          
 
10.1


==SUMMARY==
==SUMMARY==
DESCRIPTION  
DESCRIPTION 10.2          NEW FUEL STORAGE 10.2.1        Introduction 10.2.2        Description 10.3          SPENT FUEL STORAGE 10.3.1        Power Generation Objective 10.3.2        Power Generation Design Basis 10.3.3        Safety Design Basis 10.3.4        Description 10.3.4.1      High Density Spent Fuel Storage Racks 10.3.4.1.1    Cell Assembly 10.3.4.1.1.1  Cell Enclosure 10.3.4.1.1.2  Neutron Absorbing Material 10.3.4.1.1.3  Wrapper Plate 10.3.4.1.1.4  Neutron Absorbing Inserts 10.3.4.1.1.4.1 Seismic and Structural Integrity 10.3.4.1.1.4.2 Fuel Handling Accidents 10.3.4.1.1.4.3 Criticality Analysis 10.3.4.1.1.4.4 Abnormal or Accident Conditions 10.3.4.1.1.4.5 Boraflex Credit for the Interim Period 10.3.4.1.2    Base Plate 10.3.4.1.3    Base Support Assembly 10.3.4.2      Spent Fuel Pool 10.3.4.3      Fuel Pool Level Alarms 10.3.5        Safety Evaluation 10.3.6        Inspection and Testing 10.3.6.1      Boraflex Inspection and Testing 10.3.6.2      Neutron Absorbing Inserts Surveillance Program 10.3.6.2.1    Fast Start Coupon Surveillance Program 10.3.6.2.2    Long-Term Coupon Surveillance Program 10.3.6.2.3    Full rack Insert Surveillance Inspections 10.4          TOOLS AND SERVICING EQUIPMENT 10.4.1        Introduction 10.4.2        Fuel Servicing Equipment 10.4.3        Servicing Aids CHAPTER 10                  10-i              REV. 25, APRIL 2015


This section describes the reactor and plant auxiliary systems
PBAPS UFSAR TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont'd)
SECTION    TITLE 10.4.4    Reactor Vessel Servicing Equipment 10.4.5    In-Vessel Servicing Equipment 10.4.5.1  Reactor Cavity Work Platform 10.4.6    Refueling Equipment 10.4.7    Storage Equipment 10.4.8    Under-Reactor-Vessel Servicing Equipment 10.4.9    Equipment Storage Pit 10.4.10    Reactor Building Crane 10.4.11    Heavy Loads Compliance 10.4.11.1  NUREG-0612 Phase I Requirements 10.4.11.2  NUREG-0612 Phase II Requirements 10.4.11.3  Safety Evaluation 10.5      FUEL POOL COOLING AND CLEANUP SYSTEM 10.5.1    Power Generation Objective 10.5.2    Power Generation Design Basis 10.5.3    Description 10.5.4    Inspection and Testing 10.6      SERVICE WATER SYSTEM 10.6.1    Power Generation Objective 10.6.2    Power Generation Design Basis 10.6.3    Description 10.6.4    Inspection and Testing 10.7      HIGH-PRESSURE SERVICE WATER SYSTEM 10.7.1    Safety Objective 10.7.2    Safety Design Basis 10.7.3    Power Generation Objective 10.7.4    Power Generation Design Basis 10.7.5    Description 10.7.6    Safety Evaluation 10.7.7    Inspection and Testing 10.8      REACTOR BUILDING COOLING WATER SYSTEM 10.8.1    Power Generation Objective 10.8.2    Power Generation Design Basis 10.8.3    Description 10.8.4    Inspection and Testing 10.9      EMERGENCY SERVICE WATER SYSTEM 10.9.1    Safety Objective 10.9.2    Safety Design Basis 10.9.3    Description CHAPTER 10              10-ii              REV. 25, APRIL 2015


that are required for operation, but which are not integral
PBAPS UFSAR TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont'd)
SECTION    TITLE 10.9.4    Safety Evaluation 10.9.5    Inspection and Testing 10.10      TURBINE BUILDING COOLING WATER SYSTEM 10.10.1    Power Generation Objective 10.10.2    Power Generation Design Basis 10.10.3    Description 10.10.4    Inspection and Testing 10.11      CHILLED WATER SYSTEM 10.11.1    Power Generation Objective 10.11.2    Power Generation Design Basis 10.11.3    Description 10.11.4    Inspection and Testing 10.12      FIRE PROTECTION PROGRAM 10.13      MAIN CONTROL ROOM AIR CONDITIONING 10.13.1    Power Generation Objective 10.13.2    Power Generation Design Basis 10.13.3    Safety Design Basis 10.13.4    Description 10.13.4.1  Control Room Habitability 10.13.5    Safety Evaluation 10.13.6    Inspection and Testing 10.14      EMERGENCY VENTILATING SYSTEMS 10.14.1    Safety Objective 10.14.2    Safety Design Basis 10.14.3    Description 10.14.3.1  Emergency Switchgear and Battery Rooms 10.14.3.2  Standby Diesel Generator Rooms 10.14.3.3  Service Water Pump Rooms 10.14.4    Safety Evaluation 10.14.5    Inspection and Testing 10.15      PLANT HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS 10.15.1    Power Generation Objective 10.15.2    Power Generation Design Basis 10.15.3    Description 10.15.3.1  General 10.15.3.2  Turbine Building 10.15.3.3  Radwaste Building 10.15.3.4  Miscellaneous Rooms and Buildings CHAPTER 10              10-iii              REV. 25, APRIL 2015


portions of the reactor and power conversion equipment or their
PBAPS UFSAR TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont'd)
SECTION    TITLE 10.15.4    Inspection and Testing 10.16      MAKEUP WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM 10.16.1    Power Generation Objective 10.16.2    Power Generation Design Basis 10.16.3    Description 10.16.4    Inspection and Testing 10.17      INSTRUMENT AIR, SERVICE AIR, AND INSTRUMENT NITROGEN SYSTEMS 10.17.1    Safety Objective 10.17.2    Safety Design Basis 10.17.3    Power Generation Objective 10.17.4    Power Generation Design Basis 10.17.5    Description 10.17.6    Safety Evaluation 10.17.7    Inspection and Testing 10.18      DOMESTIC AND SANITARY WATER SYSTEM 10.18.1    Power Generation Objective 10.18.2    Power Generation Design Basis 10.18.3    Description 10.18.4    Inspection and Testing 10.19      PLANT EQUIPMENT AND FLOOR DRAINAGE SYSTEM 10.19.1    Power Generation Objective 10.19.2    Power Generation Design Basis 10.19.3    Description 10.19.3.1  Radioactive Equipment Drainage System 10.19.3.2  Floor Drainage System 10.19.3.3  Non-Radioactive Drainage System 10.19.3.4  Miscellaneous Drainage System 10.19.3.5  Torus Dewatering Facilities 10.19.4    Inspection and Testing 10.20      PROCESS SAMPLING SYSTEM 10.20.1    Power Generation Objective 10.20.2    Power Generation Design Basis 10.20.3    Description 10.20.4    Inspection and Testing 10.21      COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 10.21.1    Power Generation Objective 10.21.2    Power Generation Design Basis 10.21.3    Description 10.21.4    Inspection and Testing CHAPTER 10              10-iv              REV. 25, APRIL 2015


safety systems.
PBAPS UFSAR TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont'd)
SECTION    TITLE 10.22      STATION LIGHTING SYSTEM 10.22.1    Power Generation Objective 10.22.2    Power Generation Design Basis 10.22.3    Description 10.22.4    Inspection and Testing 10.23      PLANT AUXILIARY BOILERS 10.23.1    Power Generation Objective 10.23.2    Power Generation Design Basis 10.23.3    Description 10.23.4    Inspection and Testing 10.24      EMERGENCY HEAT SINK 10.24.1    Power Generation Objective 10.24.2    Power Generation Design Basis 10.24.3    Description 10.24.4    Inspection and Testing CHAPTER 10                10-v              REV. 25, APRIL 2015


CHAPTER 10 10.2-1 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 10.2  NEW FUEL STORAGE 10.2.1 Introduction
PBAPS UFSAR SECTION 10.0 - AUXILIARY SYSTEMS LIST OF TABLES TABLE      TITLE 10.3.1    Available Makeup Water Sources 10.3.2    Rack Module Data (per unit) 10.3.6.1  Long-Term Surveillance Coupons 10.3.6.2  Long-Term Surveillance General Coupon Characterization 10.3.6.3  Frequency for Coupon Inspection 10.5.1    Fuel Pool Cooling and Cleanup System 10.5.2     Summary of Cooling System Analysis Results 10.6.1    Service Water System Data 10.7.1    High-Pressure Service Water System Equipment Data 10.8.1    Reactor Building Cooling Water System Equipment Data 10.9.1     Emergency Service Water System Equipment Data 10.10.1    Turbine Building Cooling Water System Equipment Data 10.20.1    Process Sampling System 10.24.1   Emergency Heat Sink Equipment Data CHAPTER 10              10-vi              REV. 25, APRIL 2015


New fuel is stored in high density storage racks located in the
PBAPS UFSAR SECTION 10.0 - AUXILIARY SYSTEMS LIST OF FIGURES FIGURE    TITLE 10.3.1    Rack Assembly 10.3.2    Spent Fuel Storage Cell Nominal Dimensions 10.3.3    Consolidated Fuel Canister Arrangement 10.3.4    Spent Fuel Pool Storage Rack Arrangement (Unit 2) 10.3.5    Spent Fuel Pool Storage Rack Arrangement (Unit 3) 10.3.6    Fuel Rack Plan View 10.3.7    Fuel Storage Rack Assembly Details 10.4.1    Plant Refueling Outage Diagram 10.4.2    Thermal Sleeve 10.4.3    Thermal Sleeve Installation Tool 10.5.1    Deleted 10.5.2    Deleted 10.6.1    Deleted 10.7.1    Deleted 10.8.1    Deleted 10.10.1    Deleted 10.11.1    Deleted 10.12.1a  Deleted 10.12.1b  Deleted 10.13.1    Deleted 10.13.2    Deleted CHAPTER 10            10-vii              REV. 25, APRIL 2015


spent fuel pool.  
PBAPS UFSAR LIST OF FIGURES (cont'd)
FIGURE    TITLE 10.14.1    Deleted 10.14.2    Deleted 10.15.1    Deleted 10.15.2    Deleted 10.16.1    Deleted 10.16.2    Deleted 10.17.1    Deleted 10.17.1    Deleted 10.23.1    Deleted 10.24.1    Deleted 10.24.2    Deleted 10.24.3    Deleted 10.24.4    Emergency Heat Sink Facility CHAPTER 10            10-viii            REV. 25, APRIL 2015


10.2.2 Description
PBAPS UFSAR SECTION 10.0 AUXILIARY SYSTEMS 10.1  


New fuel assemblies as received at the plant are stored in metal
==SUMMARY==
 
DESCRIPTION This section describes the reactor and plant auxiliary systems that are required for operation, but which are not integral portions of the reactor and power conversion equipment or their safety systems.
boxes inside an outer metal container. Each outer container and
CHAPTER 10                 10.1-1             REV. 21, APRIL 2007
 
metal box holds two fuel bundles. After removing the box from the
 
outer container, the boxes are hoisted to the refueling floor and
 
the fuel bundles are receipt inspected and placed in the spent
 
fuel pool using the fuel-handling equipment. If a bundle fails
 
receipt inspection, it is tagged in accordance with procedure, placed back into the container, and left on the refueling floor. A
 
GE inspector checks the bundle. He either repairs the problem at
 
the site or returns the damaged bundle for a replacement. In the
 
event that the new fuel cannot be taken to the refueling floor
 
immediately, it can be off-loaded and stored in a roped-off area
 
with a security guard posted. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.3-1 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 10.3  SPENT FUEL STORAGE 10.3.1  Power Generation Objective
 
The power generation objective of the spent fuel storage
 
arrangement is to provide storage space for the spent fuel
 
assemblies which require shielding during storage and handling.
 
10.3.2  Power Generation Design Basis
: 1. Spent fuel storage racks for each reactor are designed to accommodate 3819 fuel assemblies.
: 2. Spent fuel storage racks are designed and arranged so that the fuel assemblies can be efficiently
 
handled during refueling operations.
: 3. Dry storage casks are designed so that spent fuel may be transferred from the wet storage racks into
 
the casks in an efficient manner
 
10.3.3  Safety Design Basis
: 1. All arrangements of fuel in the spent fuel storage racks are maintained in a subcritical configuration having a k eff  0.95 for all conditions.
: 2. Each spent fuel storage rack loaded with fuel and the pool structure are designed to withstand
 
seismic loading to minimize distortion of the spent
 
fuel storage arrangement or loss of spent fuel pool
 
level. 
: 3. Fuel designated for dry cask storage will have a K eff < 0.95. 
: 4. Dry storage casks are evaluated for design basis environmental events and are placed in
 
configurations which do not impact the structural
 
capabilities of the fuel pool, reactor building, or
 
cask transport path.
 
10.3.4  Description
 
The high density spent fuel storage racks provide storage at the bottom of the fuel pool for the spent fuel received
 
from the reactor vessel and new fuel for loading to the
 
reactor vessel. The fuel storage racks at the bottom of
 
the pool are covered with water (normally about 23 ft 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.3-2 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 above the stored fuel) for radiation shielding. Sufficient shielding is provided by maintaining a minimum depth of
 
water at all times. The racks are freestanding, full-
 
length top entry and are designed to maintain the spent
 
fuel in a space geometry which precludes the possibility
 
of criticality (k eff will not exceed 0.95) under any conditions.
 
The high density spent fuel storage racks are of the "poison" type, utilizing a neutron absorbing material to
 
maintain a subcritical fuel array (see Figures 10.3.1, 10.3.2, and 10.3.3). The rack modules are rectilinear in
 
shape and are of nine different array sizes. The racks
 
are arranged in the spent fuel pool as shown in Figure
 
10.3.4 for Unit 2 and Figure 10.3.5 for Unit 3. A total
 
of 3819 storage locations are provided per pool. The
 
racks are capable of storing BWR fuel assemblies (with or
 
without their channels) with a maximum incore k-infinity of 1.270. Maintaining the incore k-infinity  1.270 will assure that the rack k-effective will be equal to or less than that determined in the safety design basis. TS
 
Amendment Nos. 175/178 demonstrated a k-infinity limit of
 
< 1.362 using an analysis of the criticality aspects of the storage of PBAPS fuel assemblies having a fuel
 
enrichment up to 4.5 weight percent of U-235. The
 
analysis methodology and results were described in the GE
 
report, GENE-512-92073, "Peach Bottom Atomic Power Station
 
Spent Fuel Storage K-infinity Conversion Analyses,"
November 1992. The method and the cross-section library
 
used consist of the GE MERIT computer code, using the
 
ENDF/B-IV cross section set, which is stated to have been
 
verified against extensive critical experiments. The
 
MERIT program is a three-dimensional Monte Carlo neutron
 
tracking code that calculates the system effective neutron
 
multiplication factor (K-effective) using a 190 group
 
cross-section library with the Haywood scattering kernel
 
of water. A spent fuel storage criticality validation is
 
performed for each reload to demonstrate that the reload
 
fuel assemblies meet incore K-infinity and rack K-
 
effective storage criticality requirements. Rack module
 
data is given in Table 10.3.2.
TS Amendment 287/290 approved use of neutron absorbing
 
inserts in the spent fuel pool (SFP) storage racks for the
 
purpose of criticality control in the SFPs. This amendment
 
modified TS 4.3, "Fuel storage" and added a new license
 
condition 2.C(14) to support the installation of NETCO-SNAP-IN neutron absorbing inserts into the individual cells of the existing PBAPS SFP storage racks. The 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.3-3 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 installation of inserts addresses the degradation of the neutron absorbing material (Boraflex) previously installed
 
in the SFP racks. The rack inserts are manufactured by
 
NETCO using an aluminum and boron carbide composite
 
material produced by Rio Tinto Alcan, Inc.
 
Analyses of the safety considerations concerning the high density spent fuel storage racks are set forth in a
 
document entitled "Design Report of High Density Spent
 
Fuel Storage Racks for PECO Energy Company (PECO),
formerly Philadelphia Electric Company, Peach Bottom
 
Atomic Power Station Units 2 and 3, Revision 2," dated
 
July 21, 1986. This document describes the high density
 
spent fuel storage racks in detail and contains analyses
 
for seismic events, criticality concerns, structural
 
requirements, thermal and hydraulic requirements, and
 
postulated accident conditions associated with the high
 
density spent fuel racks. Additional analysis has been
 
performed that justifies application of the results of
 
this document for Spent Fuel Pool water temperatures as low as 40 F. The technical evaluation that allowed the use of GE-14 fuel in the Peach Bottom reactors is contained in ECR PB
 
99-02682. The acceptability of storing GE-14 fuel in the
 
Spent Fuel Pool is documented in "GE14 Spent Fuel Storage
 
Rack Analysis for Peach Bottom Atomic Power Station,"
Global Nuclear Fuel Document No. J11-03761-00-SFP, July
 
2000. GNF2 Fuel was evaluated in TS Amendment 287/290 for use of the NETCO-SNAP-IN inserts.
The dry storage cask consists of a fuel basket, a cask body, a protective cover, an overpressure system, penetrations with bolted and sealed covers for leak
 
detection and venting, closure bolts and locating pins.
 
The cask is designed to be lifted in a single failure
 
proof configuration.
 
Analysis of the safety considerations concerning the usage of the dry cask storage system is documented in the PBAPS
 
Independent Fuel Storage Safety Analysis Report (IFSSAR)
 
and PBAPS 10CFR 72.212 Report. These documents discuss in
 
detail the various design basis cask storage at PBAPS.
 
CHAPTER 10 10.3-4 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 10.3.4.1  High Density Spent Fuel Storage Racks The high density spent fuel racks are constructed of stainless steel materials and each rack module is composed
 
of cell assemblies, base plate, and base support assembly.
 
10.3.4.1.1  Cell Assembly
 
Each cell assembly is composed of (1) a full length enclosure constructed of 0.075 inch thick stainless steel, (2) sections of Bisco Boraflex which is neutron absorbing
 
material, and (3) wrapper plates constructed of 0.020 inch thick stainless steel. Additionally, NETCO-SNAP-IN inserts provide augmented neutron absorbing capability.
10.3.4.1.1.1  Cell Enclosure
 
The primary functions of the enclosure are to house fuel assemblies, to maintain the necessary separation between
 
assemblies for subcriticality and to provide structural
 
stiffness for the rack module. The inside square
 
dimension of the cell enclosure is 6.070 inches nominal
 
which accommodates either channeled or unchanneled fuel or
 
consolidated fuel assemblies. A partial plan view is
 
shown in Figure 10.3.6 and a partial elevation view is
 
shown in Figure 10.3.7.
 
10.3.4.1.1.2  Neutron Absorbing Material
 
The Bisco Boraflex manufactured by Brand Industrial Services provided the additional neutron absorbing media
 
required above that inherent in the rack structure
 
material. The Boraflex is fabricated to safety-related
 
nuclear criteria of 10CFR50, Appendix B, and it consists
 
of boron carbide particles as neutron absorbers held in
 
place by a nonmetallic binder. Boraflex contains an
 
initial minimum B 10 areal density of 0.021 gm/cm
: 2. It is a continuous sheet centered on the length of the active
 
fuel. Depending on the location of the cells in a rack
 
module, some cells have the Boraflex on all four sides, some of three sides and some on two sides. Cells with
 
four wrappers are located in the interior of the rack, cells with three wrappers are located on the periphery of
 
the rack, and cells with two (adjacent) wrappers are
 
located at the corners of the rack.
Since NETCO SNAP-IN rack inserts have been fully installed in the Peach Bottom Units 2 and 3 Spent Fuel 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.3-5 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 Pool racks, Boraflex is no longer credited as a neutron absorbing material.
10.3.4.1.1.3  Wrapper Plate
 
The wrapper plates are attached to the outside of the cell enclosure by intermediate spot welding along the entire
 
length of the wrapper, forming the encapsulation of the
 
Boraflex. A water tight seal is not provided between the
 
wrappers and enclosures.
 
10.3.4.1.1.4  Neutron Absorbing Inserts The NETCO-SNAP-IN neutron absorbing inserts are manufactured by NETCO using an aluminum and boron
 
carbide composite material produced by Rio Tinto Alcan, Inc. The material contains 19% by volume of boron
 
carbide. The minimum certified areal density is 0.0105
 
grams/cm 2. An AA1100 aluminum alloy is used as a metal matrix to retain the boron carbide.
The inserts are designed to be an integral part of the
 
existing PBAPS spent fuel racks. The inserts are
 
nominally 0.075 inch-thick, are chevron shaped and have
 
a vertical length which is equal to the cell height of
 
the existing PBAPS spent fuel racks (169 inches). The
 
aluminum and boron carbide composite inserts function by
 
maintaining a greater than 90 degree bend angle when
 
formed, but are subsequently compressed to a 90 degree
 
bend angle when installed in the individual spent fuel
 
rack cells, which provides a bearing force against the
 
inside of the cell walls to retain the inserts in place.
 
10.3.4.1.1.4.1  Seismic and Structural Integrity A combination of analysis and testing has been used to
 
demonstrate acceptable structural and seismic
 
performance of the inserts.
The impact load of a fuel assembly on the neutron
 
absorbing inserts, generated by the horizontal
 
acceleration of a fuel assembly during a design-basis
 
seismic event, was determined to be 403 pounds per square inch (psi). Given that the NETCO-SNAP-IN insert yield stress is approximately 8000 psi, the deformation and subsequent failure of the insert due to seismically-
 
induced impact loads will not occur. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.3-6 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 To determine the stresses imparted on the cells of the existing PBAPS spent fuel racks by the inserts, the
 
limiting case involves the installation of the inserts
 
into the cells. The stresses imparted on the cell walls
 
during installation are not expected to exceed the
 
allowable stress. The additional stress that occurs
 
during installation of the inserts will have no effect
 
on the cell wall structural integrity and the stress
 
remains below the allowable value.
The increased load on the fuel racks from the inserts, which weigh approximately 18 pounds each, will be
 
insignificant and bounded by the existing design.
Analytical and confirmatory numerical analysis were used
 
to evaluate the stresses on the inserts during
 
installation. The stresses remained below the insert
 
material ultimate stress limit. Some instances were
 
identified of plastic deformation, particularly in the
 
wing and bend sections of the insert. However, sufficient elastic margin exists in the inserts, such
 
that adequate retention force is maintained between the
 
insert and cell walls.
Pre-installation testing demonstrated that adequate
 
retention force is maintained by the inserts, such that
 
they remain in place during normal (i.e., fuel handling)
 
and abnormal (i.e., design-basis seismic event) loading
 
conditions. In the unlikely event of warping or bowing
 
of an insert, any additional drag on a fuel assembly
 
will be recognized by a hoist load cell, which is
 
typically used during normal fuel handling activities.
Withdrawal testing showed that the inserts maintained a
 
static friction-based retention force well above the
 
established 200 pounds minimum removal criteria. During
 
a design-basis seismic event, the inserts must maintain
 
a retention force of 40.8 pounds to ensure that the
 
insert configuration remains unchanged, which is a 79.6%
 
reduction of the 200 pound minimum removal force
 
criteria. Over the 20-year expected life of the inserts, it is expected that the inserts will experience a stress
 
relaxation of approximately 50%.
 
CHAPTER 10 10.3-7 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 10.3.4.1.1.4.2  Fuel Handling Accidents The inserts have no effect on previously evaluated fuel handling accidents. This is based on the fact that the
 
installation of the inserts does not reduce the ability
 
of the cell wall or rack base plate to resist dynamic
 
impact loads resulting from a dropped fuel assembly, nor
 
does it affect whether a fuel assembly may become stuck
 
at the bottom of the existing racks.
An evaluation was performed to identify any previously
 
unanalyzed fuel handling accidents resulting from the
 
use of the tool used for installing and removing the
 
inserts. Due to similarities in geometry and the lower
 
weight of the insert tool and inserts compared to a fuel
 
assembly and grapple device used for normal fuel
 
handling activities, a postulated drop of the insert
 
tool and insert is bounded by previously analyzed fuel
 
handling accidents.
 
10.3.4.1.1.4.3  Criticality Analysis A SFP criticality analysis crediting the NETCO-SNAP-IN inserts was provided by Global Nuclear Fuel (GNF) report
 
NECD-33672P, Rev. 1, "Peach Bottom Atomic Power Station:
 
Fuel Storage Criticality Safety Analysis of Spent Fuel
 
Storage Racks with Rack Inserts." The analysis
 
determined a maximum k-effective of 0.92552 at a 95%
 
probability and 95% confidence level, and provides an
 
adequate reactivity margin to the regulatory k-effective
 
limit of 0.95.
Two computational methods were used by GNF in the
 
criticality analysis. GNF lattice design code TGBLA06
 
was used to calculate burned fuel compositions and the
 
in-core k-infinity values. The burned fuel compositions
 
were then used in MCNP-05P, the GNF proprietary version
 
of MCNP5, to obtain fuel storage rack k-effective
 
values. Tables 12, 13, and 14 of NEDC-33672P provide the biases
 
and uncertainties used to determine the maximum in-rack
 
k-effective. Biases are arithmetically added to the
 
calculated k-effective to account for conditions not
 
directly modeled in the base case analysis. Biases are
 
added for operational variables, abnormal or accident
 
conditions, and additional configurations. Uncertainty
 
components are statistically summed and then added to
 
the calculated k-effective. Uncertainties include 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.3-8 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 manufacturing tolerances as well as computational uncertainties.
 
10.3.4.1.1.4.4  Abnormal or Accident Conditions The following abnormal accident conditions were
 
considered in the PBAPS SFP criticality analysis.
: 1. Missing NETCO-SNAP-IN insert, 2. Dropped fuel, 3. Damaged fue1, 4. No NETCO-SNAP-IN inserts on rack periphery, 5. Misplacement of a fuel assembly, 6. Lateral movement of a rack module,
: 7. Loss of SFP cooling, and
: 8. Inaccessible storage locations.
 
Analysis has determined the reactivity impact for the
 
above conditions and determined that they are either
 
bounded by other conditions or the corresponding
 
reactivity increase has been added to the calculated k-
 
effective.
 
10.3.4.1.1.4.5  Boraflex Credit for the Interim Period As part of a Peach Bottom license amendment (287/290, 5/21/16) for the NETCO SNAP-IN rack inserts, a license condition took credit for Boraflex during an interim period prior to installation of all inserts. Since NETCO SNAP-IN rack inserts have been fully installed in both Peach Bottom Unit 2 and Unit 3 Spent Fuel Pool racks, Boraflex is no longer credited as a neutron absorbing material.
GNF report 000N6365-R0, Revision 0, "Peach Bottom Atomic Power Station Units 2 and 3 Spent Fuel Pool Criticality Analysis Gap Sensitivity Study," provides a supplement to NEDC-33686P, Revision 1 that evaluates additional gap configurations. This analysis demonstrates that the results of NEDC-33686P, Revision 1 are bounding when compared to actual gap distributions in the pool.
 
10.3.4.1.2  Base Plate
 
The base plate is a 0.50 inch thick stainless steel plate with chamfered through holes centered at each storage
 
location which provides for a seating surface for the fuel
 
assemblies. These holes also provide passage for coolant
 
flow for each fuel assembly. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.3-9 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 10.3.4.1.3  Base Support Assembly
 
Each rack module is provided with base support assemblies which are located at the center of the four corner cells
 
within the module and at interior module locations to
 
distribute pool floor loading.
 
Each base support assembly is composed of a leveling block assembly, a leveling screw, and a support pad (see Figure
 
10.3.7). The top of the leveling block assembly is welded
 
to the bottom of the base plate. The leveling block
 
assembly is threaded at the bottom to accept the leveling
 
screw which sits in the support pad providing support for
 
the rack. The screw is remotely adjustable at rack
 
installation to obtain a level condition. The screw has
 
an adjustable range up to 1 inch. The leveling pad has a swivel joint to accommodate a maximum of 2 out-or-level condition of the pool liner.
The base support assemblies are welded to the bottom of the base plate at their appropriate support locations for
 
each rack (refer to Figure 10.3.7). The cell assemblies
 
are then positioned and welded to the top surface of the
 
base plate. The cell assemblies are positioned in a
 
checkerboard pattern with the space between four cell
 
assemblies forming a fifth storage locations. In addition
 
to being welded to the base plate, the vertical corners of
 
adjacent cells are welded to each other at two locations
 
along their length to form a integral structure. Along
 
the peripheral rows of the rack module, stainless steel
 
cover plates are welded between the cell assemblies to
 
enclose the non-cell locations. Some cover plates have
 
wrapper plates with Boraflex, identical to those used on
 
the cells, affixed to their inward side to satisfy
 
adjacent rack module criticality concerns. Each rack has
 
provisions for attachment of a lifting fixture for
 
installation and/or removal of the racks in the spent fuel
 
pool. The base plate has slotted holes at four locations
 
designed to accept lift rods which are inserted down
 
through the storage cells. The lift rods are connected at
 
the top of a lifting fixture.
 
The structure of the racks is designed to maintain the required spacing between stored fuel assemblies in the
 
event of impact of a fuel bundle dropped on the racks from
 
an elevation of 24 inches (maximum). For this case, the
 
integrity of the storage rack is not compromised and
 
damage to the racks is above the poison area; therefore, 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.3-10 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 the criticality requirements are not violated. The structure of the racks is also analyzed for effects of the
 
impact of a fuel bundle dropped through an empty storage
 
cavity. The fuel drop accident analysis shows that the
 
structure absorbs the energy and the criticality
 
requirements are not violated. Analyses are also
 
conducted of the stresses on a storage rack due to maximum
 
uplift of the refueling crane on a fuel bundle which is
 
stuck. The evaluation of this case showed no permanent
 
deformation of the storage rack. The high density spent
 
fuel storage racks are seismic Category I equipment as
 
defined in NRC Regulatory Guide 1.13. These racks are
 
designed to withstand the effects of a maximum credible
 
earthquake and remain functional, in accordance with NRC
 
Regulatory Guide 1.29 and the Code of Federal Regulations, Title 10, Part 100.
 
The basic design criteria for the spent fuel storage rack are outlined by the NRC position paper. The NRC position
 
paper entitled "OT Position For Review and Acceptance of
 
Spent Fuel Storage and Handling Applications" dated April
 
14, 1978, as amended by the NRC letter dated January 18, 1979, offers two codes for deriving the allowable
 
stresses. The two codes are AISC Code or the ASME Code
 
III Subsection NF. The structural analysis herein is
 
based on the allowable stresses as outlined in ASME Code
 
III Subsection NF. The results of the seismic and
 
structural analyses are interrelated as the loads of the
 
seismic analysis are used in the structural analysis to
 
calculate stresses. The resulting margins of safety are
 
positive and satisfy the requirements of the ASME code.
 
The pool floor loads resulting from the seismic and


structural analyses also satisfy the requirements of the  
PBAPS UFSAR 10.2  NEW FUEL STORAGE 10.2.1  Introduction New fuel is stored in high density storage racks located in the spent fuel pool.
10.2.2  Description New fuel assemblies as received at the plant are stored in metal boxes inside an outer metal container. Each outer container and metal box holds two fuel bundles. After removing the box from the outer container, the boxes are hoisted to the refueling floor and the fuel bundles are receipt inspected and placed in the spent fuel pool using the fuel-handling equipment. If a bundle fails receipt inspection, it is tagged in accordance with procedure, placed back into the container, and left on the refueling floor. A GE inspector checks the bundle. He either repairs the problem at the site or returns the damaged bundle for a replacement. In the event that the new fuel cannot be taken to the refueling floor immediately, it can be off-loaded and stored in a roped-off area with a security guard posted.
CHAPTER 10                  10.2-1              REV. 21, APRIL 2007


PECO specification for the spent fuel storage racks. The  
PBAPS UFSAR 10.3  SPENT FUEL STORAGE 10.3.1  Power Generation Objective The power generation objective of the spent fuel storage arrangement is to provide storage space for the spent fuel assemblies which require shielding during storage and handling.
10.3.2  Power Generation Design Basis
: 1. Spent fuel storage racks for each reactor are designed to accommodate 3819 fuel assemblies.
: 2. Spent fuel storage racks are designed and arranged so that the fuel assemblies can be efficiently handled during refueling operations.
: 3. Dry storage casks are designed so that spent fuel may be transferred from the wet storage racks into the casks in an efficient manner 10.3.3  Safety Design Basis
: 1.      All arrangements of fuel in the spent fuel storage racks are maintained in a subcritical configuration having a keff  0.95 for all conditions.
: 2. Each spent fuel storage rack loaded with fuel and the pool structure are designed to withstand seismic loading to minimize distortion of the spent fuel storage arrangement or loss of spent fuel pool level.
: 3. Fuel designated for dry cask storage will have a Keff
                < 0.95.
: 4. Dry storage casks are evaluated for design basis environmental events and are placed in configurations which do not impact the structural capabilities of the fuel pool, reactor building, or cask transport path.
10.3.4  Description The high density spent fuel storage racks provide storage at the bottom of the fuel pool for the spent fuel received from the reactor vessel and new fuel for loading to the reactor vessel. The fuel storage racks at the bottom of the pool are covered with water (normally about 23 ft CHAPTER 10                    10.3-1            REV. 26, APRIL 2017


displacement results of the seismic analyses are used in  
PBAPS UFSAR above the stored fuel) for radiation shielding. Sufficient shielding is provided by maintaining a minimum depth of water at all times. The racks are freestanding, full-length top entry and are designed to maintain the spent fuel in a space geometry which precludes the possibility of criticality (keff will not exceed 0.95) under any conditions.
The high density spent fuel storage racks are of the "poison" type, utilizing a neutron absorbing material to maintain a subcritical fuel array (see Figures 10.3.1, 10.3.2, and 10.3.3). The rack modules are rectilinear in shape and are of nine different array sizes. The racks are arranged in the spent fuel pool as shown in Figure 10.3.4 for Unit 2 and Figure 10.3.5 for Unit 3. A total of 3819 storage locations are provided per pool. The racks are capable of storing BWR fuel assemblies (with or without their channels) with a maximum incore k-infinity of 1.270. Maintaining the incore k-infinity  1.270 will assure that the rack k-effective will be equal to or less than that determined in the safety design basis. TS Amendment Nos. 175/178 demonstrated a k-infinity limit of
        < 1.362 using an analysis of the criticality aspects of the storage of PBAPS fuel assemblies having a fuel enrichment up to 4.5 weight percent of U-235. The analysis methodology and results were described in the GE report, GENE-512-92073, "Peach Bottom Atomic Power Station Spent Fuel Storage K-infinity Conversion Analyses,"
November 1992. The method and the cross-section library used consist of the GE MERIT computer code, using the ENDF/B-IV cross section set, which is stated to have been verified against extensive critical experiments. The MERIT program is a three-dimensional Monte Carlo neutron tracking code that calculates the system effective neutron multiplication factor (K-effective) using a 190 group cross-section library with the Haywood scattering kernel of water. A spent fuel storage criticality validation is performed for each reload to demonstrate that the reload fuel assemblies meet incore K-infinity and rack K-effective storage criticality requirements. Rack module data is given in Table 10.3.2.
TS Amendment 287/290 approved use of neutron absorbing inserts in the spent fuel pool (SFP) storage racks for the purpose of criticality control in the SFPs. This amendment modified TS 4.3, "Fuel storage" and added a new license condition 2.C(14) to support the installation of NETCO-SNAP-IN neutron absorbing inserts into the individual cells of the existing PBAPS SFP storage racks. The CHAPTER 10                    10.3-2            REV. 26, APRIL 2017


the lift-off stability calculation and show that factor of  
PBAPS UFSAR installation of inserts addresses the degradation of the neutron absorbing material (Boraflex) previously installed in the SFP racks. The rack inserts are manufactured by NETCO using an aluminum and boron carbide composite material produced by Rio Tinto Alcan, Inc.
Analyses of the safety considerations concerning the high density spent fuel storage racks are set forth in a document entitled "Design Report of High Density Spent Fuel Storage Racks for PECO Energy Company (PECO),
formerly Philadelphia Electric Company, Peach Bottom Atomic Power Station Units 2 and 3, Revision 2," dated July 21, 1986. This document describes the high density spent fuel storage racks in detail and contains analyses for seismic events, criticality concerns, structural requirements, thermal and hydraulic requirements, and postulated accident conditions associated with the high density spent fuel racks. Additional analysis has been performed that justifies application of the results of this document for Spent Fuel Pool water temperatures as low as 40F.
The technical evaluation that allowed the use of GE-14 fuel in the Peach Bottom reactors is contained in ECR PB 99-02682. The acceptability of storing GE-14 fuel in the Spent Fuel Pool is documented in "GE14 Spent Fuel Storage Rack Analysis for Peach Bottom Atomic Power Station,"
Global Nuclear Fuel Document No. J11-03761-00-SFP, July 2000. GNF2 Fuel was evaluated in TS Amendment 287/290 for use of the NETCO-SNAP-IN inserts.
The dry storage cask consists of a fuel basket, a cask body, a protective cover, an overpressure system, penetrations with bolted and sealed covers for leak detection and venting, closure bolts and locating pins.
The cask is designed to be lifted in a single failure proof configuration.
Analysis of the safety considerations concerning the usage of the dry cask storage system is documented in the PBAPS Independent Fuel Storage Safety Analysis Report (IFSSAR) and PBAPS 10CFR 72.212 Report. These documents discuss in detail the various design basis cask storage at PBAPS.
CHAPTER 10                  10.3-3            REV. 26, APRIL 2017


safety against overturning is greater that the 1.5 minimum  
PBAPS UFSAR 10.3.4.1  High Density Spent Fuel Storage Racks The high density spent fuel racks are constructed of stainless steel materials and each rack module is composed of cell assemblies, base plate, and base support assembly.
10.3.4.1.1  Cell Assembly Each cell assembly is composed of (1) a full length enclosure constructed of 0.075 inch thick stainless steel, (2) sections of Bisco Boraflex which is neutron absorbing material, and (3) wrapper plates constructed of 0.020 inch thick stainless steel. Additionally, NETCO-SNAP-IN inserts provide augmented neutron absorbing capability.
10.3.4.1.1.1  Cell Enclosure The primary functions of the enclosure are to house fuel assemblies, to maintain the necessary separation between assemblies for subcriticality and to provide structural stiffness for the rack module. The inside square dimension of the cell enclosure is 6.070 inches nominal which accommodates either channeled or unchanneled fuel or consolidated fuel assemblies. A partial plan view is shown in Figure 10.3.6 and a partial elevation view is shown in Figure 10.3.7.
10.3.4.1.1.2  Neutron Absorbing Material The Bisco Boraflex manufactured by Brand Industrial Services provided the additional neutron absorbing media required above that inherent in the rack structure material. The Boraflex is fabricated to safety-related nuclear criteria of 10CFR50, Appendix B, and it consists of boron carbide particles as neutron absorbers held in place by a nonmetallic binder. Boraflex contains an initial minimum B10 areal density of 0.021 gm/cm2. It is a continuous sheet centered on the length of the active fuel. Depending on the location of the cells in a rack module, some cells have the Boraflex on all four sides, some of three sides and some on two sides. Cells with four wrappers are located in the interior of the rack, cells with three wrappers are located on the periphery of the rack, and cells with two (adjacent) wrappers are located at the corners of the rack.
Since NETCO SNAP-IN rack inserts have been fully installed in the Peach Bottom Units 2 and 3 Spent Fuel CHAPTER 10                  10.3-4              REV. 26, APRIL 2017


requirement of the NRC position paper. The rack seismic  
PBAPS UFSAR Pool racks, Boraflex is no longer credited as a neutron absorbing material.
10.3.4.1.1.3  Wrapper Plate The wrapper plates are attached to the outside of the cell enclosure by intermediate spot welding along the entire length of the wrapper, forming the encapsulation of the Boraflex. A water tight seal is not provided between the wrappers and enclosures.
10.3.4.1.1.4  Neutron Absorbing Inserts The NETCO-SNAP-IN neutron absorbing inserts are manufactured by NETCO using an aluminum and boron carbide composite material produced by Rio Tinto Alcan, Inc. The material contains 19% by volume of boron carbide. The minimum certified areal density is 0.0105 grams/cm2. An AA1100 aluminum alloy is used as a metal matrix to retain the boron carbide.
The inserts are designed to be an integral part of the existing PBAPS spent fuel racks. The inserts are nominally 0.075 inch-thick, are chevron shaped and have a vertical length which is equal to the cell height of the existing PBAPS spent fuel racks (169 inches). The aluminum and boron carbide composite inserts function by maintaining a greater than 90 degree bend angle when formed, but are subsequently compressed to a 90 degree bend angle when installed in the individual spent fuel rack cells, which provides a bearing force against the inside of the cell walls to retain the inserts in place.
10.3.4.1.1.4.1 Seismic and Structural Integrity A combination of analysis and testing has been used to demonstrate acceptable structural and seismic performance of the inserts.
The impact load of a fuel assembly on the neutron absorbing inserts, generated by the horizontal acceleration of a fuel assembly during a design-basis seismic event, was determined to be 403 pounds per square inch (psi). Given that the NETCO-SNAP-IN insert yield stress is approximately 8000 psi, the deformation and subsequent failure of the insert due to seismically-induced impact loads will not occur.
CHAPTER 10                    10.3-5            REV. 26, APRIL 2017


displacements are used in conjunction with thermal
PBAPS UFSAR To determine the stresses imparted on the cells of the existing PBAPS spent fuel racks by the inserts, the limiting case involves the installation of the inserts into the cells. The stresses imparted on the cell walls during installation are not expected to exceed the allowable stress. The additional stress that occurs during installation of the inserts will have no effect on the cell wall structural integrity and the stress remains below the allowable value.
The increased load on the fuel racks from the inserts, which weigh approximately 18 pounds each, will be insignificant and bounded by the existing design.
Analytical and confirmatory numerical analysis were used to evaluate the stresses on the inserts during installation. The stresses remained below the insert material ultimate stress limit. Some instances were identified of plastic deformation, particularly in the wing and bend sections of the insert. However, sufficient elastic margin exists in the inserts, such that adequate retention force is maintained between the insert and cell walls.
Pre-installation testing demonstrated that adequate retention force is maintained by the inserts, such that they remain in place during normal (i.e., fuel handling) and abnormal (i.e., design-basis seismic event) loading conditions. In the unlikely event of warping or bowing of an insert, any additional drag on a fuel assembly will be recognized by a hoist load cell, which is typically used during normal fuel handling activities.
Withdrawal testing showed that the inserts maintained a static friction-based retention force well above the established 200 pounds minimum removal criteria. During a design-basis seismic event, the inserts must maintain a retention force of 40.8 pounds to ensure that the insert configuration remains unchanged, which is a 79.6%
reduction of the 200 pound minimum removal force criteria. Over the 20-year expected life of the inserts, it is expected that the inserts will experience a stress relaxation of approximately 50%.
CHAPTER 10                  10.3-6            REV. 26, APRIL 2017


displacements to show that there is no rack-to-rack, rack-
PBAPS UFSAR 10.3.4.1.1.4.2 Fuel Handling Accidents The inserts have no effect on previously evaluated fuel handling accidents. This is based on the fact that the installation of the inserts does not reduce the ability of the cell wall or rack base plate to resist dynamic impact loads resulting from a dropped fuel assembly, nor does it affect whether a fuel assembly may become stuck at the bottom of the existing racks.
An evaluation was performed to identify any previously unanalyzed fuel handling accidents resulting from the use of the tool used for installing and removing the inserts. Due to similarities in geometry and the lower weight of the insert tool and inserts compared to a fuel assembly and grapple device used for normal fuel handling activities, a postulated drop of the insert tool and insert is bounded by previously analyzed fuel handling accidents.
10.3.4.1.1.4.3 Criticality Analysis A SFP criticality analysis crediting the NETCO-SNAP-IN inserts was provided by Global Nuclear Fuel (GNF) report NECD-33672P, Rev. 1, "Peach Bottom Atomic Power Station:
Fuel Storage Criticality Safety Analysis of Spent Fuel Storage Racks with Rack Inserts." The analysis determined a maximum k-effective of 0.92552 at a 95%
probability and 95% confidence level, and provides an adequate reactivity margin to the regulatory k-effective limit of 0.95.
Two computational methods were used by GNF in the criticality analysis. GNF lattice design code TGBLA06 was used to calculate burned fuel compositions and the in-core k-infinity values. The burned fuel compositions were then used in MCNP-05P, the GNF proprietary version of MCNP5, to obtain fuel storage rack k-effective values.
Tables 12, 13, and 14 of NEDC-33672P provide the biases and uncertainties used to determine the maximum in-rack k-effective. Biases are arithmetically added to the calculated k-effective to account for conditions not directly modeled in the base case analysis. Biases are added for operational variables, abnormal or accident conditions, and additional configurations. Uncertainty components are statistically summed and then added to the calculated k-effective. Uncertainties include CHAPTER 10                  10.3-7            REV. 26, APRIL 2017


to-pool floor obstruction collision.  
PBAPS UFSAR manufacturing tolerances as well as computational uncertainties.
10.3.4.1.1.4.4 Abnormal or Accident Conditions The following abnormal accident conditions were considered in the PBAPS SFP criticality analysis.
: 1. Missing NETCO-SNAP-IN insert,
: 2. Dropped fuel,
: 3. Damaged fue1,
: 4. No NETCO-SNAP-IN inserts on rack periphery,
: 5. Misplacement of a fuel assembly,
: 6. Lateral movement of a rack module,
: 7. Loss of SFP cooling, and
: 8. Inaccessible storage locations.
Analysis has determined the reactivity impact for the above conditions and determined that they are either bounded by other conditions or the corresponding reactivity increase has been added to the calculated k-effective.
10.3.4.1.1.4.5 Boraflex Credit for the Interim Period As part of a Peach Bottom license amendment (287/290, 5/21/16) for the NETCO SNAP-IN rack inserts, a license condition took credit for Boraflex during an interim period prior to installation of all inserts. Since NETCO SNAP-IN rack inserts have been fully installed in both Peach Bottom Unit 2 and Unit 3 Spent Fuel Pool racks, Boraflex is no longer credited as a neutron absorbing material.
GNF report 000N6365-R0, Revision 0, "Peach Bottom Atomic Power Station Units 2 and 3 Spent Fuel Pool Criticality Analysis Gap Sensitivity Study," provides a supplement to NEDC-33686P, Revision 1 that evaluates additional gap configurations. This analysis demonstrates that the results of NEDC-33686P, Revision 1 are bounding when compared to actual gap distributions in the pool.
10.3.4.1.2  Base Plate The base plate is a 0.50 inch thick stainless  steel plate with chamfered through holes centered at each  storage location which provides for a seating surface  for the fuel assemblies. These holes also provide passage  for coolant flow for each fuel assembly.
CHAPTER 10                  10.3-8              REV. 26, APRIL 2017


10.3.4.2 Spent Fuel Pool
PBAPS UFSAR 10.3.4.1.3  Base Support Assembly Each rack module is provided with base support assemblies which are located at the center of the four corner cells within the module and at interior module locations to distribute pool floor loading.
Each base support assembly is composed of a leveling block assembly, a leveling screw, and a support pad (see Figure 10.3.7). The top of the leveling block assembly is welded to the bottom of the base plate. The leveling block assembly is threaded at the bottom to accept the leveling screw which sits in the support pad providing support for the rack. The screw is remotely adjustable at rack installation to obtain a level condition. The screw has an adjustable range up to 1 inch. The leveling pad has a swivel joint to accommodate a maximum of 2 out-or-level condition of the pool liner.
The base support assemblies are welded to the bottom of the base plate at their appropriate support locations for each rack (refer to Figure 10.3.7). The cell assemblies are then positioned and welded to the top surface of the base plate. The cell assemblies are positioned in a checkerboard pattern with the space between four cell assemblies forming a fifth storage locations. In addition to being welded to the base plate, the vertical corners of adjacent cells are welded to each other at two locations along their length to form a integral structure. Along the peripheral rows of the rack module, stainless steel cover plates are welded between the cell assemblies to enclose the non-cell locations. Some cover plates have wrapper plates with Boraflex, identical to those used on the cells, affixed to their inward side to satisfy adjacent rack module criticality concerns. Each rack has provisions for attachment of a lifting fixture for installation and/or removal of the racks in the spent fuel pool. The base plate has slotted holes at four locations designed to accept lift rods which are inserted down through the storage cells. The lift rods are connected at the top of a lifting fixture.
The structure of the racks is designed to maintain the required spacing between stored fuel assemblies in the event of impact of a fuel bundle dropped on the racks from an elevation of 24 inches (maximum). For this case, the integrity of the storage rack is not compromised and damage to the racks is above the poison area; therefore, CHAPTER 10                  10.3-9            REV. 26, APRIL 2017


The fuel pool together with the dryer-separator storage pool form a channel-shaped beam supported in the middle by  
PBAPS UFSAR the criticality requirements are not violated. The structure of the racks is also analyzed for effects of the impact of a fuel bundle dropped through an empty storage cavity. The fuel drop accident analysis shows that the structure absorbs the energy and the criticality requirements are not violated. Analyses are also conducted of the stresses on a storage rack due to maximum uplift of the refueling crane on a fuel bundle which is stuck. The evaluation of this case showed no permanent deformation of the storage rack. The high density spent fuel storage racks are seismic Category I equipment as defined in NRC Regulatory Guide 1.13. These racks are designed to withstand the effects of a maximum credible earthquake and remain functional, in accordance with NRC Regulatory Guide 1.29 and the Code of Federal Regulations, Title 10, Part 100.
The basic design criteria for the spent fuel storage rack are outlined by the NRC position paper. The NRC position paper entitled "OT Position For Review and Acceptance of Spent Fuel Storage and Handling Applications" dated April 14, 1978, as amended by the NRC letter dated January 18, 1979, offers two codes for deriving the allowable stresses. The two codes are AISC Code or the ASME Code III Subsection NF. The structural analysis herein is based on the allowable stresses as outlined in ASME Code III Subsection NF. The results of the seismic and structural analyses are interrelated as the loads of the seismic analysis are used in the structural analysis to calculate stresses. The resulting margins of safety are positive and satisfy the requirements of the ASME code.
The pool floor loads resulting from the seismic and structural analyses also satisfy the requirements of the PECO specification for the spent fuel storage racks. The displacement results of the seismic analyses are used in the lift-off stability calculation and show that factor of safety against overturning is greater that the 1.5 minimum requirement of the NRC position paper. The rack seismic displacements are used in conjunction with thermal displacements to show that there is no rack-to-rack, rack-to-pool floor obstruction collision.
10.3.4.2  Spent Fuel Pool The fuel pool together with the dryer-separator storage pool form a channel-shaped beam supported in the middle by the biological concrete shield structure and at the outer ends by the building walls.
CHAPTER 10                  10.3-10            REV. 26, APRIL 2017


the biological concrete shield structure and at the outer
PBAPS UFSAR The pool floor carries a live load in addition to the water load. A system of large steel shapes is used to support the weight of the wet concrete only. Deep beam action was checked and interactions of elements accounted for. A finite element analysis was performed to check temperature stresses in combination with other loads.
Hydrodynamic effects of water were also included in the analysis.
Once the integrity of the system was ascertained, local stresses, embedments, connections, girder deflection, and discontinuities were investigated.
The pool is lined with stainless steel and is designed to preclude inadvertent loss of water from the pool.
There are no connections to the fuel storage pool which could allow the fuel pool to be drained below the pool gate between the reactor well and the fuel pool when the pool gate is in place or below 10 feet above the top of active fuel. Lines extending below this level are equipped with syphon breaker holes to prevent inadvertent pool drainage. Systems for maintaining water quality and quantity are designed so that any maloperation or failure of such systems will not cause fuel to be uncovered.
The fuel storage pool is designed to seismic Class I criteria and so that no single failure of structures or equipment will cause the inability (1) to maintain irradiated fuel submerged in water, (2) to reestablish normal fuel pool water level, or (3) to safely remove fuel. To prevent leakage, the pool is lined with stainless steel. In addition to providing a high degree of integrity, the lining is reinforced to withstand forces that might occur when the transfer cask is moved in the cask storage area.
Interconnected drainage paths are provided behind the liner. These paths are designed (1) to prevent pressure buildup behind the liner plate, (2) to prevent the uncontrolled loss of contaminated pool water to the secondary containment, and (3) to provide expedient liner leak detection and measurement.
Protection of the pool liner in the cask storage area for the normal cask lowering operation is provided by a 1-inch thick steel wearing plate. This will prevent any damage to the liner over plant life occasioned by normal fuel cask handling. Additionally, interlocks are provided to prevent the crane trolley, with a predetermined load on CHAPTER 10                  10.3-11            REV. 26, APRIL 2017


ends by the building walls.  
PBAPS UFSAR its main hook, from passing over the fuel pool. Strict administrative control is used for bypassing the interlocks during cask handling operations.
The reactor building crane main hook and the lifting device associated with the cask are of a single failure proof design such that a single failure will not result in dropping the load. The available makeup water sources to the spent fuel pool and associated flow rates are presented in Table 10.3.1.
The spent fuel pool cask pit area restraining structure has been analyzed to withstand cask impacts due to postulated design events. Cask placement in the center of the cask pit area is controlled in accordance with station procedures. This includes maintaining the appropriate centering tolerance as well the angular placement of the cask with respect to the trunnions and the restraining structure.
10.3.4.3  Fuel Pool Level Alarms Low water level alarms are provided locally and in the main control room in the event of water loss. The low water level alarms are part of the fuel pool cooling system. As a backup, flow alarms are provided in the drain lines of the reactor vessel to drywell seal, drywell to concrete seal, and fuel pool gate to detect leakage.
10.3.4.4  Dry Cask Storage Dry Cask Storage of spent nuclear fuel has been evaluated for PBAPS. This program meets the requirements of 10CFR 72 and utilizes the General License issued under 10CFR 72.
10.3.4.4.1  Dry Cask Storage Rigging and Handling The storage cask is handled by the Reactor Building Crane in a single failure proof configuration. Other cask components such as the lid and basket hold down ring are also handled in a single failure proof configuration unless specifically evaluated otherwise in accordance with UFSAR Section 10.A.11. All cask movement in the Reactor Building will be consistent with NUREG-0612, over designated safe load paths and either with the single failure proof Reactor Building Crane or with the cask transporter with the cask at the appropriate analyzed heights. All cask movement in the Reactor Building will be on designated safe load paths to ensure that cask drop loads where applicable will not affect the safety of the CHAPTER 10                  10.3-12              REV. 26, APRIL 2017


CHAPTER 10 10.3-11 REV. 26, APRIL 2017  The pool floor carries a live load in addition to the water load. A system of large steel shapes is used to support the weight of the wet concrete only. Deep beam
PBAPS UFSAR PBAPS plant. The cask transporter is not single failure proof but has been evaluated for cask drops and found to be acceptable. The cask is rigged in a single-failure-proof configuration while in the spent fuel pool by ensuring a procedurally controlled amount of water is removed from the loaded cask.
10.3.4.4.2  Dry Cask Structural Considerations A calculation was performed to consider the acceptability of a drop of a loaded cask from a cask transporter in the Reactor Building onto the Elevation 135' floor. The calculation demonstrates the structural adequacy of the impact floor and the absence of effects on safety related equipment beneath it at a lift height less than 2.5.
Superficial damage to the floor at el. 135' would be repaired as appropriate. The lift height is procedurally controlled.
The cask will be rigged in a single failure proof configuration while rigged from the reactor building crane in the Reactor Building hatchway. The placement of the cask in the hatchway will be such that credible cask swinging in the hatchway during a seismic event will not result in cask / plant impacts. Therefore, damage to the plant is precluded.
The structural capacity of the Reactor Building floor at el. 234' has been evaluated for cask operations. These analyses assumed a coincident maximum credible earthquake.
The designated cask laydown area is controlled by spent fuel procedures.
The restraint structure (without the vertical guides) in the spent fuel cask pit area of the fuel pool was modeled using finite element analysis techniques and evaluated for structural adequacy under the effects of combined loadings postulated for the structure consistent with the PBAPS UFSAR Appendix C.
Cask impacts on the restraint structure due to postulated seismic (MCE) event were evaluated for the suspended cask (pendulum effect during hoisting) and for the free-standing cask located on the wear plate (sliding and tipping) and found acceptable.
Administrative controls and procedural requirements assure that the cask is appropriately centered within the specified tolerance during the move-in/move-out and cask placement operations.
CHAPTER 10                  10.3-13            REV. 26, APRIL 2017


action was checked and interactions of elements accounted
PBAPS UFSAR Passage of the cask transporter over the access road and haul path, with or without a cask, does not physically affect systems, structures and components (SSCs) of the PBAPS plants. The haul path and access road are well defined by roadway markings to guide the cask transporter driver. In the event the transporter fails or is inadvertently driven off the designated haul path, off-normal procedures exist to ensure that operations are halted. Cask drops along the transport route were evaluated and found acceptable.
10.3.4.4.3  Dry Cask Fuel Pool Operations Cask insertion into the fuel pool will be controlled by procedures to ensure that the fuel pool level is maintained. Fuel pool level will be procedurally controlled by a combination of activities, including as necessary, turning off the fuel pool cooling system, lowering and raising the fuel pool level control weir gate, draining/filling the skimmer surge tanks, and controlling the filling and draining of the casks as appropriate. None of the involved activities can result in inadvertent draining of the fuel pool.
Before each cask loading campaign a plan will be prepared that specifies the fuel assemblies to be moved from the pool into the cask, and their specified assigned location in the cask fuel basket. Selection of the correct fuel assemblies from the fuel pool racks and correct placement in the cask basket will be controlled by procedural methods. Any mispositioning that could occur would be detected by confirmatory monitoring. Normal site fuel movement procedures will be used by appropriately qualified personnel.
The elevation of the fuel bundles must be increased in order to provide clearance over the lip of the open dry storage casks, which are taller than the cask for which the spent fuel pool was originally designed.
The new normal-up setpoint needed to load an ISFSI cask will be used only for fuel cask loading and unloading operations.
10.3.4.4.5  Dry Cask Storage Design Basis Events The postulated events that could occur during cask operations are discussed in the IFSSAR and 10CFR 72.212 Report. The following is a summary of those events that CHAPTER 10                  10.3-14              REV. 26, APRIL 2017


for. A finite element analysis was performed to check
PBAPS UFSAR could have potential impacts or interaction with PBAPS 2 and 3.
Fuel Bundle Drop A design basis fuel bundle drop was evaluated and found to be bounded by existing accident analysis. Criticality, radiological releases and effects on the ISFSI cask and fuel pool liner were evaluated and found acceptable.
Wrong Fuel Insertion The TN-68 IFSSAR evaluates the impact on the cask if an incorrect fuel assembly is loaded. These events are precluded due to administrative control and training of personnel involved with loading the cask. Procedural controls will ensure that only allowed fuel is selected for loading into a cask. Additionally, verifications of fuel being loaded will ensure that incorrectly loaded fuel does not go undetected. The TN-68 IFSSAR concludes that fuel with heat generation greater than allowed is not a concern to the cask as long as the cask is submerged in the fuel pool. Because there are multiple layers of fuel verification prior to placing the lid on the cask, there is no concern for incorrectly loaded fuel with a higher than allowed heat generation rate. The TN-68 IFSSAR evaluates the loading of a fuel assembly with higher than allowed enrichment and determines the impact on the criticality margin in the cask. For worst case conditions and placement into the cask, a fuel assembly with an initial enrichment of 5.0% was evaluated and determined to not cause any criticality concerns. Loading verifications prior to placing the lid on the cask would detect the incorrectly loaded assembly and remove it prior to continuing loading operations.
Cask Drop / Tip Various scenarios involving the potential for cask drop/tip were evaluated. In no case, does the cask tip over. For the drop scenarios, the cask remains within its licensed design basis.
Natural Events The cask and associated support equipment has been evaluated for various natural events. In all cases, the cask was shown to not tip over. Cask drops are possible when suspended on the transporter, however, these drops have been evaluated as discussed earlier. Impacts of CHAPTER 10                  10.3-15            REV. 26, APRIL 2017


temperature stresses in combination with other loads.  
PBAPS UFSAR natural events have been considered in the analysis of the cask while in the Reactor Building and have been found to not result in an uncontrolled lowering of the cask or other damage to plant equipment due to cask impacts.
Fires and Explosions The TN-68 cask is designed to withstand various fires and explosions. The cask is not combustible and therefore poses no new significant fire or explosion threat to the plant. The transporter has been evaluated and found acceptable.
Cask Seal Leak The worst case seal leakage has been demonstrated in the TN-68 SAR to be well below regulatory limits.
Cask Loading Operations Issues During cask loading, various contingency actions may be required to perform in the event (for example) of the inability to get the cask adequately drained and filled with helium or the inability to meet the leak tightness requirements. Procedures exist to direct actions in these off-normal conditions. These conditions are governed by TN-68 Tech Specs to ensure that cask parameters are not exceeded. These actions may include returning the cask to the spent fuel pool for unloading. Because there are adequate controls on the cask in these off-normal conditions, there is no impact to PBAPS 2 and 3 operations.
Cask Unloading Operations If the cask is required to be unloaded or a seal repair is required, the cask is returned to the Reactor Building.
The cask transport route follows the same load path as for transport to the ISFSI. A cavity gas sample shall be obtained and analyzes and the cask depressurized to a nominal atmospheric pressure. The cask is refilled with water and the outlet line from the cask is piped below the surface of the pool with a sparger attached at the discharge end. Steam is quenched by the relatively cool fuel pool water. Helium bubbles released from the cask would rise to the surface to mix with the refueling floor atmosphere and be dissipated by the HVAC system.
Particulates released from the cask would be scrubbed out by the fuel pool water and filtered by the Spent Fuel Pool Cooling and Cleanup System (SFPCCS). Except for Kr-85 and CHAPTER 10                  10.3-16            REV. 26, APRIL 2017


Hydrodynamic effects of water were also included in the  
PBAPS UFSAR I-129, the constituents of the gas gap from leaking rods is scrubbed out by the fuel pool water and handled by the SFPCCS. The dose due to noble gases from the unloading operation, assuming 100% failed fuel in the cask, results in a lower offsite dose than that from the refueling accident analyzed in Section 14.6.4 of the PBAPS SAR.
The heat added to the pool water is well within the cooling capacity of the SFPCCS. It is capable of receiving a full core offload directly from the reactor and still keep the pool temperature at an acceptable value. The heat from only 68 assemblies plus the latent heat stored in the cask materials is insignificant compared to that from a full core offload.
10.3.4.4.6  Dry Cask Storage Programs As required by 10 CFR 72.212, the PBAPS radiation protection, emergency preparedness, security and training programs were updated to incorporate dry cask storage.
10.3.4.4.7  Dry Cask Operations Helium is used during dry cask operations. The exhaust of helium into the reactor building atmosphere is not a concern to the plant since the helium is an inert gas and readily dissipates. The exhaust will be vented to the Fuel Floor area for further processing in the ventilation system.
The cask is drained of water when it is raised to the fuel pool surface water level. Evaluations and procedural controls have been developed to ensure that the cask is not raised out of the pool such that the reactor building crane or lift beam would exceed its single failure proof rating.
The casks are dried to ensure that long term corrosion of the cask is minimized. The vacuum pumps exhaust will be appropriately monitored by radiation protection personnel and filtered as necessary. The vacuum pump discharge is directed to the fuel floor area for further processing by the refuel floor ventilation system. Cask over-pressurization with helium is not a concern when using procedurally controlled standard bottles and pressures.
This is due to the large volume of the cask compared to the small volume of the helium bottle.
Leak testing is performed using calibrated leak testing equipment. This equipment is appropriately controlled and CHAPTER 10                  10.3-17            REV. 26, APRIL 2017


analysis.  
PBAPS UFSAR poses no significant risk to the plant. Leak testing ensures that the cask is properly sealed for transport and storage outside of the reactor building.
The operations skid is designed to facilitate the evaluations required to drain, dry, inert, and test a spent fuel cask. This equipment is not safety related.
Appropriate I&C measuring and test equipment will be controlled in accordance with procedures and will be within calibration frequency.
10.3.5  Safety Evaluation The design of the spent fuel storage racks and dry storage casks provides for a subcritical effective multiplication factor (keff) for both normal and abnormal storage conditions. Under any condition the keff is equal to or less than 0.95. The spent fuel pool concrete structure, as well as each spent fuel storage rack and fixture loaded with fuel, are designed to seismic Class I criteria to withstand the maximum credible earthquake.
The spent fuel pool is adequately protected from the effects of a turbine generated missile. The probability of a turbine generated missile is small and is detailed in Section 11.2. The fuel pool is protected against low trajectory missiles by thick concrete walls between the turbine and the pool as well as the thick concrete pool walls. Once a high trajectory missile is generated, the possibility of it landing in the pool is in the range of 10-4. Therefore, the combined risk to the fuel pool from a high trajectory turbine missile is insignificant.
The spent fuel pools are designed with substantial capability to withstand the effects of a tornado, including tornado-generated missiles. Discussion of this capability is provided in Paragraph J.5.2.
Additional information is provided  in Topical Reports APED-5696, "Tornado Protection for  the Spent Fuel Storage Pool" (General Electric, November,  1969) and "Tornado Criteria for Nuclear Power Plants"  (Bechtel Corporation, July, 1969).
The spent fuel storage pools are located in the reactor buildings which serve as secondary containment for the reactors (subsection 5.3). Each reactor building is designed to control leakage from the building and provides filtration, through the standby gas treatment system, to limit radioactive discharges in the event of an accident.
CHAPTER 10                  10.3-18            REV. 26, APRIL 2017


Once the integrity of the system was ascertained, local stresses, embedments, connections, girder deflection, and  
PBAPS UFSAR Ventilation air from the spent fuel pool area is not normally filtered prior to exhaust to the atmosphere. The standby gas treatment system is described in paragraph 5.3.3.
The consequences and assumptions used in evaluating a refueling accident are presented in paragraph 14.6.4. The analysis provided in subsection 14.6.4 uses conservative assumptions, similar to those provided in Regulatory Guide 1.25, to demonstrate that releases from a postulated refueling accident result in doses which are well within 10CFR100 limits.
Provisions are made for level detection to ensure the fuel in the spent fuel storage is covered with sufficient water for radiation shielding. Leakage detection instrumentation is also provided to ensure an adequate fuel pool water level is maintained. The design of the spent fuel pool structure is such as to prevent inadvertent draining of the pool.
The radiation levels are monitored in the refueling floor exhaust duct. Both low and high radiation signals are alarmed in the control room and a high-high radiation signal isolates the duct and initiates the standby gas treatment system.
The high-density SFP storage racks utilize Boraflex as a neutron absorber material for reactivity control. Due to Boraflex degradation, PBAPS implemented an ongoing Boraflex monitoring program, to include RACKLIFE simulation of the rack degradation and blackness testing using the BADGER B-10 areal density measurement system.
A SFP rack insert program has also been implemented that will replace Boraflex. The effect of plant operation at 100% rated thermal power on Boraflex degradation is accounted for by the Boraflex monitoring program until installation of the SFP rack inserts is completed. A reduction in the amount of Boraflex in the SFP racks will reduce the criticality margin such that actions are required to ensure that the Licensing Basis requirements continue to be met. To ensure the SFP storage racks can maintain criticality margin in accordance with the PBAPS Technical Specification 4.3.1.1.b requirement of 5 percent (Keff  0.95), the peak in-core fuel bundle Kinf is limited as follows:
: 1. A peak in-core fuel bundle Kinf limit of 1.235 has been established and applies until all of the SFP rack inserts are installed.
CHAPTER 10                  10.3-19            REV. 26, APRIL 2017


discontinuities were investigated.  
PBAPS UFSAR
: 2. A peak in-core fuel bundle Kinf limit of 1.270 has been established and applies after all of the SFP rack inserts are installed.
The peak in-core Kinf limit for the fuel bundles used in the representative equilibrium cycle core design is 1.2095, which is bounded by the Kinf limits of 1.235 and 1.270. Therefore, these bundle Kinf limits ensure the SFP criticality margin is maintained before and after all of the SFP rack inserts are installed.
Dry cask storage casks were evaluated for various design basis events and normal conditions and found acceptable in accordance with the IFSSAR and 10CFR 72.212 Report.
10.3.6  Inspection and Testing Dry storage casks are appropriately inspected and tested to ensure design basis assumptions are met.
The in-service inspection program for the spent fuel storage racks involves periodic assessment of neutron poison material performance.
10.3.6.1    Boraflex Inspection and Testing This assessment may utilize jacketed Boraflex specimens contained in surveillance coupon assemblies hung on the periphery of a rack module.
A computer based Boraflex performance model and direct measurement of the B-10 areal density of representative in-service spent fuel storage rack panels may be used in conjunction with or in replacement of coupon inspection.
10.3.6.2    Neutron Absorbing Inserts Surveillance Program The rack insert surveillance program is designed to monitor the physical properties of the insert material by performing periodic physical inspection and neutron attenuation testing to confirm the ability of the material to perform its intended function.
10.3.6.2.1 Fast Start Coupon Surveillance Program Exelon initiated a "Fast Start" coupon surveillance program at LaSalle County Generating Station to provide early performance data on the coupon exposure to maximum temperature and gamma irradiation. The program consists of CHAPTER 10                  10.3-20            REV. 26, APRIL 2017


The pool is lined with stainless steel and is designed to preclude inadvertent loss of water from the pool.  
PBAPS UFSAR 24 coupons suspended inside of a spent fuel storage rack cell and surrounded in all adjacent cells with freshly discharged fuel. Two of the coupons will be removed approximately every six months for testing, inspection and comparison to their pre-installed condition. Initial results showed essentially no change in the coupon characteristics. Because the spent fuel pool chemistries at PBAPS are similar to LaSalle, this program provides information on initial material performance and is a basis for confidence that early insert response to the SFP environment is acceptable.
PBAPS will monitor LaSalle's program to identify any unanticipated insert material performance issues including review of their coupon test reports. Information obtained will be used to evaluate the long-term and the full rack insert surveillance programs at PBAPS and make any necessary modifications.
10.3.6.2.2  Long-Term Coupon Surveillance Program The long-term coupon surveillance program consists of a specially designed monitoring tree to which a series of surveillance coupons are attached. The monitoring tree, placed within the PBAPS spent fuel pools, will reside there as long as the spent fuel storage racks with NETCO-SNAP-IN rack inserts continue to be used. Periodically, as described below, coupons will be removed and sent to a qualified laboratory for testing.
CHAPTER 10                  10.3-21            REV. 26, APRIL 2017


There are no connections to the fuel storage pool which could allow the fuel pool to be drained below the pool
PBAPS UFSAR Table 10.3.6.1 Long-Term Surveillance Coupons Coupon Type       Number          Objective General                   48     (See next Table)
 
Bend                     24     Track effects along bend radii Galvanic (bi-metallic)   24     Trend galvanic corrosion with 304SS, Inconel 718 and Zircaloy coupons Specific coupons will be removed from the tree on a frequency schedule in the following tables. The general coupons will be subject to pre- and post-examination according to the following:
gate between the reactor well and the fuel pool when the
CHAPTER 10                   10.3-22            REV. 26, APRIL 2017
 
pool gate is in place or below 10 feet above the top of
 
active fuel. Lines extending below this level are
 
equipped with syphon breaker holes to prevent inadvertent
 
pool drainage. Systems for maintaining water quality and
 
quantity are designed so that any maloperation or failure
 
of such systems will not cause fuel to be uncovered.
 
The fuel storage pool is designed to seismic Class I criteria and so that no single failure of structures or
 
equipment will cause the inability (1) to maintain
 
irradiated fuel submerged in water, (2) to reestablish
 
normal fuel pool water level, or (3) to safely remove
 
fuel. To prevent leakage, the pool is lined with
 
stainless steel. In addition to providing a high degree
 
of integrity, the lining is reinforced to withstand forces
 
that might occur when the transfer cask is moved in the
 
cask storage area.
 
Interconnected drainage paths are provided behind the liner. These paths are designed (1) to prevent pressure
 
buildup behind the liner plate, (2) to prevent the
 
uncontrolled loss of contaminated pool water to the
 
secondary containment, and (3) to provide expedient liner
 
leak detection and measurement.
 
Protection of the pool liner in the cask storage area for the normal cask lowering operation is provided by a 1-inch
 
thick steel wearing plate. This will prevent any damage
 
to the liner over plant life occasioned by normal fuel
 
cask handling. Additionally, interlocks are provided to
 
prevent the crane trolley, with a predetermined load on 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.3-12 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 its main hook, from passing over the fuel pool. Strict administrative control is used for bypassing the
 
interlocks during cask handling operations.
 
The reactor building crane main hook and the lifting device associated with the cask are of a single failure
 
proof design such that a single failure will not result in
 
dropping the load. The available makeup water sources to
 
the spent fuel pool and associated flow rates are
 
presented in Table 10.3.1.
 
The spent fuel pool cask pit area restraining structure has been analyzed to withstand cask impacts due to
 
postulated design events. Cask placement in the center of
 
the cask pit area is controlled in accordance with station
 
procedures. This includes maintaining the appropriate
 
centering tolerance as well the angular placement of the
 
cask with respect to the trunnions and the restraining
 
structure.
 
10.3.4.3  Fuel Pool Level Alarms
 
Low water level alarms are provided locally and in the main control room in the event of water loss. The low
 
water level alarms are part of the fuel pool cooling
 
system. As a backup, flow alarms are provided in the
 
drain lines of the reactor vessel to drywell seal, drywell
 
to concrete seal, and fuel pool gate to detect leakage.
 
10.3.4.4  Dry Cask Storage
 
Dry Cask Storage of spent nuclear fuel has been evaluated for PBAPS. This program meets the requirements of 10CFR
 
72 and utilizes the General License issued under 10CFR 72.
 
10.3.4.4.1  Dry Cask Storage Rigging and Handling
 
The storage cask is handled by the Reactor Building Crane in a single failure proof configuration. Other cask
 
components such as the lid and basket hold down ring are
 
also handled in a single failure proof configuration
 
unless specifically evaluated otherwise in accordance with
 
UFSAR Section 10.A.11. All cask movement in the Reactor
 
Building will be consistent with NUREG-0612, over
 
designated safe load paths and either with the single
 
failure proof Reactor Building Crane or with the cask
 
transporter with the cask at the appropriate analyzed
 
heights. All cask movement in the Reactor Building will
 
be on designated safe load paths to ensure that cask drop
 
loads where applicable will not affect the safety of the 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.3-13 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 PBAPS plant. The cask transporter is not single failure proof but has been evaluated for cask drops and found to
 
be acceptable. The cask is rigged in a single-failure-
 
proof configuration while in the spent fuel pool by
 
ensuring a procedurally controlled amount of water is
 
removed from the loaded cask.
 
10.3.4.4.2  Dry Cask Structural Considerations
 
A calculation was performed to consider the acceptability of a drop of a loaded cask from a cask transporter in the
 
Reactor Building onto the Elevation 135' floor. The
 
calculation demonstrates the structural adequacy of the
 
impact floor and the absence of effects on safety related
 
equipment beneath it at a lift height less than 2.5". 
 
Superficial damage to the floor at el. 135' would be
 
repaired as appropriate. The lift height is procedurally
 
controlled.
 
The cask will be rigged in a single failure proof configuration while rigged from the reactor building crane
 
in the Reactor Building hatchway. The placement of the
 
cask in the hatchway will be such that credible cask
 
swinging in the hatchway during a seismic event will not
 
result in cask / plant impacts. Therefore, damage to the
 
plant is precluded.
 
The structural capacity of the Reactor Building floor at el. 234' has been evaluated for cask operations. These
 
analyses assumed a coincident maximum credible earthquake.
 
The designated cask laydown area is controlled by spent
 
fuel procedures. 
 
The restraint structure (without the vertical guides) in the spent fuel cask pit area of the fuel pool was modeled
 
using finite element analysis techniques and evaluated for
 
structural adequacy under the effects of combined loadings
 
postulated for the structure consistent with the PBAPS  
 
UFSAR Appendix C.
 
Cask impacts on the restraint structure due to postulated seismic (MCE) event were evaluated for the suspended cask (pendulum effect during hoisting) and for the free-
 
standing cask located on the wear plate (sliding and
 
tipping) and found acceptable.
 
Administrative controls and procedural requirements assure that the cask is appropriately centered within the
 
specified tolerance during the move-in/move-out and cask
 
placement operations. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.3-14 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 Passage of the cask transporter over the access road and haul path, with or without a cask, does not physically
 
affect systems, structures and components (SSCs) of the
 
PBAPS plants. The haul path and access road are well
 
defined by roadway markings to guide the cask transporter
 
driver. In the event the transporter fails or is
 
inadvertently driven off the designated haul path, off-
 
normal procedures exist to ensure that operations are
 
halted. Cask drops along the transport route were
 
evaluated and found acceptable.
 
10.3.4.4.3  Dry Cask Fuel Pool Operations
 
Cask insertion into the fuel pool will be controlled by procedures to ensure that the fuel pool level is
 
maintained. Fuel pool level will be procedurally
 
controlled by a combination of activities, including as
 
necessary, turning off the fuel pool cooling system, lowering and raising the fuel pool level control weir
 
gate, draining/filling the skimmer surge tanks, and
 
controlling the filling and draining of the casks as
 
appropriate. None of the involved activities can result
 
in inadvertent draining of the fuel pool.
 
Before each cask loading campaign a plan will be prepared that specifies the fuel assemblies to be moved from the
 
pool into the cask, and their specified assigned location
 
in the cask fuel basket. Selection of the correct fuel
 
assemblies from the fuel pool racks and correct placement
 
in the cask basket will be controlled by procedural
 
methods. Any mispositioning that could occur would be
 
detected by confirmatory monitoring. Normal site fuel
 
movement procedures will be used by appropriately
 
qualified personnel.
 
The elevation of the fuel bundles must be increased in order to provide clearance over the lip of the open dry
 
storage casks, which are taller than the cask for which
 
the spent fuel pool was originally designed.
 
The new normal-up setpoint needed to load an ISFSI cask will be used only for fuel cask loading and unloading
 
operations.
 
10.3.4.4.5  Dry Cask Storage Design Basis Events
 
The postulated events that could occur during cask operations are discussed in the IFSSAR and 10CFR 72.212
 
Report. The following is a summary of those events that 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.3-15 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 could have potential impacts or interaction with PBAPS 2 and 3.
Fuel Bundle Drop
 
A design basis fuel bundle drop was evaluated and found to be bounded by existing accident analysis. Criticality, radiological releases and effects on the ISFSI cask and
 
fuel pool liner were evaluated and found acceptable.
 
Wrong Fuel Insertion
 
The TN-68 IFSSAR evaluates the impact on the cask if an incorrect fuel assembly is loaded. These events are
 
precluded due to administrative control and training of
 
personnel involved with loading the cask. Procedural
 
controls will ensure that only allowed fuel is selected
 
for loading into a cask. Additionally, verifications of
 
fuel being loaded will ensure that incorrectly loaded fuel
 
does not go undetected. The TN-68 IFSSAR concludes that
 
fuel with heat generation greater than allowed is not a
 
concern to the cask as long as the cask is submerged in
 
the fuel pool. Because there are multiple layers of fuel
 
verification prior to placing the lid on the cask, there
 
is no concern for incorrectly loaded fuel with a higher
 
than allowed heat generation rate. The TN-68 IFSSAR
 
evaluates the loading of a fuel assembly with higher than
 
allowed enrichment and determines the impact on the
 
criticality margin in the cask. For worst case conditions
 
and placement into the cask, a fuel assembly with an
 
initial enrichment of 5.0% was evaluated and determined to
 
not cause any criticality concerns. Loading verifications
 
prior to placing the lid on the cask would detect the
 
incorrectly loaded assembly and remove it prior to
 
continuing loading operations.
 
Cask Drop / Tip
 
Various scenarios involving the potential for cask drop/tip were evaluated. In no case, does the cask tip
 
over. For the drop scenarios, the cask remains within its
 
licensed design basis.
 
Natural Events
 
The cask and associated support equipment has been evaluated for various natural events. In all cases, the
 
cask was shown to not tip over. Cask drops are possible
 
when suspended on the transporter, however, these drops
 
have been evaluated as discussed earlier. Impacts of 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.3-16 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 natural events have been considered in the analysis of the cask while in the Reactor Building and have been found to
 
not result in an uncontrolled lowering of the cask or
 
other damage to plant equipment due to cask impacts.
 
Fires and Explosions 
 
The TN-68 cask is designed to withstand various fires and explosions. The cask is not combustible and therefore
 
poses no new significant fire or explosion threat to the
 
plant. The transporter has been evaluated and found
 
acceptable.
 
Cask Seal Leak
 
The worst case seal leakage has been demonstrated in the TN-68 SAR to be well below regulatory limits.
 
Cask Loading Operations Issues
 
During cask loading, various contingency actions may be required to perform in the event (for example) of the
 
inability to get the cask adequately drained and filled
 
with helium or the inability to meet the leak tightness
 
requirements. Procedures exist to direct actions in these
 
off-normal conditions. These conditions are governed by
 
TN-68 Tech Specs to ensure that cask parameters are not
 
exceeded. These actions may include returning the cask to
 
the spent fuel pool for unloading. Because there are
 
adequate controls on the cask in these off-normal
 
conditions, there is no impact to PBAPS 2 and 3
 
operations.
 
Cask Unloading Operations
 
If the cask is required to be unloaded or a seal repair is required, the cask is returned to the Reactor Building. 
 
The cask transport route follows the same load path as for
 
transport to the ISFSI. A cavity gas sample shall be
 
obtained and analyzes and the cask depressurized to a
 
nominal atmospheric pressure. The cask is refilled with
 
water and the outlet line from the cask is piped below the
 
surface of the pool with a sparger attached at the
 
discharge end. Steam is quenched by the relatively cool
 
fuel pool water. Helium bubbles released from the cask
 
would rise to the surface to mix with the refueling floor
 
atmosphere and be dissipated by the HVAC system. 
 
Particulates released from the cask would be scrubbed out
 
by the fuel pool water and filtered by the Spent Fuel Pool
 
Cooling and Cleanup System (SFPCCS). Except for Kr-85 and 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.3-17 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 I-129, the constituents of the gas gap from leaking rods is scrubbed out by the fuel pool water and handled by the
 
SFPCCS. The dose due to noble gases from the unloading
 
operation, assuming 100% failed fuel in the cask, results
 
in a lower offsite dose than that from the refueling
 
accident analyzed in Section 14.6.4 of the PBAPS SAR.
 
The heat added to the pool water is well within the cooling capacity of the SFPCCS. It is capable of
 
receiving a full core offload directly from the reactor
 
and still keep the pool temperature at an acceptable
 
value. The heat from only 68 assemblies plus the latent
 
heat stored in the cask materials is insignificant
 
compared to that from a full core offload.
 
10.3.4.4.6  Dry Cask Storage Programs
 
As required by 10 CFR 72.212, the PBAPS radiation protection, emergency preparedness, security and training
 
programs were updated to incorporate dry cask storage.
 
10.3.4.4.7  Dry Cask Operations
 
Helium is used during dry cask operations. The exhaust of helium into the reactor building atmosphere is not a
 
concern to the plant since the helium is an inert gas and
 
readily dissipates. The exhaust will be vented to the Fuel
 
Floor area for further processing in the ventilation
 
system.
The cask is drained of water when it is raised to the fuel pool surface water level. Evaluations and procedural
 
controls have been developed to ensure that the cask is
 
not raised out of the pool such that the reactor building
 
crane or lift beam would exceed its single failure proof
 
rating.
The casks are dried to ensure that long term corrosion of the cask is minimized. The vacuum pumps exhaust will be
 
appropriately monitored by radiation protection personnel
 
and filtered as necessary. The vacuum pump discharge is
 
directed to the fuel floor area for further processing by
 
the refuel floor ventilation system. Cask over-
 
pressurization with helium is not a concern when using
 
procedurally controlled standard bottles and pressures. 
 
This is due to the large volume of the cask compared to
 
the small volume of the helium bottle.
 
Leak testing is performed using calibrated leak testing equipment. This equipment is appropriately controlled and 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.3-18 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 poses no significant risk to the plant. Leak testing ensures that the cask is properly sealed for transport and
 
storage outside of the reactor building. 
 
The operations skid is designed to facilitate the evaluations required to drain, dry, inert, and test a
 
spent fuel cask. This equipment is not safety related. 
 
Appropriate I&C measuring and test equipment will be
 
controlled in accordance with procedures and will be
 
within calibration frequency. 
 
10.3.5  Safety Evaluation
 
The design of the spent fuel storage racks and dry storage casks provides for a subcritical effective multiplication
 
factor (k eff) for both normal and abnormal storage conditions. Under any condition the k eff is equal to or less than 0.95. The spent fuel pool concrete structure, as well as each spent fuel storage rack and fixture loaded
 
with fuel, are designed to seismic Class I criteria to
 
withstand the maximum credible earthquake.
 
The spent fuel pool is adequately protected from the effects of a turbine generated missile. The probability
 
of a turbine generated missile is small and is detailed in
 
Section 11.2. The fuel pool is protected against low
 
trajectory missiles by thick concrete walls between the
 
turbine and the pool as well as the thick concrete pool
 
walls. Once a high trajectory missile is generated, the
 
possibility of it landing in the pool is in the range of
 
10-4. Therefore, the combined risk to the fuel pool from a high trajectory turbine missile is insignificant.
 
The spent fuel pools are designed with substantial capability to withstand the effects of a tornado, including tornado-generated missiles. Discussion of this
 
capability is provided in Paragraph J.5.2.
 
Additional information is provided in Topical Reports APED-5696, "Tornado Protection for the Spent Fuel Storage
 
Pool" (General Electric, November, 1969) and "Tornado
 
Criteria for Nuclear Power Plants" (Bechtel Corporation, July, 1969).
 
The spent fuel storage pools are located in the reactor buildings which serve as secondary containment for the
 
reactors (subsection 5.3). Each reactor building is
 
designed to control leakage from the building and provides
 
filtration, through the standby gas treatment system, to
 
limit radioactive discharges in the event of an accident. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.3-19 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 Ventilation air from the spent fuel pool area is not normally filtered prior to exhaust to the atmosphere. The
 
standby gas treatment system is described in paragraph
 
5.3.3.
The consequences and assumptions used in evaluating a refueling accident are presented in paragraph 14.6.4. The
 
analysis provided in subsection 14.6.4 uses conservative
 
assumptions, similar to those provided in Regulatory Guide
 
1.25, to demonstrate that releases from a postulated
 
refueling accident result in doses which are well within
 
10CFR100 limits.
 
Provisions are made for level detection to ensure the fuel in the spent fuel storage is covered with sufficient water
 
for radiation shielding. Leakage detection
 
instrumentation is also provided to ensure an adequate
 
fuel pool water level is maintained. The design of the
 
spent fuel pool structure is such as to prevent
 
inadvertent draining of the pool.
 
The radiation levels are monitored in the refueling floor exhaust duct. Both low and high radiation signals are
 
alarmed in the control room and a high-high radiation
 
signal isolates the duct and initiates the standby gas
 
treatment system.
The high-density SFP storage racks utilize Boraflex as a
 
neutron absorber material for reactivity control. Due to
 
Boraflex degradation, PBAPS implemented an ongoing
 
Boraflex monitoring program, to include RACKLIFE
 
simulation of the rack degradation and blackness testing
 
using the BADGER B-10 areal density measurement system.
 
A SFP rack insert program has also been implemented that
 
will replace Boraflex. The effect of plant operation at
 
100% rated thermal power on Boraflex degradation is
 
accounted for by the Boraflex monitoring program until
 
installation of the SFP rack inserts is completed. A
 
reduction in the amount of Boraflex in the SFP racks
 
will reduce the criticality margin such that actions are
 
required to ensure that the Licensing Basis requirements
 
continue to be met. To ensure the SFP storage racks can
 
maintain criticality margin in accordance with the PBAPS
 
Technical Specification 4.3.1.1.b requirement of 5
 
percent (K eff  0.95), the peak in-core fuel bundle K inf is limited as follows: 
 
1.A peak in-core fuel bundle K inf limit of 1.235 has been established and applies until all of the SFP
 
rack inserts are installed. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.3-20 REV. 26, APRIL 2017
: 2. A peak in-core fuel bundle K inf limit of 1.270 has been established and applies after all of the SFP rack inserts are installed. 
 
The peak in-core K inf limit for the fuel bundles used in the representative equilibrium cycle core design is
 
1.2095, which is bounded by the K inf limits of 1.235 and 1.270. Therefore, these bundle K inf limits ensure the SFP criticality margin is maintained before and after
 
all of the SFP rack inserts are installed. 
 
Dry cask storage casks were evaluated for various design basis events and normal conditions and found acceptable in
 
accordance with the IFSSAR and 10CFR 72.212 Report.
 
10.3.6  Inspection and Testing
 
Dry storage casks are appropriately inspected and tested to ensure design basis assumptions are met.
 
The in-service inspection program for the spent fuel storage racks involves periodic assessment of neutron
 
poison material performance. 
 
10.3.6.1  Boraflex Inspection and Testing
 
This assessment may utilize jacketed Boraflex specimens contained in surveillance coupon assemblies hung on the
 
periphery of a rack module.
 
A computer based Boraflex performance model and direct measurement of the B-10 areal density of representative
 
in-service spent fuel storage rack panels may be used in
 
conjunction with or in replacement of coupon inspection.
 
10.3.6.2  Neutron Absorbing Inserts Surveillance Program The rack insert surveillance program is designed to
 
monitor the physical properties of the insert material by
 
performing periodic physical inspection and neutron
 
attenuation testing to confirm the ability of the material
 
to perform its intended function. 10.3.6.2.1 Fast Start Coupon Surveillance Program Exelon initiated a "Fast Start" coupon surveillance
 
program at LaSalle County Generating Station to provide
 
early performance data on the coupon exposure to maximum
 
temperature and gamma irradiation. The program consists of 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.3-21 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 24 coupons suspended inside of a spent fuel storage rack cell and surrounded in all adjacent cells with freshly
 
discharged fuel. Two of the coupons will be removed
 
approximately every six months for testing, inspection and
 
comparison to their pre-installed condition. Initial
 
results showed essentially no change in the coupon
 
characteristics. Because the spent fuel pool chemistries
 
at PBAPS are similar to LaSalle, this program provides
 
information on initial material performance and is a basis
 
for confidence that early insert response to the SFP
 
environment is acceptable.
PBAPS will monitor LaSalle's program to identify any
 
unanticipated insert material performance issues including
 
review of their coupon test reports. Information obtained
 
will be used to evaluate the long-term and the full rack
 
insert surveillance programs at PBAPS and make any
 
necessary modifications.
 
10.3.6.2.2 Long-Term Coupon Surveillance Program
 
The long-term coupon surveillance program consists of a
 
specially designed monitoring tree to which a series of
 
surveillance coupons are attached. The monitoring tree, placed within the PBAPS spent fuel pools, will reside
 
there as long as the spent fuel storage racks with NETCO-SNAP-IN rack inserts continue to be used. Periodically, as described below, coupons will be removed and sent to a qualified laboratory for testing.
 
CHAPTER 10 10.3-22 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 Table 10.3.6.1 Long-Term Surveillance Coupons Coupon Type NumberObjective General 48 (See next Table)
Bend 24 Track effects along bend radii Galvanic (bi-metallic) 24 Trend galvanic corrosion with 304SS, Inconel 718 and Zircaloy coupons Specific coupons will be removed from the tree on a frequency  
 
schedule in the following tables. The general coupons will be  
 
subject to pre- and post-examination according to the following:
 
CHAPTER 10 10.3-23 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 Table 10.3.6.2 Long-Term Surveillance General Coupon Characterization
 
Pre-Characterization Post-Characterization Acceptance Criteria Visual (high
 
resolution
 
digital photo) X X Evidence of Visual
 
indications Dimension X X Min.
thickness:
0.005 inch less than
 
nominal thickness
 
Length Change: Any
 
change of +/-0.02
 
inch Width Change:


PBAPS UFSAR Table 10.3.6.2 Long-Term Surveillance General Coupon Characterization Pre-              Post-Test      Characterization  Characterization  Acceptance Criteria Visual (high          X                  X        Evidence of Visual resolution                                        indications digital photo)
Dimension              X                  X        Min. thickness:
0.005 inch less than nominal thickness Length Change: Any change of +/-0.02 inch Width Change:
Any change of +/-
Any change of +/-
0.02 inch Thickness Change: Any change of +0.010 inch/-
0.004 inch Dry Weight            X                  X        Any change of +/- 5%
Density                X                  X        Any change of +/- 5%
Areal Density    X on select            X        0.0102 Boron-10 g/cm2 coupons                        minimum loading Weight Loss                              X        Any change of +/- 5%
Corrosion Rate                            X        < 0.05 mil/yr Microscopy                          X as required  At the discretion of the test engineer Bend Coupon                              X        50% stress reduction Stress Relaxation                                  (to maintain 100 lbf retention force)
The frequency for coupon inspection is shown in the following table.
CHAPTER 10                    10.3-23            REV. 26, APRIL 2017


0.02 inch Thickness
PBAPS UFSAR Table 10.3.6.3 Frequency for Coupon Inspection Coupon Type        First Ten Years          After 10 Years with Acceptable Performance General        2 coupons every 2 years    2 coupons every 4 years Bend            1 coupon every 2 years    1 coupon every 4 years Galvanic Couples 304                    1 couple every 6 years Stainless                      1 couple every 6 years Zircaloy                      1 couple every 6 years Inconel 718 10.3.6.2.3 Full Rack Insert Surveillance Inspections Two rack inserts will be visually inspected by camera at the frequency of the general coupon removal schedule described above to visually monitor for physical deformities such as bubbling, blistering, corrosion pitting, cracking, or flaking. Special attention will be paid to development of any edge or corner defects.
A region of high duty spent fuel storage rack cell locations will be identified and will be monitored for fuel insertion and removal events to ensure that their service bounds that of the general population of storage locations. Once every 10 years, an insert will be removed from this region and will be inspected for thickness along its length at several locations and be compared with the as-built thickness measurements of the removed insert to verify it has sustained uniform wear over its service life. After the inspection, the insert will not be reinstalled.
CHAPTER 10                    10.3-24              REV. 26, APRIL 2017


Change: Any change
PBAPS UFSAR TABLE 10.3.1 AVAILABLE MAKEUP WATER SOURCES Rate Source                                    Route                      (gpm)
Torus                        One RHR pump to fuel                  10,000 pool(1)
Refueling water              One refueling water pump                1,650 storage tank and/            to reactor well header, to or condensate                fuel pool cooling pumps, to storage tank                  bypass filter, to fuel pool Condensate storage            High-pressure decontami-                  25 tank                          nation pump to fuel pool Condensate storage            Fuel pool makeup from con-                60 tank                          densate transfer pump Demineralized                To demin. water supplies                  150 water storage                in service boxes Total demineralized                                                  1,885 water available immediately Total demineralized                                                  11,885 water available after 1 hr(2)
River water                  High-pressure service water            18,000 pumps via RHR cross-tie(2,3)
River water                  Fire waterhose stations                    70 (2-3 in)
Total river water                                                        70 available immediately Total river water                                                    18,070 available after 1 hr(3)
(1)
Approximately 1 hr is required to install the removable spool before supply can be used.
(2)
Can only be used if plant is shut down and RHR cooling is with RHR pumps A and/or C.
(3)
Alternate to torus water using RHR pumps.
CHAPTER 10                      10.3-25              REV. 21, APRIL 2007


of +0.010 inch/-
PBAPS UFSAR TABLE 10.3.2 RACK MODULE DATA (PER UNIT)
DRY WEIGHT STORAGE          RACK ASSY        (LBS)
QTY      ARRAY      LOCATIONS    DIMENSIONS (INCHES)    PER RACK ASSY 1    9 x 14          126          54 x 89 x 180          10,000 2    10 x 14          280          64 x 89 x 180          11,200 1    11 x 14 Mod. 119          70 x 89 x 180            9,500 1    12 x 15          180          76 x 95 x 180          14,400 1    12 x 17          204          76 x 107 x 180          16,300 2    12 x 20          480          76 x 126 x 180          19,200 2    15 x 19          570          95 x 120 x 180          22,800 1    17 x 20          340        107 x 126 x 180          27,200 4    19 x 20        1,520        120 x 126 x 180          30,400 15 racks            3,819 Storage locations center-to-center spacing (inches)      6.28 Storage cell liner dimension (inches)                          6.07 Intermediate storage location inner dimension (inches)          6.12 CHAPTER 10                  10.3-26              REV. 21, APRIL 2007


0.004 inch Dry Weight X X Any change of +/- 5%
PBAPS UFSAR 10.4  TOOLS AND SERVICING EQUIPMENT 10.4.1  Introduction All tools and servicing equipment necessary to meet the reactor general servicing requirements are supplied for efficiency and safe serviceability. The flow chart in Figure 10.4.1 defines in a general way the steps that make up a routine refueling outage. The heavy lines on the chart define the critical path in a normal outage. Deviations to this path may be encountered under abnormal circumstances. The following paragraphs describe the use of some of the major tools and servicing equipment.
Density X X Any change of +/- 5% Areal Density X on select coupons X 0.0102 Boron-10 g/cm 2 minimum loading Weight Loss X Any change of +/- 5%
10.4.2   Fuel Servicing Equipment Two fuel preparation machines located in each fuel storage pool are used to remove and install channels to support inspection or servicing of fuel assemblies. The fuel preparation machines are also used for the placement of new fuel assemblies into the spent fuel pool. These machines are designed to be removed from the pool for servicing.
Corrosion Rate X < 0.05 mil/yr Microscopy X as required At the discretion of the test engineer Bend Coupon 
An equipment support railing is provided around the pool periphery in order to tie off miscellaneous service equipment and for personnel safety. Equipment lugs fabricated as part of the pool liner are required for fixtures that might later be desired by plant operating personnel. In addition, a curb with a plate of thick stainless steel on top is provided around the entire periphery of the refueling volume. Additional equipment may be mounted by welding to, or drilling into, the plate. The curb may be used as an additional support or tie-off area. Cable ways are recessed into the floor around the pool periphery with openings to pass cables into the pool from underneath this curbing.
The new fuel inspection stand is provided to restrain the fuel assembly in a vertical position for inspection. The inspection stand can hold two assemblies. The general purpose grapple is a small, hand actuated tool used generally with fuel. The grapple can be attached to the reactor building auxiliary hoist, the jib crane, and the auxiliary hoists on the refueling platform. The general purpose grapple is used to place new fuel in the inspection stand and transfer it to the fuel pool.
A channel handling boom, with spring loaded takeup reel, is used to assist the operator in supporting the weight after the channel is removed from the fuel assembly. The boom is located between the two fuel preparation machines. With the channel handling tool attached to the reel, the channel may be conveniently moved between fuel preparation machines.
CHAPTER 10                  10.4-1            REV. 26, APRIL 2017


Stress Relaxation X 50% stress reduction (to maintain 100 lbf
PBAPS UFSAR The complete channeling procedure is as follows. Using the refuel platform and the mast grapple, a spent fuel assembly is lifted into the fuel preparation machine with the carriage lowered.
After raising the assembly to its high position, the channel is unbolted from the fuel assembly using the channel bolt wrench furnished for this purpose. This wrench is used to unscrew the bolt and capture it. The channel handling tool is attached to the channel handling boom and lowered to the channel. The tool is attached to the channel triangular corner tabs by expanding two fingers on the tool. The channel is then held, and the fuel preparation machine carriage is lowered, causing the fuel bundle to slide down out of the channel. The channel is then positioned over the other fuel preparation machine, containing a new fuel assembly, and the procedure is reversed. A channel storage rack for accumulating channels is located on the wall between the fuel preparation machines. A channel check gage may be mounted on the wall adjacent to the fuel machines so the operator can check channels. The channeled fuel is stored in the pool storage racks, ready for insertion in the reactor.
10.4.3  Servicing Aids General and local area underwater lights are provided to illuminate the internal region of the reactor vessel. Drop lights are used for intense radial illumination where needed. These lights are small enough in diameter to fit into fuel channels or control blade guide tubes. A portable underwater television camera and monitor are part of the plant optical aids. The transmitted image can be viewed on the refueling platform. This remote display assists in the inspection of the vessel internals, and general underwater surveillance in the reactor vessel and fuel storage pool. General purpose, clear plastic viewing aids that will float are used to break the water surface for better visibility.
A portable underwater vacuum cleaner is provided to assist in removing debris and miscellaneous objects from the pool floor or the reactor vessel. The pump and the filter unit are completely submersible for extended periods. Fuel pool tool accessories are also provided to meet servicing requirements.
10.4.4  Reactor Vessel Servicing Equipment Reactor vessel servicing equipment is supplied for safe handling of the vessel head and its components, including nuts, studs, bushings, and seals.
The drywell head strongback is used for lifting the drywell head and mirror insulation. Cruciform in shape, with four equally spaced lifting points, the strongback is designed to keep the CHAPTER 10                  10.4-2            REV. 26, APRIL 2017


retention force)
PBAPS UFSAR drywell head level during lifting and transport. Redundant rigging is used to connect the drywell head to the single-failure-proof strongback, resulting in a single-failure-proof lift. An exception to the single-failure-proof requirements in ANSI N14.6-1978 is that two structural features added during modifications to upgrade this device were not impact-tested. (Ref. ECR 13-00378)
The frequency for coupon inspection is shown in the following table.  
The Reactor Pressure Vessel (RPV) head strongback/carousel is used for lifting the vessel head. The strongback/carousel is an integrated piece of equipment consisting of a cruciform shaped strongback, a circular monorail, and a circular storage tray.
The strongback is a box beam structure which has a hook box with three pins in the center for engagement with the reactor building crane main hoist hook. Each arm has a liftrod for engagement to the four lift lugs on the RPV head. The monorail is mounted on extensions of the strongback arms and four additional arms equally spaced between the strongback arms. The monorail circle matches the stud circle of the reactor vessel and it serves to suspend stud tensioners and nut handling device.
The head strongback carousel service the following functions:
Lifting of Vessel Head - The strongback, when suspended from the reactor building crane main hook, transports the RPV head plus the carousel with all its attachments between the reactor vessel and storage on the pedestals. The strongback and its connections to the RPV head are single-failure-proof.
One exception to the single-failure-proof requirements in ANSI N14.6-1978 is that the hook and load pin material for this device was not impact-tested as specified in ANSI N14.6-1978. (Ref. ECR 13-00378)
Tensioning of Vessel Head Closure - The carousel, when supported on the RPV head on the vessel can carry up to eight tensioners, its own weight, the strongback, storage of nuts, washers, thread protectors, and associated tools and equipment. The stud tensioners are suspended equally spaced from a monorail above the vessel stud circle. Each tensioner has an air-operated hoist with individual controls.
The head holding pedestals are designed to support the vessel head to permit seal replacement and seal surface cleaning and inspection. The mating surface between vessel and pedestal is selected to minimize the possibility of damaging the vessel head.
A reactor servicing platform permits the operator to work at a level just above the reactor vessel flange, and permits servicing access for the full core diameter. A service platform support is provided, which rests on the vessel flange surface, and serves as CHAPTER 10                  10.4-3              REV. 26, APRIL 2017


CHAPTER 10 10.3-24 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 Table 10.3.6.3 Frequency for Coupon Inspection Coupon Type First Ten Years After 10 Years with Acceptable Performance General 2 coupons every 2 years 2 coupons every 4 years Bend 1 coupon every 2 years 1 coupon every 4 years Galvanic Couples 304
PBAPS UFSAR both a track for the servicing platform and as a seal surface protector.
A separate seal surface protector made of aluminum is provided to protect the sealing surface of the reactor pressure vessel flange when the service platform or its track is not used.
A stud tensioner assembly is provided, and consists of four tensioners transported by the reactor building crane main hoist or the head strongback/carousel. The tensioners are controlled by a hydraulic unit with pressure gages. Each tensioner contains:
: 1. An integral nut wrench for rotating the nut.
: 2. One stud elongation gage plus one elongation rod per stud to permit initial and periodic pressure/stretch indication.
10.4.5  In-Vessel Servicing Equipment The single or multiple instrument strongback is attached to the reactor building crane auxiliary hoist and is used to lift replacement in-core detectors from their shipping container. The instrument handling tool is attached to the in-core detector by the operators on the refueling platform. The single or multiple strongback initially supports the in-core detector(s) as they are lowered into the vessel, and the in-core detector is then decoupled from the strongback. Final in-core detector insertion is accomplished with the instrument handling tool. The instrument handling tool is used for removing and installing fixed in-core detectors, as well as for handling neutron sources and the WRNM dry tubes.
10.4.5.1  Reactor Cavity Work Platform The Reactor Cavity Work Platform (RCWP) is a tool used to allow in vessel inspection/activities concurrent with fuel movement thereby reducing refueling critical path time. The RCWP is a stainless steel structure which consists of four (4) quadrants connected using three sets of splice plates. The RCWP is stored in four (4) specially designed sea land containers, and is brought to the refueling floor and assembled prior to use.
The RCWP has an octagonal shaped structural framework with eight radial legs which support four (4) personnel work baskets. The eight support legs rest on the reactor building elevation 234-0 floor slab. The platform, when placed in the reactor cavity above the open reactor pressure vessel (RPV), is slightly submerged into the reactor cavity water. The bottom of the work baskets is approximate elevation 231-0 which provides approximately 7-0 CHAPTER 10                  10.4-4             REV. 26, APRIL 2017


Stainless
PBAPS UFSAR clearance to the underside of the refueling bridge. The RCWP legs have the capability to both extend/retract and rotate in order to avoid obstructions such as the electrical pits and refuel bridge gearbox, which are present on the operating deck. The RCWP has a 30-degree refueling opening in the direction of the fuel pool to allow for refuel bridge mast and fuel bundle movement while performing in vessel activities. Electrical power and station air outlets are also provided in the RCWP work baskets.
10.4.6  Refueling Equipment The refueling platform is used as the principal means of transporting fuel assemblies back and forth between the reactor well and the storage pool. The platform travels on rails extending along each side of the reactor well and fuel pool. The platform supports the fuel grapple and the frame-mounted and monorail auxiliary hoists. The grapple is suspended from a trolley system that can traverse the width of the platform.
Platform operations are controlled from either auxiliary hoist control pendant or the fuel grapple controller consoles. The platform contains a position-indicating system that indicates the position of the fuel grapple over the core. The platform is prevented from contacting the fuel pool and reactor walls by a boundary zone interlock system.
One-half ton auxiliary hoists are mounted on both the reactor well side of the refueling platform and on the platform trolley. These hoists normally can be used with appropriate grapples to handle control rods, in-core detectors, sources, and other internals of the core. The auxiliary hoists can also serve as a means of shuffling fuel elements and other equipment within the pool and reactor.
A single operator is capable of controlling all the motions of the platform required to handle the fuel assemblies during refueling. Interlocks on both the grapple hoist and auxiliary hoists prevent lifting a fuel assembly over the core with control rod withdrawn; interlocks also prevent withdrawal of a control rod with a fuel assembly over the core attached to either the fuel grapple or auxiliary hoists. Interlocks also block travel of the refueling platform over the reactor in the startup mode. The refueling interlocks are described and evaluated in subsection 7.6, "Refueling Interlocks."
A Service Pole Caddy platform is attached on the rear side of either the Unit 2 or Unit 3 refueling platform at PBAPS. The platform provides an auxiliary work station for unlatching and latching the steam separator head bolts during refueling activities. The platform can also be utilized for other underwater servicing needs, such as jet pump beam bolt untorquing CHAPTER 10                  10.4-5            REV. 26, APRIL 2017


Zircaloy Inconel 718 1 couple every 6 years
PBAPS UFSAR and steam line plug installation. The platform is provided with high torque service poles and a motorized hoist to handle the poles.
10.4.7  Storage Equipment In addition to the new and spent fuel storage racks, other storage equipment is provided.
Defective fuel assemblies may be placed in special fuel cans which would be stored in the defective fuel storage rack.
10.4.8  Under-Reactor-Vessel Servicing Equipment The necessary equipment to remove CRD's during a refueling outage is provided. An equipment handling platform with a rectangular open center is provided. This platform is rotatable to provide space under the vessel so the CRD can be lowered and removed.
A thermal sleeve installation tool (Figure 10.4.3) is used to rotate the thermal sleeve (Figure 10.4.2) within the CRD housing.
Sleeve rotation permits disengagement of the guide tube. A rope and pulley integral with the tool permits complete sleeve removal.
Miscellaneous wrenches are provided to install and remove the neutron detectors. Flow through the drain tube pulls the fixed in-core detector string into the in-core guide tube thus sealing the opening in the in-core flange during in-core servicing. A drain can be opened after in-core insertion to drain any residual water. Correct seating of the in-core string is indicated when drainage ceases.
10.4.9  Equipment Storage Pit Large radioactive components, such as the steam dryer and steam separator assembly are stored in the storage pit. The storage pit is separated from the drywell by removable concrete blocks that serve as a shield when the dryer and separator are stored and the water level is lowered. Other large items, such as the pressure vessel head and drywell head, are stored on the refueling floor.
To minimize worker exposure, a wet transfer of the dryer is normally expected. To minimize operator exposure during a dry transfer of the dryer assembly, the storage pit canal is deep enough so that the top of the dryer can be kept at least 2 ft below the operating floor level during transfer. The storage pit is deep enough below the canal that, with the reactor well drained, a minimum of 6 in of water shielding can be maintained above the separator plenum dome.
CHAPTER 10                  10.4-6              REV. 26, APRIL 2017


1 couple every 6 years
PBAPS UFSAR Special liner considerations account for the abrasion and high unit loadings that occur on areas where the dryer and separator assemblies are placed.
The storage pit is lined with stainless steel for leaktightness and corrosion resistance.
10.4.10  Reactor Building Crane The reactor building crane for each unit is designed such that no credible postulated failure of any crane component will result in the dropping of the fuel cask; therefore, the consequences of this accident are precluded.
The reactor building cranes have been evaluated using the criteria of NUREG-0554 and NUREG-0612, Appendix C to establish the maximum critical load (MCL) rating at which they can be considered single-failure proof. The results of this evaluation resulted in a MCL rating of 125 tons for the main hoist reactor building cranes.
Thus, for loads within this limit, a load drop is not credible.
The design of the main hoist is as follows:
A single hoist motor drives two separate shafts. The motor has two centrifugally tripped limit switches, one outboard of each hoist input pinion at each end of the motor shaft assembly. These provide an automatic safety shutdown and protection from any control or motor malfunction which might result in a runaway condition of the load. Each motor driven shaft passes through a 150 percent capacity solenoid-actuated brake. A failure of either the motor shaft, the connecting shafts, or the shaft couplings singly would not result in a load drop as the brakes would be effective in holding the load. On loss of power to the motor, both brakes engage. They can also be engaged by the operator.
Additionally, there is a 90 percent capacity eddy-current brake to limit the rate of load lowering.
After the brake, each motor shaft enters its own gear reducer. If a component of one gear case (gear teeth, shafts, bearings, or structural component) should fail, the other gear reducer holds the load with its brake with a safety factor of 5.
Each gear case is fitted on its output end with a pinion meshing with the drum gear. A failure of a pinion, drum gear, pinion shaft, or pinion bearing results in the load being carried by the other similar set of parts on the other end of the drum. Again a safety factor of 5 remains in the functioning parts. In each of the main hoist gear cases, there is a mechanical load brake, with cooling of the gear case oil, to offer additional safety in load handling.
CHAPTER 10                  10.4-7            REV. 26, APRIL 2017


1 couple every 6 years 10.3.6.2.3 Full Rack Insert Surveillance Inspections Two rack inserts will be visually inspected by camera at the  
PBAPS UFSAR In the event of failure of the drum shaft, drum bearing, or drum bearing bracket, the drum flange drops a fraction of an inch onto machined structural seats so located that the drum is supported and the remaining pinion and gear stay in mesh to restrain the load. A safety factor of 5 still remains.
Two separate ropes are led from the drum, each being reeved through a set of block sheaves, upper and lower, and back to an equalizer bar, and are arranged for equal division of the load between the two ropes. With both ropes functioning and equalized, the safety factor of the ropes is 7 on a static basis. If one rope fails, the remaining rope supports the load with a residual safety factor of 3.5 on a static basis. The equalizer bar is fitted with double acting hydraulic cylinders and hydraulic accumulator to minimize the shock when the entire load is transferred to one rope. Therefore, load drop is precluded for a postulated single rope failure. The equalizer bar is contained within structural components so that if it breaks or if its pivot point breaks, the parts are retained within the trolley and load drop is precluded.
To protect against overloading of the cables a load sensing system consisting of tension type load cells supports the load sensing sheave frame assembly. The load cells are supported by the load cell support brackets attached to the trolley frame. To protect against an unbalanced load, limit switches provide visual warning indication to the crane operator. The limit switches, attached to the trolley frame, are activated by movement in the equalizer bar assembly.
All sheaves, both upper and block sheaves, are contained in heavy structural casings which usually carry a negligible load. In the event of a sheave pin failure, the sheaves rise to the top of the block or drop to the base of the upper sheave housing and stop at those points, and load drop is precluded. The block assembly contains two 100 percent capacity hooks of "load carrying devices." This redundancy in attachment to lifting assembly and in load carrying capability are such that a single failure does not cause load drop. Additional nondestructive testing (ultrasonic and magnaflux testing for the load block swivel and the sheave shafts of the upper assembly) provides further assurance that this crane is of a quality suitable for nuclear services. Electrical circuits have been reviewed and it has been determined that no single credible electrical component failure causes the load to drop.
The auxiliary hoist is designed to satisfy the Single-Failure-Proof Guidelines of Section 5.1.6 of NUREG-0612, and thus eliminating the need to analyze the effects of drops of heavy loads per the evaluation criteria of Section 5.1 of NUREG-0612.
CHAPTER 10                  10.4-8              REV. 26, APRIL 2017


frequency of the general coupon removal schedule described
PBAPS UFSAR Protection of the pool liners in the cask storage area for the normal cask lowering operation is provided by a 1 in thick steel wearing plate. This prevents any damage to the liner over plant life occasioned by normal fuel cask handling.
The adequacy of the drywell head for a postulated drop of one of the shield plugs was performed in a load drop analysis performed in the Peach Bottom Calculation PS-0288, Drywell Head Load Drop Analysis.
No vital equipment is located in compartments below the fuel pool floor; therefore, no loss of function of vital equipment would result from falling objects and flooding caused by a postulated event.
Strict administrative control assures that the cask is not unnecessarily lifted higher than required during maneuvering above the refueling floor and also that the cask is not brought over the reactor vessel or the fuel storage portion of the pool.
10.4.11  Heavy Loads Compliance The licensee has a defense-in-depth program to manage the handling of heavy loads on site such that no credible load drop will endanger the public safety and health. Loads that are either not considered as heavy loads (i.e., less than 1200 pounds) or have been determined to not potentially impact irradiated fuel, the reactor vessel, or safe shutdown equipment are not within the scope of the heavy loads program. Any heavy loads that have not previously been evaluated will be evaluated prior to being lifted.
This evaluation would include ensuring at least one of the following measures are in place for the lift:
Mechanical stops or electrical interlocks that prevent heavy loads movement over irradiated fuel or safe shutdown equipment, Verification analysis that the consequences of a potential load drop are within accepted bounds, or Use of a single-failure-proof handling system.
Lifts are conducted in accordance with good rigging practices and in accordance with the licensee's approved procedures.
In July 1980, the NRC issued NUREG-0612, Control of Heavy Loads at Nuclear Power Plants. This NUREG was issued to resolve NRC Generic Technical Activity A-36. This generic issue involved reviewing the adequacy of NRC requirements for controlling the handling of heavy loads over or in proximity to spent fuel, the reactor core, and safe shutdown equipment. NUREG-0612 recommendations were planned to be assessed by the NRC in two phases (i.e., Phase I and Phase II). Phase I concerned itself CHAPTER 10                  10.4-9            REV. 26, APRIL 2017


above to visually monitor for physical deformities such as
PBAPS UFSAR with seven requirements that assured a defense-in-depth approach was taken in regards to handling heavy loads. Phase II of NUREG-0612 concerned itself with plant specific analyses to ensure that the potential for load drop was extremely small or if there was a load drop no significant impact to spent fuel, the reactor vessel or safe shutdown equipment would occur. The NRC issued a safety evaluation report concerning Peach Bottom compliance to NUREG-0612 Phase I on 9/21/83. Peach Bottom submitted its intent concerning compliance with Phase II. However, prior to NRC issuance of a final SER for Peach Bottom, the NRC discontinued its review of Phase II submittals. In Generic Letter 85-11, dated 6/28/85, the NRC reported to the industry that due to their reviews of Phase I activities and proposed Phase II activities, there did not warrant a need to take further action on Phase II. The Peach Bottom response to this generic letter on 2/11/86 stated that changes to Phase II actions would be considered on a case-by-case basis.
Lifts are conducted in accordance with good rigging practices and in accordance with the licensees approved procedures.
10.4.11.1  NUREG-0612 Phase I Requirements All heavy loads that could be brought over or in proximity to irradiated fuel, the reactor vessel or safe shutdown equipment are handled in accordance with a defense in depth philosophy. The following seven criteria ensure appropriate handling of heavy loads is in place.
: 1. Safe Load Paths Safe Load Paths (SLPs) are established for the movement of heavy loads to minimize the potential for heavy loads, if dropped, to impact irradiated fuel in the reactor or spent fuel pool, or to impact safe shutdown equipment required to be operable. These load paths are controlled under approved design documents. Design documents and procedures also control rigging exclusion zones and height/weight restrictions. Administrative procedures require that the cognizant supervisor review safe load paths prior to the lift. Any deviations from designated SLPs must be approved by engineering.
Concerning the Emergency Diesel Generator (EDG) Cranes, heavy loads lifts may only be performed when the EDG is inoperable or declared inoperable for purposes of heavy load lifts.
Load movements along the safe load paths are directed by a qualified signalman.
: 2. Load Handling Procedures CHAPTER 10                10.4-10              REV. 26, APRIL 2017


bubbling, blistering, corrosion pitting, cracking, or
PBAPS UFSAR Load handling procedures are in place for the handling of heavy loads over or in proximity to reactor fuel or safe shutdown equipment. A governing administrative procedure defines the overall requirements to perform these lifting operations including the NUREG-0612 Phase I requirements. Implementing procedure(s) ensure that appropriate details of complicated lifts are defined.
 
As appropriate, the above procedures direct the identification of required equipment, inspections and acceptance criteria required before moving the load, the steps and proper sequence to be followed in handling the load, definition and use of appropriate safe load paths and require that Phase I requirements are met for heavy load operations.
flaking. Special attention will be paid to development of
: 3. Crane Operator Training For lifts performed within the scope of the heavy loads program, crane operators will be trained, qualified and conduct themselves in accordance with Chapter 2-3 of ANSI B30.2-1976, Overhead and Gantry Cranes.
 
: 4. Special Lifting Devices Special Lifting Devices used in areas where a load is carried over or in proximity to the reactor vessel, spent fuel pool, or safe shutdown equipment meet the requirements of ANSI N14.6-1978 with the following exceptions:
any edge or corner defects.
: a. Inspections shall be performed at least once per operating cycle rather than annually.
A region of high duty spent fuel storage rack cell locations
: b. Critical welds may be non-destructively examined in lieu of the routine 150% load test
 
: c. Dry fuel storage cask trunnions are waved from the periodic load test or examination requirements.
will be identified and will be monitored for fuel insertion
: d. The drywell strongback has two steel features that were added during modifications that did not receive the required materials testing (Charpy impact or drop weight testing). (Ref. ECR 13-00378).
 
: e. The RPV head carousel hook and load pins did not receive the required materials testing (Charpy impact or drop weight testing) (Ref. ECR 13-00378).
and removal events to ensure that their service bounds that
The stress design factor stated in section 3.2.1.1 of ANSI N14.6-1978 is based on the combined maximum static and dynamic loads that could be imparted on the handling device based on the characteristics of the crane which will be used. Devices used for CHAPTER 10                   10.4-11            REV. 26, APRIL 2017
 
of the general population of storage locations. Once every
 
10 years, an insert will be removed from this region and will
 
be inspected for thickness along its length at several
 
locations and be compared with the as-built thickness
 
measurements of the removed insert to verify it has sustained
 
uniform wear over its service life. After the inspection, the
 
insert will not be reinstalled.
 
CHAPTER 10 10.3-25 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 TABLE 10.3.1  AVAILABLE MAKEUP WATER SOURCES
 
Rate Source            Route            (gpm)
Torus One RHR pump to fuel 10,000  pool (1)
Refueling water One refueling water pump 1,650 storage tank and/
to reactor well header, to or condensate fuel pool cooling pumps, to storage tank bypass filter, to fuel pool
 
Condensate storage High-pressure decontami-25 tank nation pump to fuel pool
 
Condensate storage Fuel pool makeup from con-60 tank densate transfer pump
 
Demineralized To demin. water supplies 150 water storage in service boxes
 
Total demineralized 1,885 water available
 
immediately
 
Total demineralized 11,885 water available
 
after 1 hr (2)
River water High-pressure service water 18,000  pumps via RHR cross-tie (2,3)
River water Fire waterhose stations 70  (2-3 in)
Total river water 70 available immediately
 
Total river water 18,070 available after 1 hr (3) 
 
(1) Approximately 1 hr is required to install the removable  spool before supply can be used.
(2) Can only be used if plant is shut down and RHR cooling  is with RHR pumps A and/or C.
(3) Alternate to torus water using RHR pumps.
 
CHAPTER 10 10.3-26 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 TABLE 10.3.2  RACK MODULE DATA (PER UNIT)
 
QTY 
 
ARRAY STORAGE LOCATIONS
 
RACK ASSY
 
DIMENSIONS (INCHES)
DRY WEIGHT (LBS)
PER RACK ASSY  1  9 x 14    126    54 x 89 x 180      10,000  2 10 x 14    280    64 x 89 x 180      11,200  1 11 x 14 Mod. 119    70 x 89 x 180      9,500  1 12 x 15    180    76 x 95 x 180      14,400  1 12 x 17    204    76 x 107 x 180      16,300  2 12 x 20    480    76 x 126 x 180      19,200  2 15 x 19    570    95 x 120 x 180      22,800  1 17 x 20    340  107 x 126 x 180      27,200  4  19 x 20  1,520  120 x 126 x 180      30,400 15 racks  3,819 
 
Storage locations center-to-center spacing (inches) 6.28 Storage cell liner dimension (inches)    6.07
 
Intermediate storage location inner dimension (inches)  6.12
 
CHAPTER 10 10.4-1 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 10.4  TOOLS AND SERVICING EQUIPMENT 10.4.1  Introduction
 
All tools and servicing equipment necessary to meet the reactor
 
general servicing requirements are supplied for efficiency and
 
safe serviceability. The flow chart in Figure 10.4.1 defines in a
 
general way the steps that make up a routine refueling outage. The
 
heavy lines on the chart define the critical path in a normal
 
outage. Deviations to this path may be encountered under abnormal
 
circumstances. The following paragraphs describe the use of some
 
of the major tools and servicing equipment.
 
10.4.2  Fuel Servicing Equipment
 
Two fuel preparation machines located in each fuel storage pool
 
are used to remove and install channels to support inspection or
 
servicing of fuel assemblies. The fuel preparation machines are
 
also used for the placement of new fuel assemblies into the spent
 
fuel pool. These machines are designed to be removed from the
 
pool for servicing.
 
An equipment support railing is provided around the pool periphery
 
in order to tie off miscellaneous service equipment and for
 
personnel safety. Equipment lugs fabricated as part of the pool
 
liner are required for fixtures that might later be desired by
 
plant operating personnel. In addition, a curb with a plate of
 
thick stainless steel on top is provided around the entire
 
periphery of the refueling volume. Additional equipment may be
 
mounted by welding to, or drilling into, the plate. The curb may
 
be used as an additional support or tie-off area. Cable ways are
 
recessed into the floor around the pool periphery with openings to
 
pass cables into the pool from underneath this curbing.
 
The new fuel inspection stand is provided to restrain the fuel
 
assembly in a vertical position for inspection. The inspection
 
stand can hold two assemblies. The general purpose grapple is a
 
small, hand actuated tool used generally with fuel. The grapple
 
can be attached to the reactor building auxiliary hoist, the jib
 
crane, and the auxiliary hoists on the refueling platform. The
 
general purpose grapple is used to place new fuel in the
 
inspection stand and transfer it to the fuel pool.
 
A channel handling boom, with spring loaded takeup reel, is used
 
to assist the operator in supporting the weight after the channel
 
is removed from the fuel assembly. The boom is located between
 
the two fuel preparation machines. With the channel handling tool
 
attached to the reel, the channel may be conveniently moved
 
between fuel preparation machines.
 
CHAPTER 10 10.4-2 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 The complete channeling procedure is as follows. Using the refuel platform and the mast grapple, a spent fuel assembly is lifted
 
into the fuel preparation machine with the carriage lowered. 
 
After raising the assembly to its high position, the channel is
 
unbolted from the fuel assembly using the channel bolt wrench
 
furnished for this purpose. This wrench is used to unscrew the
 
bolt and capture it. The channel handling tool is attached to the
 
channel handling boom and lowered to the channel. The tool is
 
attached to the channel triangular corner tabs by expanding two
 
fingers on the tool. The channel is then held, and the fuel
 
preparation machine carriage is lowered, causing the fuel bundle
 
to slide down out of the channel. The channel is then positioned
 
over the other fuel preparation machine, containing a new fuel
 
assembly, and the procedure is reversed. A channel storage rack
 
for accumulating channels is located on the wall between the fuel
 
preparation machines. A channel check gage may be mounted on the
 
wall adjacent to the fuel machines so the operator can check
 
channels. The channeled fuel is stored in the pool storage racks, ready for insertion in the reactor.
 
10.4.3  Servicing Aids
 
General and local area underwater lights are provided to
 
illuminate the internal region of the reactor vessel. Drop lights
 
are used for intense radial illumination where needed. These
 
lights are small enough in diameter to fit into fuel channels or
 
control blade guide tubes. A portable underwater television
 
camera and monitor are part of the plant optical aids. The
 
transmitted image can be viewed on the refueling platform. This
 
remote display assists in the inspection of the vessel internals, and general underwater surveillance in the reactor vessel and fuel
 
storage pool. General purpose, clear plastic viewing aids that
 
will float are used to break the water surface for better
 
visibility.
 
A portable underwater vacuum cleaner is provided to assist in
 
removing debris and miscellaneous objects from the pool floor or
 
the reactor vessel. The pump and the filter unit are completely
 
submersible for extended periods. Fuel pool tool accessories are
 
also provided to meet servicing requirements.
 
10.4.4  Reactor Vessel Servicing Equipment
 
Reactor vessel servicing equipment is supplied for safe handling
 
of the vessel head and its components, including nuts, studs, bushings, and seals.
 
The drywell head strongback is used for lifting the drywell head
 
and mirror insulation. Cruciform in shape, with four equally
 
spaced lifting points, the strongback is designed to keep the 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.4-3 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 drywell head level during lifting and transport. Redundant rigging is used to connect the drywell head to the single-failure-
 
proof strongback, resulting in a single-failure-proof lift. An exception to the single-failure-proof requirements in ANSI N14.6-1978 is that two structural features added during modifications to upgrade this device were not impact-tested.  (Ref. ECR 13-00378)
 
The Reactor Pressure Vessel (RPV) head strongback/carousel is used
 
for lifting the vessel head. The strongback/carousel is an
 
integrated piece of equipment consisting of a cruciform shaped
 
strongback, a circular monorail, and a circular storage tray.
 
The strongback is a box beam structure which has a hook box with
 
three pins in the center for engagement with the reactor building
 
crane main hoist hook. Each arm has a liftrod for engagement to
 
the four lift lugs on the RPV head. The monorail is mounted on
 
extensions of the strongback arms and four additional arms equally
 
spaced between the strongback arms. The monorail circle matches
 
the stud circle of the reactor vessel and it serves to suspend
 
stud tensioners and nut handling device.
 
The head strongback carousel service the following functions:
 
Lifting of Vessel Head - The strongback, when suspended from the reactor building crane main hook, transports the RPV head
 
plus the carousel with all its attachments between the
 
reactor vessel and storage on the pedestals. The strongback
 
and its connections to the RPV head are single-failure-proof.
 
One exception to the single-failure-proof requirements in
 
ANSI N14.6-1978 is that the hook and load pin material for
 
this device was not impact-tested as specified in ANSI N14.6-
 
1978.  (Ref. ECR 13-00378)
 
Tensioning of Vessel Head Closure - The carousel, when supported on the RPV head on the vessel can carry up to eight
 
tensioners, its own weight, the strongback, storage of nuts, washers, thread protectors, and associated tools and
 
equipment. The stud tensioners are suspended equally spaced
 
from a monorail above the vessel stud circle. Each tensioner
 
has an air-operated hoist with individual controls.
 
The head holding pedestals are designed to support the vessel head
 
to permit seal replacement and seal surface cleaning and
 
inspection. The mating surface between vessel and pedestal is
 
selected to minimize the possibility of damaging the vessel head.
 
A reactor servicing platform permits the operator to work at a
 
level just above the reactor vessel flange, and permits servicing
 
access for the full core diameter. A service platform support is
 
provided, which rests on the vessel flange surface, and serves as 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.4-4 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 both a track for the servicing platform and as a seal surface protector.
 
A separate seal surface protector made of aluminum is provided to
 
protect the sealing surface of the reactor pressure vessel flange
 
when the service platform or its track is not used.
 
A stud tensioner assembly is provided, and consists of four
 
tensioners transported by the reactor building crane main hoist or
 
the head strongback/carousel. The tensioners are controlled by a
 
hydraulic unit with pressure gages. Each tensioner contains:
: 1. An integral nut wrench for rotating the nut.
: 2. One stud elongation gage plus one elongation rod per stud to permit initial and periodic pressure/stretch
 
indication.
 
10.4.5  In-Vessel Servicing Equipment
 
The single or multiple instrument strongback is attached to the
 
reactor building crane auxiliary hoist and is used to lift
 
replacement in-core detectors from their shipping container. The
 
instrument handling tool is attached to the in-core detector by
 
the operators on the refueling platform. The single or multiple
 
strongback initially supports the in-core detector(s) as they are
 
lowered into the vessel, and the in-core detector is then
 
decoupled from the strongback. Final in-core detector insertion
 
is accomplished with the instrument handling tool. The instrument
 
handling tool is used for removing and installing fixed in-core
 
detectors, as well as for handling neutron sources and the WRNM
 
dry tubes.
 
10.4.5.1 Reactor Cavity Work Platform 
 
The Reactor Cavity Work Platform (RCWP) is a tool used to allow in
 
vessel inspection/activities concurrent with fuel movement thereby
 
reducing refueling critical path time. The RCWP is a stainless
 
steel structure which consists of four (4) quadrants connected
 
using three sets of splice plates. The RCWP is stored in four (4)
 
specially designed sea land containers, and is brought to the
 
refueling floor and assembled prior to use. 
 
The RCWP has an octagonal shaped structural framework with eight
 
radial legs which support four (4) personnel work baskets. The
 
eight support legs rest on the reactor building elevation 234'-0"
 
floor slab. The platform, when placed in the reactor cavity above
 
the open reactor pressure vessel (RPV), is slightly submerged into
 
the reactor cavity water. The bottom of the work baskets is
 
approximate elevation 231'-0" which provides approximately 7'-0" 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.4-5 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 clearance to the underside of the refueling bridge. The RCWP legs have the capability to both extend/retract and rotate in order to
 
avoid obstructions such as the electrical pits and refuel bridge
 
gearbox, which are present on the operating deck. The RCWP has a
 
30-degree refueling opening in the direction of the fuel pool toallow for refuel bridge mast and fuel bundle movement whileperforming in vessel activities. Electrical power and station air
 
outlets are also provided in the RCWP work baskets. 
 
10.4.6  Refueling Equipment
 
The refueling platform is used as the principal means of
 
transporting fuel assemblies back and forth between the reactor
 
well and the storage pool. The platform travels on rails
 
extending along each side of the reactor well and fuel pool. The
 
platform supports the fuel grapple and the frame-mounted and
 
monorail auxiliary hoists. The grapple is suspended from a
 
trolley system that can traverse the width of the platform. 
 
Platform operations are controlled from either auxiliary hoist
 
control pendant or the fuel grapple controller consoles. The
 
platform contains a position-indicating system that indicates the
 
position of the fuel grapple over the core. The platform is
 
prevented from contacting the fuel pool and reactor walls by a
 
boundary zone interlock system.
 
One-half ton auxiliary hoists are mounted on both the reactor well
 
side of the refueling platform and on the platform trolley. These
 
hoists normally can be used with appropriate grapples to handle
 
control rods, in-core detectors, sources, and other internals of
 
the core. The auxiliary hoists can also serve as a means of
 
shuffling fuel elements and other equipment within the pool and
 
reactor.
 
A single operator is capable of controlling all the motions of
 
the platform required to handle the fuel assemblies during
 
refueling. Interlocks on both the grapple hoist and auxiliary
 
hoists prevent lifting a fuel assembly over the core with control rod withdrawn; interlocks also prevent withdrawal of a control rod
 
with a fuel assembly over the core attached to either the fuel
 
grapple or auxiliary hoists. Interlocks also block travel of the
 
refueling platform over the reactor in the startup mode. The
 
refueling interlocks are described and evaluated in subsection
 
7.6, "Refueling Interlocks."
 
A Service Pole Caddy platform is attached on the rear side of
 
either the Unit 2 or Unit 3 refueling platform at PBAPS. The
 
platform provides an auxiliary work station for unlatching and
 
latching the steam separator head bolts during refueling
 
activities. The platform can also be utilized for other
 
underwater servicing needs, such as jet pump beam bolt untorquing 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.4-6 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 and steam line plug installation. The platform is provided with high torque service poles and a motorized hoist to handle the
 
poles.
 
10.4.7  Storage Equipment
 
In addition to the new and spent fuel storage racks, other storage
 
equipment is provided.
 
Defective fuel assemblies may be placed in special fuel cans which
 
would be stored in the defective fuel storage rack.
 
10.4.8  Under-Reactor-Vessel Servicing Equipment
 
The necessary equipment to remove CRD's during a refueling outage
 
is provided. An equipment handling platform with a rectangular
 
open center is provided. This platform is rotatable to provide
 
space under the vessel so the CRD can be lowered and removed.
 
A thermal sleeve installation tool (Figure 10.4.3) is used to
 
rotate the thermal sleeve (Figure 10.4.2) within the CRD housing.
 
Sleeve rotation permits disengagement of the guide tube. A rope
 
and pulley integral with the tool permits complete sleeve removal.
 
Miscellaneous wrenches are provided to install and remove the
 
neutron detectors. Flow through the drain tube pulls the fixed
 
in-core detector string into the in-core guide tube thus sealing
 
the opening in the in-core flange during in-core servicing. A
 
drain can be opened after in-core insertion to drain any residual
 
water. Correct seating of the in-core string is indicated when
 
drainage ceases.
 
10.4.9  Equipment Storage Pit
 
Large radioactive components, such as the steam dryer and steam
 
separator assembly are stored in the storage pit. The storage pit
 
is separated from the drywell by removable concrete blocks that
 
serve as a shield when the dryer and separator are stored and the
 
water level is lowered. Other large items, such as the pressure
 
vessel head and drywell head, are stored on the refueling floor.
 
To minimize worker exposure, a wet transfer of the dryer is
 
normally expected. To minimize operator exposure during a dry
 
transfer of the dryer assembly, the storage pit canal is deep
 
enough so that the top of the dryer can be kept at least 2 ft
 
below the operating floor level during transfer. The storage pit
 
is deep enough below the canal that, with the reactor well
 
drained, a minimum of 6 in of water shielding can be maintained
 
above the separator plenum dome.
 
CHAPTER 10 10.4-7 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 Special liner considerations account for the abrasion and high unit loadings that occur on areas where the dryer and separator
 
assemblies are placed.
 
The storage pit is lined with stainless steel for leaktightness
 
and corrosion resistance.
 
10.4.10  Reactor Building Crane
 
The reactor building crane for each unit is designed such that no
 
credible postulated failure of any crane component will result in
 
the dropping of the fuel cask; therefore, the consequences of this
 
accident are precluded.
 
The reactor building cranes have been evaluated using the criteria
 
of NUREG-0554 and NUREG-0612, Appendix C to establish the maximum
 
critical load (MCL) rating at which they can be considered single-
 
failure proof. The results of this evaluation resulted in a MCL
 
rating of 125 tons for the main hoist reactor building cranes. 
 
Thus, for loads within this limit, a load drop is not credible.
 
The design of the main hoist is as follows:
 
A single hoist motor drives two separate shafts. The motor has
 
two centrifugally tripped limit switches, one outboard of each
 
hoist input pinion at each end of the motor shaft assembly. These
 
provide an automatic safety shutdown and protection from any
 
control or motor malfunction which might result in a runaway
 
condition of the load. Each motor driven shaft passes through a
 
150 percent capacity solenoid-actuated brake. A failure of either
 
the motor shaft, the connecting shafts, or the shaft couplings
 
singly would not result in a load drop as the brakes would be
 
effective in holding the load. On loss of power to the motor, both brakes engage. They can also be engaged by the operator. 
 
Additionally, there is a 90 percent capacity eddy-current brake to
 
limit the rate of load lowering.
 
After the brake, each motor shaft enters its own gear reducer. If
 
a component of one gear case (gear teeth, shafts, bearings, or
 
structural component) should fail, the other gear reducer holds
 
the load with its brake with a safety factor of 5.
 
Each gear case is fitted on its output end with a pinion meshing
 
with the drum gear. A failure of a pinion, drum gear, pinion
 
shaft, or pinion bearing results in the load being carried by the
 
other similar set of parts on the other end of the drum. Again a
 
safety factor of 5 remains in the functioning parts. In each of
 
the main hoist gear cases, there is a mechanical load brake, with
 
cooling of the gear case oil, to offer additional safety in load
 
handling. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.4-8 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 In the event of failure of the drum shaft, drum bearing, or drum bearing bracket, the drum flange drops a fraction of an inch onto
 
machined structural seats so located that the drum is supported
 
and the remaining pinion and gear stay in mesh to restrain the
 
load. A safety factor of 5 still remains.
Two separate ropes are led from the drum, each being reeved
 
through a set of block sheaves, upper and lower, and back to an
 
equalizer bar, and are arranged for equal division of the load
 
between the two ropes. With both ropes functioning and equalized, the safety factor of the ropes is 7 on a static basis. If one rope
 
fails, the remaining rope supports the load with a residual safety
 
factor of 3.5 on a static basis. The equalizer bar is fitted with
 
double acting hydraulic cylinders and hydraulic accumulator to
 
minimize the shock when the entire load is transferred to one
 
rope. Therefore, load drop is precluded for a postulated single
 
rope failure. The equalizer bar is contained within structural
 
components so that if it breaks or if its pivot point breaks, the
 
parts are retained within the trolley and load drop is precluded.
 
To protect against overloading of the cables a load sensing system
 
consisting of tension type load cells supports the load sensing
 
sheave frame assembly. The load cells are supported by the load
 
cell support brackets attached to the trolley frame. To protect
 
against an unbalanced load, limit switches provide visual warning
 
indication to the crane operator. The limit switches, attached to
 
the trolley frame, are activated by movement in the equalizer bar
 
assembly.
 
All sheaves, both upper and block sheaves, are contained in heavy
 
structural casings which usually carry a negligible load. In the
 
event of a sheave pin failure, the sheaves rise to the top of the
 
block or drop to the base of the upper sheave housing and stop at
 
those points, and load drop is precluded. The block assembly
 
contains two 100 percent capacity hooks of "load carrying
 
devices."  This redundancy in attachment to lifting assembly and
 
in load carrying capability are such that a single failure does
 
not cause load drop. Additional nondestructive testing (ultrasonic and magnaflux testing for the load block swivel and
 
the sheave shafts of the upper assembly) provides further
 
assurance that this crane is of a quality suitable for nuclear
 
services. Electrical circuits have been reviewed and it has been
 
determined that no single credible electrical component failure
 
causes the load to drop.
 
The auxiliary hoist is designed to satisfy the Single-Failure-
 
Proof Guidelines of Section 5.1.6 of NUREG-0612, and thus
 
eliminating the need to analyze the effects of drops of heavy
 
loads per the evaluation criteria of Section 5.1 of NUREG-0612. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.4-9 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 Protection of the pool liners in the cask storage area for the normal cask lowering operation is provided by a 1 in thick steel
 
wearing plate. This prevents any damage to the liner over plant
 
life occasioned by normal fuel cask handling.
 
The adequacy of the drywell head for a postulated drop of one of
 
the shield plugs was performed in a load drop analysis performed
 
in the Peach Bottom Calculation PS-0288, "Drywell Head Load Drop
 
Analysis."
 
No vital equipment is located in compartments below the fuel pool
 
floor; therefore, no loss of function of vital equipment would
 
result from falling objects and flooding caused by a postulated
 
event.
 
Strict administrative control assures that the cask is not
 
unnecessarily lifted higher than required during maneuvering above
 
the refueling floor and also that the cask is not brought over the
 
reactor vessel or the fuel storage portion of the pool.
 
10.4.11  Heavy Loads Compliance The licensee has a defense-in-depth program to manage the handling
 
of heavy loads on site such that no credible load drop will
 
endanger the public safety and health. Loads that are either not
 
considered as 'heavy loads' (i.e., less than 1200 pounds) or have
 
been determined to not potentially impact irradiated fuel, the
 
reactor vessel, or safe shutdown equipment are not within the
 
scope of the 'heavy loads' program. Any heavy loads that have not
 
previously been evaluated will be evaluated prior to being lifted. 
 
This evaluation would include ensuring at least one of the
 
following measures are in place for the lift:
 
Mechanical stops or electrical interlocks that prevent heavy
 
loads movement over irradiated fuel or safe shutdown equipment, Verification analysis that the consequences of a potential load
 
drop are within accepted bounds, or Use of a single-failure-proof handling system. 
 
Lifts are conducted in accordance with good rigging practices and
 
in accordance with the licensee's approved procedures.
 
In July 1980, the NRC issued NUREG-0612, Control of Heavy Loads at
 
Nuclear Power Plants. This NUREG was issued to resolve NRC
 
Generic Technical Activity A-36. This generic issue involved
 
reviewing the adequacy of NRC requirements for controlling the
 
handling of heavy loads over or in proximity to spent fuel, the
 
reactor core, and safe shutdown equipment. NUREG-0612
 
recommendations were planned to be assessed by the NRC in two
 
phases (i.e., Phase I and Phase II). Phase I concerned itself 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.4-10 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 with seven requirements that assured a defense-in-depth approach was taken in regards to handling heavy loads. Phase II of NUREG-
 
0612 concerned itself with plant specific analyses to ensure that
 
the potential for load drop was extremely small or if there was a
 
load drop no significant impact to spent fuel, the reactor vessel
 
or safe shutdown equipment would occur. The NRC issued a safety
 
evaluation report concerning Peach Bottom compliance to NUREG-0612
 
Phase I on 9/21/83. Peach Bottom submitted its intent concerning
 
compliance with Phase II. However, prior to NRC issuance of a
 
final SER for Peach Bottom, the NRC discontinued its review of
 
Phase II submittals. In Generic Letter 85-11, dated 6/28/85, the
 
NRC reported to the industry that due to their reviews of Phase I
 
activities and proposed Phase II activities, there did not warrant
 
a need to take further action on Phase II. The Peach Bottom
 
response to this generic letter on 2/11/86 stated that changes to
 
Phase II actions would be considered on a case-by-case basis.
 
Lifts are conducted in accordance with good rigging practices and
 
in accordance with the licensee's approved procedures.
10.4.11.1  NUREG-0612 Phase I Requirements All heavy loads that could be brought over or in proximity to
 
irradiated fuel, the reactor vessel or safe shutdown equipment are
 
handled in accordance with a defense in depth philosophy. The
 
following seven criteria ensure appropriate handling of heavy
 
loads is in place.
: 1. Safe Load Paths Safe Load Paths (SLP's) are established for the movement of heavy
 
loads to minimize the potential for heavy loads, if dropped, to
 
impact irradiated fuel in the reactor or spent fuel pool, or to
 
impact safe shutdown equipment required to be operable. These
 
load paths are controlled under approved design documents. Design
 
documents and procedures also control rigging exclusion zones and
 
height/weight restrictions. Administrative procedures require
 
that the cognizant supervisor review safe load paths prior to the
 
lift. Any deviations from designated SLP's must be approved by
 
engineering.
Concerning the Emergency Diesel Generator (EDG) Cranes, heavy
 
loads lifts may only be performed when the EDG is inoperable or
 
declared inoperable for purposes of heavy load lifts.
Load movements along the safe load paths are directed by a
 
qualified signalman.
: 2. Load Handling Procedures
 
CHAPTER 10 10.4-11 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 Load handling procedures are in place for the handling of heavy loads over or in proximity to reactor fuel or safe shutdown  
 
equipment. A governing administrative procedure defines the  
 
overall requirements to perform these lifting operations including  
 
the NUREG-0612 Phase I requirements. Implementing procedure(s)  
 
ensure that appropriate details of complicated lifts are defined.  
 
As appropriate, the above procedures direct the identification of  
 
required equipment, inspections and acceptance criteria required  
 
before moving the load, the steps and proper sequence to be  
 
followed in handling the load, definition and use of appropriate  
 
safe load paths and require that Phase I requirements are met for  
 
heavy load operations.  
: 3. Crane Operator Training  
 
For lifts performed within the scope of the heavy loads program, crane operators will be trained, qualified and conduct themselves  
 
in accordance with Chapter 2-3 of ANSI B30.2-1976, 'Overhead and  
 
Gantry Cranes'.  
: 4. Special Lifting Devices  
 
Special Lifting Devices used in areas where a load is carried over  
 
or in proximity to the reactor vessel, spent fuel pool, or safe  
 
shutdown equipment meet the requirements of ANSI N14.6-1978 with  
 
the following exceptions:  
 
a.Inspections shall be performed at least once per  
 
operating cycle rather than annually.  
 
b.Critical welds may be non-destructively examined in lieu  
 
of the routine 150% load test  
 
c.Dry fuel storage cask trunnions are waved from the  
 
periodic load test or examination requirements.
d.The drywell strongback has two steel features that were  
 
added during modifications that did not receive the  
 
required materials testing (Charpy impact or drop weight  
 
testing). (Ref. ECR 13-00378).  
: e. The RPV head carousel hook and load pins did not receive the required materials testing (Charpy impact or drop  
 
weight testing) (Ref. ECR 13-00378).  
 
The stress design factor stated in section 3.2.1.1 of ANSI N14.6-
 
1978 is based on the combined maximum static and dynamic loads  
 
that could be imparted on the handling device based on the  
 
characteristics of the crane which will be used. Devices used for
 
CHAPTER 10 10.4-12 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 handling the spent fuel cask/lid are designed to ANSI N14.6 - 1986 which is equivalent to or exceeds the 1978 version.
: 5. Lifting Devices (not specifically designed)
 
Procedures are in place which require that all lifting devices not
 
specifically designed (i.e., slings) that are used to lift heavy
 
loads over or in proximity to the reactor vessel, spent fuel pool
 
or safe shutdown equipment meet the requirements of ANSI B30.9-
 
1971, 'Slings' or Twin-Path Extra TPXC Synthetic Round Slings
 
constructed with K-Spec fiber meeting the requirements of ASME
 
B30.9-2010, used in combination with engineered softeners and
 
abrasion protection devices as required by station procedures. 
 
Additionally, a dynamic load factor of 25% of the dead load will
 
be used in selecting the sling.
: 6. Cranes (Inspection, testing and maintenance)
 
Procedures are in place which ensure that crane inspection, testing and maintenance is performed in accordance with ANSI B30.2
 
(1967 version), 'Overhead and Gantry Cranes'. Additionally, if
 
repairs of load sustaining members are made by welding, identification of materials shall be made and appropriate welding
 
procedures will be followed.
: 7. Crane Design
 
The Reactor Bldg, Turbine Bldg, Pump Structure, and EDG Cranes
 
meet the intent of the requirements of Chapter 2-1 of ANSI B30.2-
 
1976, 'Overhead and Gantry Cranes' and of CMAA-70, 'Specifications
 
for Electric Overhead Traveling Cranes'. Turbine Building Cranes
 
are upgraded to meet single failure proof requirements of NUREG-
 
0554 for the increased main and auxiliary hoist capacities of 115
 
Ton and 30 Ton respectively. Structural analyses are performed
 
using commercially available, NRC-approved computer programs. 


PBAPS UFSAR handling the spent fuel cask/lid are designed to ANSI N14.6 - 1986 which is equivalent to or exceeds the 1978 version.
: 5. Lifting Devices (not specifically designed)
Procedures are in place which require that all lifting devices not specifically designed (i.e., slings) that are used to lift heavy loads over or in proximity to the reactor vessel, spent fuel pool or safe shutdown equipment meet the requirements of ANSI B30.9-1971, Slings or Twin-Path Extra TPXC Synthetic Round Slings constructed with K-Spec fiber meeting the requirements of ASME B30.9-2010, used in combination with engineered softeners and abrasion protection devices as required by station procedures.
Additionally, a dynamic load factor of 25% of the dead load will be used in selecting the sling.
: 6. Cranes (Inspection, testing and maintenance)
Procedures are in place which ensure that crane inspection, testing and maintenance is performed in accordance with ANSI B30.2 (1967 version), Overhead and Gantry Cranes. Additionally, if repairs of load sustaining members are made by welding, identification of materials shall be made and appropriate welding procedures will be followed.
: 7. Crane Design The Reactor Bldg, Turbine Bldg, Pump Structure, and EDG Cranes meet the intent of the requirements of Chapter 2-1 of ANSI B30.2-1976, Overhead and Gantry Cranes and of CMAA-70, Specifications for Electric Overhead Traveling Cranes. Turbine Building Cranes are upgraded to meet single failure proof requirements of NUREG-0554 for the increased main and auxiliary hoist capacities of 115 Ton and 30 Ton respectively. Structural analyses are performed using commercially available, NRC-approved computer programs.
Concrete anchor bolts are analyzed per American Concrete Institute (ACI) Code 349-01, approved by the NRC for this purpose.
Concrete anchor bolts are analyzed per American Concrete Institute (ACI) Code 349-01, approved by the NRC for this purpose.
10.4.11.2 NUREG-0612 Phase II Requirements  
10.4.11.2 NUREG-0612 Phase II Requirements Heavy load lifts made by permanent station cranes and hoists, as well as by mobile cranes and temporary rigging, are performed in a manner to minimize the threat to irradiated fuel, the reactor vessel or safe shutdown equipment. This necessitates that the following three criteria of NUREG-0612, Phase II are met, except for alternatives which may be approved on a case-by-case basis in accordance with station procedures:
 
: 1. The lift is performed as single failure-proof equivalent (either using redundant rigging or increased safety factors) or, CHAPTER 10                  10.4-12            REV. 26, APRIL 2017
Heavy load lifts made by permanent station cranes and hoists, as  
 
well as by mobile cranes and temporary rigging, are performed in a  


manner to minimize the threat to irradiated fuel, the reactor  
PBAPS UFSAR
: 2. The lifting system has electrical interlocks or mechanical stops such that loads could not be handled over or in proximity to fuel, the reactor vessel, or safe shutdown equipment or,
: 3. An evaluation is performed that ensures that a load drop could not cause damage to fuel, the reactor vessel, or loss of a safe shutdown function.
10.4.11.3 Safety Evaluation Heavy load lifts are performed using a defense-in-depth program such that no credible load drop will endanger the public safety and health. The procedural controls that implement NUREG-0612 Phase I make the risk of a load drop very unlikely. In addition, single-failure-proof lifts are employed to further reduce the risk of load drop to an acceptably low level. Where single-failure-proof lifts are not used, the consequences of a postulated load drop are evaluated, and must be demonstrated to be acceptable.
Resulting restrictions on load height, weight, lift configuration, and/or equipment required to be operable are procedurally controlled.
CHAPTER 10                  10.4-13            REV. 26, APRIL 2017


vessel or safe shutdown equipment. This necessitates that the  
PBAPS UFSAR 10.5  FUEL POOL COOLING AND CLEANUP SYSTEM 10.5.1  Power Generation Objective The power generation objectives of the fuel pool cooling and cleanup system are to provide fuel pool water temperature control and to maintain fuel pool water clarity, purity, and level.
10.5.2  Power Generation Design Basis
: 1. The fuel pool cooling and cleanup system minimizes corrosion product buildup and controls water clarity through filtration and demineralization.
: 2. The fuel pool cooling and cleanup system minimizes fission product concentrations which could be released from the pool water to the reactor building environment.
: 3. The fuel pool cooling and cleanup system monitors fuel pool water level and maintains a water level above the fuel sufficient to provide shielding for normal building occupancy.
: 4. The fuel pool cooling and cleanup system limits the fuel pool water temperature during normal and refueling operations.
10.5.3  Description The fuel pool cooling and cleanup system cools the fuel storage pool by transferring decay heat through heat exchangers to the service water system (Drawing M-363, Sheets 1 and 2). Water purity and clarity in the storage pool, reactor well, and dryer-separator storage pit are maintained by filtering and demineralizing the pool water (Drawing M-364, Sheets 1 and 2).
See paragraph 10.3.4.2 for the description of the spent fuel pool.
Connections also exist to use the "B" filter-demineralizer to process liquid radwaste, as shown on Drawing M-363, Sheet 1.
The system consists of three fuel pool cooling pumps, three heat exchangers, filter-demineralizer(s), two skimmer surge tanks, and associated piping, valves, and instrumentation. The three fuel pool pumps are connected in parallel, as are the three heat exchangers. The pumps and heat exchangers are located in the reactor building below the bottom of the fuel pool.
The filter-demineralizers, which collect radioactive corrosion products, are located in the radwaste building and are typically arranged so that one filter-demineralizer is aligned to each reactor unit and the third is a spare. Up to three filter-CHAPTER 10                  10.5-1            REV. 26, APRIL 2017


following three criteria of NUREG-0612, Phase II are met, except
PBAPS UFSAR demineralizers may be aligned to one unit to support water clarity and water chemistry improvements, as required.
The pumps circulate the pool water in a closed loop, taking suction from the skimmer surge tanks through the heat exchangers, circulating the water through the filter demineralizer, and directing the processed spent fuel cooling water through the system discharge lines located in the fuel pool and reactor well.
This return flow of spent fuel cooling water is discharged downward from the discharge lines into the pool at an elevation that is above the top of the storage racks. The cooled water traverses the pool picking up heat and debris before starting a new cycle by discharging over the skimmer weirs and scuppers into the skimmer surge tanks. Makeup water for the system can be transferred from the condensate storage tank to the skimmer surge tanks. System and equipment parameters are listed in Table 10.5.1.
An evaluation of the fuel pool cooling system was performed for normal refueling of approximately 40% (320 bundles) of the core every 24 months and a full core offload just before normal refueling assuming all storage cells in the spent fuel pool are filled. The evaluations assume that the offloaded fuel has operated in the reactor at 3951 MW. For the normal refueling offload of 40% of the core, the evaluation assumes a normal complement of three fuel pool cooling trains (three fuel pool cooling pumps and three fuel pool cooling heat exchangers) in service as well as a single failure where only two fuel pool cooling trains (two fuel pool cooling pumps and two fuel pool cooling heat exchangers are in service). For the full core offload case, no fuel pool cooling trains are assumed available and fuel pool cooling is performed by the RHR system. The evaluation also considered the time for the fuel pool to boil if there is a loss of fuel pool cooling. See Table 10.5.2 for a summary of the results of these cooling system evaluations.
When flooded up, the Fuel Pool Cooling system and the RHR fuel pool assist mode can be used to remove decay heat from both the spent fuel pool and the reactor vessel by cooling the spent fuel pool. A cross-connection between the drain line from the skimmer surge tank and the RHR system allows the RHR system to take a suction from the fuel pool. This is called Fuel Pool Assist mode, when water is returned to the fuel pool and called Alternate Decay Heat Removal (ADHR) mode when water is returned to the reactor vessel through the normal shutdown cooling return line. In addition, a Split Flow mode is available when the RHR discharge flow is split between the fuel pool and the reactor vessel.
During ISFSI operation, it may be necessary to return a loaded dry storage cask to one of the Spent Fuel pools for unloading. The CHAPTER 10                  10.5-2              REV. 26, APRIL 2017


for alternatives which may be approved on a case-by-case basis in  
PBAPS UFSAR heat introduced to the pool by the latent heat of the cask materials and the decay heat of the 68 contained assemblies is less that the full core offload heat that the Fuel Pool Cooling and Cleanup System has been analyzed for.
Since each refueling offload is cycle specific, then the variations in the number of fuel assemblies discharged, the in-core decay time, the fuel assembly transfer rate and the power history can vary as long as analysis shows that the spent fuel pool bulk temperature will not exceed 150F and localized boiling will not be expected to occur.
The system flow rate is larger than that required for two complete water changes per day of the fuel pool, or one change per day of the fuel pool, reactor well, and dryer-separator pit. The maximum system flow rate is twice the flow rate needed to maintain water quality.
For refueling operations, water to fill the reactor well and dryer-separator storage pit is stored in the refueling water tank.
Water is transferred to the refueling area by two refueling water pumps and/or via the CST and core spray system. During drainage, water can be pumped through one of the condensate filter-demineralizer units before being returned to the storage tank.
When placing a dry fuel storage cask into the fuel pool, the water level of the pool is managed by controlling the skimmer surge tank level and the fuel pool level as needed. Procedures ensure that a new cask is inspected and cleaned as necessary prior to placement in the pool.
Fuel pool water is continuously recirculated. The circulation patterns within the reactor well and fuel pool are established by the placement of the diffusers in the reactor well and the placement of skimmers and discharge lines in the fuel pool so as to sweep particles dislodged during refueling operations away from the work area and out of the pools.
Pool water clarity and purity are maintained by a combination of filtration and ion exchange. The filter-demineralizer units are located separately in shielded cells. The filter-demineralizer maintains the Fuel Pool water quality to within the limits specified in EPRI BWR Water Chemistry Guidelines for compatibility with materials and equipment in the fuel pool that require corrosion protection. Particulate matter is removed by the filter-demineralizer unit in which finely divided, powdered ion-exchange resin and fiber material serves as the filtering medium.
Alternately, a combination of powdered resin and cellulose may be used as the disposable filter medium. The filter elements are a CHAPTER 10                  10.5-3              REV. 26, APRIL 2017


accordance with station procedures:
PBAPS UFSAR stainless steel mesh element mounted vertically in a tube sheet and replaceable as a unit. The filter vessel is constructed of carbon steel and coated with a phenolic material. The resin is replaced when the pressure drop across the filter is excessive or when instrumentation indicates the ion exchange capacity is low.
Alarms, differential pressure indicators, and flow indicators monitor the condition of the filter-demineralizers. Backwashing and precoating operations are controlled from a local panel in the radwaste building. The spent filter medium is removed from the elements by backwashing with air and condensate, then flushed to the waste sludge tank.
There are no connections to the fuel storage pool which could allow the fuel pool to be drained below the pool gate between the reactor well and the fuel pool when the pool gate is in place or below 10 feet above the top of active fuel. Fuel pool cooling and RHR discharge lines that extend below this level are equipped with syphon breaker holes to prevent inadvertent pool drainage. A level indicator, mounted at the valve rack, monitors reactor well water level during refueling. Any significant leakage through the refueling bellows assembly, drywell to reactor seal, or the fuel pool gates is annunciated on the operating floor instrument racks and in the main control room.
Instrumentation is provided for both automatic and manual operation. The surge tanks have high and low level alarms and pump trip switches. The pumps are controlled locally at the pump or from a control panel near the filter-demineralizers. Pump low suction pressure automatically turns off the pumps. A pump low discharge pressure causes alarm annunciation in the main control room and in the pump room. Also see paragraph 10.3.4.3 for spent fuel pool instrumentation.
10.5.4  Inspection and Testing No special equipment tests are required because at least one pump, heat exchanger, and filter-demineralizer are normally in operation while fuel is stored in the pool.
Routine visual inspection of the system components, instrumentation, and trouble alarms is adequate to verify system operability. Pool level indicators and associated alarms are tested by simulating low water level to the sensors.
CHAPTER 10                  10.5-4            REV. 26, APRIL 2017


1.The lift is performed as single failure-proof equivalent (either using redundant rigging or increased safety factors)
PBAPS UFSAR TABLE 10.5.1 FUEL POOL COOLING AND CLEANUP SYSTEM Design Core Thermal Power                          4,030  MWt Total Pool, Well, and Pit Volume                  111,400  cu ft Fuel Storage Pool Volume                          53,350  cu ft System Design Flow                                    555  gpm Maximum Flow                                        1,665  gpm Fuel Pool Cooling Water Pumps Quantity                                                3 Type Horizontal, centrifugal Design Flow/TDH (each)                                580 gpm/250 ft Motor hp                                              60 hp Fuel Pool Cooling Heat Exchangers Quantity                                                3 Heat Exchanger Capability One exchanger in service                = 3.75 x 106 Btu/hr Two exchangers in service                = 7.50 x 106 Btu/hr Three exchangers in service              =11.25 x 106 Btu/hr Material Tube/Shell                              304 SS/carbon steel Design Code                                      ASME B&PV, Sec. VIII CHAPTER 10                  10.5-5              REV. 25, APRIL 2015


or,
PBAPS UFSAR TABLE 10.5.1 (Continued)
Fuel Pool Filter-Demineralizers Type                                                Pressure precoat Quantity                                            1 per unit, 1 common spare Design Filter Area                                  270 sq ft Filter Capacity                            550 gpm/unit Pressure Drop                              25 psi (dirty)
Design Code                                        ASME & B&PV, Sec.
VIII Holding Pump Flow                                  27 gpm Precoat Flow                                        450 gpm Flow Control Valve Pressure Drop                    100 psi (max) 10 psi (min)
CHAPTER 10                    10.5-6              REV. 25, APRIL 2015


CHAPTER 10 10.4-13 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 2.The lifting system has electrical interlocks or mechanical stops such that loads could not be handled over or in
PBAPS UFSAR TABLE 10.5.2
 
proximity to fuel, the reactor vessel, or safe shutdown
 
equipment or,  3.An evaluation is performed that ensures that a load drop
 
could not cause damage to fuel, the reactor vessel, or loss
 
of a safe shutdown function.
 
10.4.11.3 Safety Evaluation
 
Heavy load lifts are performed using a defense-in-depth program
 
such that no credible load drop will endanger the public safety
 
and health. The procedural controls that implement NUREG-0612
 
Phase I make the risk of a load drop very unlikely. In addition, single-failure-proof lifts are employed to further reduce the risk
 
of load drop to an acceptably low level. Where single-failure-
 
proof lifts are not used, the consequences of a postulated load
 
drop are evaluated, and must be demonstrated to be acceptable.
 
Resulting restrictions on load height, weight, lift configuration, and/or equipment required to be operable are procedurally
 
controlled. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.5-1 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 10.5  FUEL POOL COOLING AND CLEANUP SYSTEM 10.5.1  Power Generation Objective The power generation objectives of the fuel pool cooling and cleanup system are to provide fuel pool water temperature control
 
and to maintain fuel pool water clarity, purity, and level.
10.5.2  Power Generation Design Basis
: 1. The fuel pool cooling and cleanup system minimizes corrosion product buildup and controls water clarity
 
through filtration and demineralization.
: 2. The fuel pool cooling and cleanup system minimizes fission product concentrations which could be released
 
from the pool water to the reactor building environment.
: 3. The fuel pool cooling and cleanup system monitors fuel pool water level and maintains a water level above the
 
fuel sufficient to provide shielding for normal building
 
occupancy.
: 4. The fuel pool cooling and cleanup system limits the fuel pool water temperature during normal and refueling
 
operations.
10.5.3  Description The fuel pool cooling and cleanup system cools the fuel storage
 
pool by transferring decay heat through heat exchangers to the
 
service water system (Drawing M-363, Sheets 1 and 2). Water
 
purity and clarity in the storage pool, reactor well, and dryer-
 
separator storage pit are maintained by filtering and
 
demineralizing the pool water (Drawing M-364, Sheets 1 and 2). 
 
See paragraph 10.3.4.2 for the description of the spent fuel pool.
 
Connections also exist to use the "B" filter-demineralizer to
 
process liquid radwaste, as shown on Drawing M-363, Sheet 1.
The system consists of three fuel pool cooling pumps, three heat
 
exchangers, filter-demineralizer(s), two skimmer surge tanks, and
 
associated piping, valves, and instrumentation. The three fuel
 
pool pumps are connected in parallel, as are the three heat
 
exchangers. The pumps and heat exchangers are located in the
 
reactor building below the bottom of the fuel pool.
The filter-demineralizers, which collect radioactive corrosion
 
products, are located in the radwaste building and are typically
 
arranged so that one filter-demineralizer is aligned to each
 
reactor unit and the third is a spare. Up to three filter-
 
CHAPTER 10 10.5-2 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 demineralizers may be aligned to one unit to support water clarity and water chemistry improvements, as required.
 
The pumps circulate the pool water in a closed loop, taking
 
suction from the skimmer surge tanks through the heat exchangers, circulating the water through the filter demineralizer, and
 
directing the processed spent fuel cooling water through the
 
system discharge lines located in the fuel pool and reactor well.
 
This return flow of spent fuel cooling water is discharged
 
downward from the discharge lines into the pool at an elevation
 
that is above the top of the storage racks. The cooled water
 
traverses the pool picking up heat and debris before starting a
 
new cycle by discharging over the skimmer weirs and scuppers into
 
the skimmer surge tanks. Makeup water for the system can be
 
transferred from the condensate storage tank to the skimmer surge
 
tanks. System and equipment parameters are listed in Table
 
10.5.1.
 
An evaluation of the fuel pool cooling system was performed for normal refueling of approximately 40% (320 bundles) of the core
 
every 24 months and a full core offload just before normal
 
refueling assuming all storage cells in the spent fuel pool are
 
filled. The evaluations assume that the offloaded fuel has
 
operated in the reactor at 3951 MW. For the normal refueling
 
offload of 40% of the core, the evaluation assumes a normal
 
complement of three fuel pool cooling trains (three fuel pool
 
cooling pumps and three fuel pool cooling heat exchangers) in
 
service as well as a single failure where only two fuel pool
 
cooling trains (two fuel pool cooling pumps and two fuel pool
 
cooling heat exchangers are in service). For the full core
 
offload case, no fuel pool cooling trains are assumed available
 
and fuel pool cooling is performed by the RHR system. The
 
evaluation also considered the time for the fuel pool to boil if
 
there is a loss of fuel pool cooling. See Table 10.5.2 for a
 
summary of the results of these cooling system evaluations. 
 
When flooded up, the Fuel Pool Cooling system and the RHR fuel
 
pool assist mode can be used to remove decay heat from both the
 
spent fuel pool and the reactor vessel by cooling the spent fuel
 
pool. A cross-connection between the drain line from the skimmer
 
surge tank and the RHR system allows the RHR system to take a
 
suction from the fuel pool. This is called Fuel Pool Assist mode, when water is returned to the fuel pool and called Alternate Decay
 
Heat Removal (ADHR) mode when water is returned to the reactor
 
vessel through the normal shutdown cooling return line. In
 
addition, a Split Flow mode is available when the RHR discharge
 
flow is split between the fuel pool and the reactor vessel.   
 
During ISFSI operation, it may be necessary to return a loaded dry
 
storage cask to one of the Spent Fuel pools for unloading. The 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.5-3 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 heat introduced to the pool by the latent heat of the cask materials and the decay heat of the 68 contained assemblies is
 
less that the full core offload heat that the Fuel Pool Cooling
 
and Cleanup System has been analyzed for.
 
Since each refueling offload is cycle specific, then the
 
variations in the number of fuel assemblies discharged, the in-
 
core decay time, the fuel assembly transfer rate and the power
 
history can vary as long as analysis shows that the spent fuel pool bulk temperature will not exceed 150 F and localized boiling will not be expected to occur.
 
The system flow rate is larger than that required for two complete
 
water changes per day of the fuel pool, or one change per day of
 
the fuel pool, reactor well, and dryer-separator pit. The maximum
 
system flow rate is twice the flow rate needed to maintain water
 
quality.
 
For refueling operations, water to fill the reactor well and
 
dryer-separator storage pit is stored in the refueling water tank.
 
Water is transferred to the refueling area by two refueling water
 
pumps and/or via the CST and core spray system. During drainage, water can be pumped through one of the condensate filter-
 
demineralizer units before being returned to the storage tank.
 
When placing a dry fuel storage cask into the fuel pool, the water
 
level of the pool is managed by controlling the skimmer surge tank
 
level and the fuel pool level as needed. Procedures ensure that a
 
new cask is inspected and cleaned as necessary prior to placement
 
in the pool.
 
Fuel pool water is continuously recirculated. The circulation
 
patterns within the reactor well and fuel pool are established by
 
the placement of the diffusers in the reactor well and the
 
placement of skimmers and discharge lines in the fuel pool so as
 
to sweep particles dislodged during refueling operations away from
 
the work area and out of the pools.
 
Pool water clarity and purity are maintained by a combination of
 
filtration and ion exchange. The filter-demineralizer units are
 
located separately in shielded cells. The filter-demineralizer
 
maintains the Fuel Pool water quality to within the limits
 
specified in EPRI BWR Water Chemistry Guidelines for compatibility
 
with materials and equipment in the fuel pool that require
 
corrosion protection. Particulate matter is removed by the
 
filter-demineralizer unit in which finely divided, powdered ion-
 
exchange resin and fiber material serves as the filtering medium.
 
Alternately, a combination of powdered resin and cellulose may be
 
used as the disposable filter medium. The filter elements are a 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.5-4 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 stainless steel mesh element mounted vertically in a tube sheet and replaceable as a unit. The filter vessel is constructed of
 
carbon steel and coated with a phenolic material. The resin is
 
replaced when the pressure drop across the filter is excessive or
 
when instrumentation indicates the ion exchange capacity is low.
 
Alarms, differential pressure indicators, and flow indicators
 
monitor the condition of the filter-demineralizers. Backwashing
 
and precoating operations are controlled from a local panel in the
 
radwaste building. The spent filter medium is removed from the
 
elements by backwashing with air and condensate, then flushed to
 
the waste sludge tank.
 
There are no connections to the fuel storage pool which could
 
allow the fuel pool to be drained below the pool gate between the
 
reactor well and the fuel pool when the pool gate is in place or
 
below 10 feet above the top of active fuel. Fuel pool cooling and
 
RHR discharge lines that extend below this level are equipped with
 
syphon breaker holes to prevent inadvertent pool drainage. A level
 
indicator, mounted at the valve rack, monitors reactor well water
 
level during refueling. Any significant leakage through the
 
refueling bellows assembly, drywell to reactor seal, or the fuel
 
pool gates is annunciated on the operating floor instrument racks
 
and in the main control room.
 
Instrumentation is provided for both automatic and manual
 
operation. The surge tanks have high and low level alarms and
 
pump trip switches. The pumps are controlled locally at the pump
 
or from a control panel near the filter-demineralizers. Pump low
 
suction pressure automatically turns off the pumps. A pump low
 
discharge pressure causes alarm annunciation in the main control
 
room and in the pump room. Also see paragraph 10.3.4.3 for spent
 
fuel pool instrumentation.
 
10.5.4  Inspection and Testing
 
No special equipment tests are required because at least one pump, heat  exchanger, and filter-demineralizer are normally in
 
operation while fuel  is stored in the pool.
 
Routine visual inspection of the system components, instrumentation, and trouble alarms is adequate to verify system
 
operability. Pool level indicators and associated alarms are
 
tested by simulating low water level to the sensors. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.5-5 REV. 25, APRIL 2015 TABLE 10.5.1  FUEL POOL COOLING AND CLEANUP SYSTEM
 
Design Core Thermal Power 4,030 MWt Total Pool, Well, and Pit Volume 111,400 cu ft Fuel Storage Pool Volume 53,350 cu ft System Design Flow 555 gpm Maximum Flow 1,665 gpm
 
Fuel Pool Cooling Water Pumps Quantity 3 Type                                         
 
Horizontal, centrifugal
 
Design Flow/TDH (each) 580 gpm/250 ft Motor hp 60 hp
 
Fuel Pool Cooling Heat Exchangers Quantity 3 Heat Exchanger Capability
 
One exchanger in service
= 3.75 x 10 6 Btu/hr  Two exchangers in service
= 7.50 x 10 6 Btu/hr  Three exchangers in service
=11.25 x 10 6 Btu/hr Material Tube/Shell 304 SS/carbon steel Design Code ASME B&PV, Sec. VIII 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.5-6 REV. 25, APRIL 2015 TABLE 10.5.1 (Continued)
 
Fuel Pool Filter-Demineralizers
 
Type  Pressure precoat
 
Quantity 1 per unit, 1 common spare Design Filter Area 270 sq ft
 
Filter Capacity 550 gpm/unit
 
Pressure Drop 25 psi (dirty)
 
Design Code ASME & B&PV, Sec.
VIII
 
Holding Pump Flow 27 gpm Precoat Flow 450 gpm Flow Control Valve Pressure Drop 100 psi (max)
 
10 psi (min) 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.5-7 REV. 25, APRIL 2015 TABLE 10.5.2  


==SUMMARY==
==SUMMARY==
OF COOLING SYSTEM ANALYSIS RESULTS  
OF COOLING SYSTEM ANALYSIS RESULTS
: 1) Heat Exchanger Capability  
: 1)   Heat Exchanger Capability One exchanger in service        =      3.75 x 106 Btu/hr Two exchangers in service      =      7.50 x 106 Btu/hr Three exchangers in service    =    11.25 x 106 Btu/hr
: 2)    Maximum Pool Heat Load to insure exit temperature is below 150F One exchanger in service        =      8.66 x 106 Btu/hr Two exchangers in service      =    17.33 x 106 Btu/hr Three exchangers in service    =    26.0 x 106 Btu/hr
: 3) Normal Refueling a)    Full Cooling Capability Equipment in service:
3 FPCCS Pumps (1665 gpm total SFP flow) 3 FPCCS Heat Exchangers (2400 gpm total service water flow, 90oF service water temperature)
Start of Offload (hours after shutdown):            80 Max. SFP Temperature:                                140oF Time to Boil from Max. Temperature:                  11.4 hrs Makeup Flow Required at Boiling:                    49 gpm Max Heat Load (MBTU/hr):                            23.9 b)      Single Failure Equipment in service:
2 FPCCS Pumps (1110 gpm total SFP flow) 2 FPCCS Heat Exchangers (1600 gpm total service water flow, 90oF service water temperature)
Start of Offload (hours after shutdown):            200 Max. SFP Temperature:                                150oF Time to Boil from Max. Temperature:                  12.3 hrs Makeup Flow Required at Boiling:                    40 gpm Max Heat Load (MBTU/hr):                            19.5 TABLE 10.5.2 (continued)
CHAPTER 10                  10.5-7              REV. 25, APRIL 2015


One exchanger in service  =  3.75 x 10 6 Btu/hr  Two exchangers in service  =  7.50 x 10 6 Btu/hr  Three exchangers in service = 11.25 x 10 6 Btu/hr 
PBAPS UFSAR
: 2) Maximum Pool Heat Load to insure exit temperature is below 150 F  One exchanger in service  =  8.66 x 10 6 Btu/hr  Two exchangers in service  = 17.33 x 10 6 Btu/hr  Three exchangers in service = 26.0  x 10 6 Btu/hr 
: 3) Normal Refueling a)Full Cooling Capability Equipment in service:
3 FPCCS Pumps (1665 gpm total SFP flow) 3 FPCCS Heat Exchangers (2400 gpm total service water flow, 90 o F service water temperature) Start of Offload (hours after shutdown):  80 Max. SFP Temperature:      140 o F Time to Boil from Max. Temperature:    11.4 hrs Makeup Flow Required at Boiling:    49 gpm Max Heat Load (MBTU/hr):      23.9 b)Single Failure Equipment in service:
2 FPCCS Pumps (1110 gpm total SFP flow) 2 FPCCS Heat Exchangers (1600 gpm total service water flow, 90 o F service water temperature) Start of Offload (hours after shutdown):  200 Max. SFP Temperature:      150 o F Time to Boil from Max. Temperature:    12.3 hrs Makeup Flow Required at Boiling:    40 gpm Max Heat Load (MBTU/hr):      19.5 TABLE 10.5.2 (continued) 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.5-8 REV. 25, APRIL 2015
: 4) Full-Core Offload, Full Cooling Capability Equipment in service:
: 4) Full-Core Offload, Full Cooling Capability Equipment in service:
1 RHR Pump (5000 gpm total SFP flow) 1 RHR Heat Exchanger (4500 gpm total HPSW flow, 92 o F HPSW water temperature) Start of Offload (hours after shutdown): 150 Max. SFP Temperature:       140 o F Time to Boil from Max. Temperature:   6.0 hrs Makeup Flow Required at Boiling:     88 gpm Max Heat Load (MBTU/hr):     41.3  
1 RHR Pump (5000 gpm total SFP flow) 1 RHR Heat Exchanger (4500 gpm total HPSW flow, 92oF HPSW water temperature)
 
Start of Offload (hours after shutdown):         150 Max. SFP Temperature:                             140oF Time to Boil from Max. Temperature:               6.0 hrs Makeup Flow Required at Boiling:                 88 gpm Max Heat Load (MBTU/hr):                         41.3 CHAPTER 10                   10.5-8             REV. 25, APRIL 2015
CHAPTER 10 10.6-1 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 10.6  SERVICE WATER SYSTEM 10.6.1  Power Generation Objective
 
The power generation objective of the service water system is to
 
supply water required for plant services.
 
10.6.2  Power Generation Design Basis
: 1. The service water system continuously supplies screened and chlorinated cooling water to the plant during normal
 
plant operation and shutdown periods.
: 2. System interconnections are provided to enable the emergency service water system to serve the reactor
 
building cooling water heat exchangers in the event of a
 
loss of off-site power. This design feature exists
 
although the heat sink, emergency service water (ESW),
for the reactor building closed cooling water (RBCCW)
 
system has been eliminated as a result of locking closed
 
the ESW-RBCCW cross-tie valves. Therefore, little, if
 
any, cooling would be provided to the service water
 
system loads during a loss of off-site power.
: 3. The service water system supplies cooling water to the core standby cooling equipment and space coolers during
 
normal plant operation and shutdown period only.
: 4. The system inhibits the release of radioactive material into the river.
 
10.6.3  Description
 
The service water system consists of three one-half capacity
 
service water pumps in the pump structure, three horizontal fuel
 
pool service water booster pumps in the reactor building, and
 
associated piping, valves, and instrumentation (Drawing M-314, Sheets 1 through 9).
 
The three service water pumps are vertical, turbine-type pumps, connected in parallel, taking suction from the pump structure, and
 
each delivering 14,000 gpm at a pump head of 155 ft. The pump
 
bearings are supplied from lube water pumps. Nominal system
 
pressure is 65 psig. The three fuel pool service water booster
 
pumps deliver service water to the fuel pool cooling heat
 
exchangers. These horizontal, centrifugal pumps are rated at 900
 
gpm at a pump head of 135 ft.
 
The safeguards equipment coolers and space air cooler are
 
automatically served by the emergency service water system. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.6-2 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 To inhibit leakage of radioactivity from potentially contaminated
 
systems (mechanical vacuum pump and fuel pool heat exchangers),
service water pressure is maintained higher than process fluid
 
pressure. A radiation monitor on the service water effluent
 
header from the reactor building cooling water heat exchangers
 
detects leakage of radioactive material from these exchangers. The
 
monitor indicates, records, and alarms in the main control room.
 
10.6.4  Inspection and Testing
 
The service water system components are proven operable by their
 
use during normal plant operations. Portions of the system
 
normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure their operability
 
and the integrity of the system. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.6-3 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 TABLE 10.6.1  SERVICE WATER SYSTEM DATA
 
Service Water Pumps
 
Quantity 3
 
Type Vertical, Turbine Type,  Wet-Pit
 
Flow/Pump Head 14,000 gpm/155 ft
 
Bhp Rating 655 hp Speed 900 rpm 
 
Motor Type Vertical, Induction Type
 
Voltage/Phase/Frequency 2,300 V/3 phase/60 Hz
 
Rated Horsepower 700 hp 
 
Fuel Pool Service Water Booster Pumps
 
Quantity 3
 
Type Horizontal Centrifugal
 
Flow/Pump Head 900 gpm/135 ft
 
Bhp Rating 39 hp Speed 3,600 rpm 
 
Motor Type Horizontal
 
Voltage/Phase/Frequency 460 V/3 phase/60 Hz
 
Rated Horsepower 40 hp 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.7-1 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 10.7  HIGH PRESSURE SERVICE WATER SYSTEM 10.7.1  Safety Objective
 
The safety objective of the high pressure service water system is
 
to provide a reliable supply of cooling water for RHR under post-
 
accident conditions.
 
10.7.2  Safety Design Basis
: 1. The high pressure service water system is designed to seismic Class I criteria to withstand the maximum
 
credible earthquake without impairing system function.
: 2. The high pressure service water system is operable during flood conditions.
: 3. The high pressure service water system is designed with capacity and redundancy to supply cooling water to the
 
RHRS under post-accident conditions.
: 4. The high pressure service water system is operable during the loss of offsite power.
 
10.7.3  Power Generation Objective
 
The power generation objective of the high pressure service water
 
system is to supply cooling water to the RHRS for shutdown cooling
 
and for torus cooling.
 
10.7.4  Power Generation Design Basis
: 1. The high pressure service water system supplies a
 
reliable source of cooling water to the RHRS.
: 2. The high pressure service water system is designed for
 
remote-manual initiation.
: 3. The high pressure service water system inhibits leakage
 
of radioactive material from the RHRS to the environment.
: 4. The high pressure service water system provides an
 
additional source of water for post-accident containment flooding
 
by a cross tie between the high pressure service water system and
 
the RHRS.
 
10.7.5 Description Each high pressure service water system consists of four 4,500-gpm pumps installed in parallel in the pump structure (Drawing 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.7-2 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 M-315, Sheets 1 through 4). Normal water supply to the suction of the pumps is from Conowingo Pond. When the high pressure service
 
water system is operated in conjunction with the emergency heat
 
sink (subsection 10.24, "Emergency Heat Sink"), the suction is
 
from the HPSW pump bay which is fed from emergency cooling tower
 
basin. The pump discharge is manifolded and provided with a
 
normally closed, motor-operated valve separating the four pumps
 
into groups of two. Two parallel headers run from the pump
 
structure to the reactor building. Each header delivers the
 
discharge from two pumps to two RHR heat exchangers also in
 
parallel. Under normal conditions, when the respective loop of
 
HPSW is in operation, the service water pressure on the discharge
 
side of the RHR heat exchanger is maintained positive with respect
 
to the RHRS side to inhibit leakage of radioactive material into
 
the environment. In the event of a design basis accident or
 
transient in which additional containment cooling capacity is required, a second HPSW pump can be aligned to a second RHR heat
 
exchanger by opening the cross-tie valve. 
 
Under abnormal operating conditions RHRS pressure could exceed
 
high pressure service water system pressure. An RHR heat
 
exchanger leak under these abnormal conditions would result in
 
radioactive RHR water migrating into the high pressure service
 
water system and into the river. To limit the release of
 
radioactive water to the river from this potential release path, signals from the radiation monitors in the sample system which
 
samples the high pressure service water system upstream and
 
downstream of the RHR heat exchangers initiate an alarm in the
 
control room at a predetermined radiation level.
 
Flanged connection points are available on the high pressure
 
service water system, downstream of the RHR heat exchangers, to
 
allow for a temporary flow path of the RHR heat exchanger cooling
 
water in the event that the normal flow path becomes unavailable.
 
This alternative flow path is intended to be routed through
 
secondary containment. Therefore, this flow path may only be used
 
when secondary containment is not required.
 
An intertie is provided between units 2 and 3 high pressure
 
service water system to provide flexibility. A cross tie to the
 
RHRS provides the capability for primary containment flooding.
 
The high pressure service water system pumps are vertical
 
multistage turbine type. The pump mounting base is of watertight
 
construction to withstand the hydrostatic pressure at the design
 
flood condition. The pump design data is given in Table 10.7.1.
 
The high pressure service water system piping and valves are
 
designed as described in Appendix A. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.7-3 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 10.7.6  Safety Evaluation
 
The high pressure service water system pumps are installed in a
 
seismic Class I structure. The system meets seismic Class I
 
criteria and is protected against the design flood level.
 
Each pump is sized to accommodate the design heat removal capacity
 
of one RHRS heat exchanger. They have adequate head (1) to
 
maintain the high pressure service water system cooling water at a
 
higher pressure than the RHRS, thus inhibiting the release of
 
radioactive material to the environment, and (2) to permit
 
operation in conjunction with the emergency heat sink. Further, the pumps have both a normal and a standby power supply. In the
 
event of the loss of offsite power, the pumps are supplied from
 
the diesel generators and manually started as required.
 
Sufficient redundancy is provided in the number of pumps and power
 
supplies, and in the piping arrangement, so that no single system
 
component failure can prevent the system from supplying cooling
 
water to accommodate the normal shutdown mode and the containment
 
cooling mode. Therefore, core decay heat removal during the
 
shutdown periods, or containment cooling during the post-accident
 
condition, can be maintained.
 
10.7.7  Inspection and Testing
 
Pumps in the high pressure service water system are proven
 
operable by their use or testing during normal station operations.
 
Motor operated isolation valves can be tested to assure they are
 
capable of opening and closing by operating manual switches in the
 
control room and observing the position lights. Portions of the
 
high pressure service water system normally closed to flow can be
 
tested to ensure their operability and the integrity of the
 
system. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.7-4 REV. 23, APRIL 2011 TABLE 10.7.1  HIGH PRESSURE SERVICE WATER SYSTEM
 
EQUIPMENT DATA 
 
High Pressure Service Water Pumps
 
Quantity 4 Per Unit
 
Type Vertical, Turbine Type
 
Flow/Head Design Point 4,500 gpm at 700 ft
 
Bhp at Rating
< 975 hp Speed 1,770 rpm Number of Stages 6
Pump Design:
 
Shut-Off Head
> 368 and < 445 psig
 
Material:
 
Bowl/Impeller Cast Carbon Steel or Moly Iron/Bronze or Cast Stainless Steel Discharged Head/Column Carbon Steel/Carbon Steel
 
Line Shaft Stainless Steel
 
Bearings Brass/Bronze/Rubber
 
Motor:
 
Type Vertical, Induction
 
Horsepower 1,000 hp Voltage/Phase/Frequency 4,160 V/3 Phase/60 Hz 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.8-1 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 10.8  REACTOR BUILDING COOLING WATER SYSTEM 10.8.1  Power Generation Objective
 
The power generative objective of the reactor building cooling
 
water system is to provide cooling water to auxiliary plant
 
equipment associated with the nuclear steam supply system (NSSS).
 
10.8.2  Power Generation Design Basis
: 1. The reactor building cooling water system is designed to cool auxiliary plant equipment over the full range of
 
reactor power operation.
: 2. The reactor building cooling water system is designed to inhibit the release of radioactive material to the
 
environment.
 
10.8.3  Description
 
The reactor building cooling water system consists of two full-
 
capacity pumps, two full-capacity heat exchangers, one head tank, one chemical feed tank, and associated piping, valves, and
 
controls (Drawing M-316). The cooling water pumps and heat
 
exchangers are located in the reactor building auxiliary bay. The
 
head tank is located on the reactor building refueling floor. The
 
system equipment data is given in Table 10.8.1.
 
The system is a closed loop utilizing inhibited demineralized
 
water. The heat exchangers are designed with service (river)
 
water on the tube side and demineralized water on the shell side.
 
The reactor building cooling water system is designed for an
 
operating pressure of 140 psig.
 
The head tank, located at the highest point in the loop, accommodates system volume changes, maintains static suction
 
pressure on the pump, aids in detecting gross leaks in the reactor
 
building cooling water system, and provides for adding makeup
 
water. An automatic makeup control valve maintains water level in
 
the tank. The automatic function is not required and may be
 
valved out to monitor system inventory. High and low water levels
 
are alarmed in the main control room. An inhibitor is added as
 
necessary to the demineralized water by means of a chemical
 
addition tank to limit corrosion.
 
The reactor building cooling water system supply and return
 
headers penetrating the primary containment are each provided with
 
a motor-operated isolation valve outside the containment. These
 
isolation valves are manually controlled remotely from the main
 
control room. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.8-2 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 Electrical power for operating the reactor building cooling water
 
system pumps during failure of offsite power is supplied from the
 
standby power supply.
 
In the event of offsite power failure, the reactor building
 
cooling water system supply to the reactor water cleanup system
 
non-regenerative heat exchanger and pumps, instrument nitrogen
 
compressor skids, and various sample station coolers is isolated, and the  water supply is maintained to the reactor recirculation
 
pump motor oil and mechanical seal water coolers and the reactor
 
building equipment drain sump cooler. In addition, water is
 
supplied to the drywell air cooling system and the drywell
 
equipment drain sump cooler, which are normally served by the
 
chilled water system, and to the CRD pump oil coolers and air
 
compressor jacket and after coolers, which are normally served by
 
the turbine building cooling water system.
 
The reactor building cooling water system can also supply water to
 
the fuel pool cooling heat exchangers, via removable spool pieces, in the event of loss of normal cooling water. The control and
 
instrumentation is designed for remote system startup from the
 
main control room.
 
These design features do exist although the heat sink, emergency
 
service water (ESW), for the reactor building closed cooling water (RBCCW) system has been eliminated as a result of locking closed
 
the ESW-RBCCW cross tie valves. These valves were locked closed because of the lack of required structural design of the piping, and due to the adverse hydraulic effects to safety related
 
components served by ESW. Therefore, the cooling effect of the
 
RBCCW system to any of the components described above will be
 
minimal.
 
A radiation monitor is provided at the cooling water return header
 
to indicate, record, and alarm leakage of radioactivity.
 
10.8.4  Inspection and Testing
 
Equipment in the reactor building cooling water system is proven
 
operable by use during normal plant operations. Motor operated
 
isolation valves can be tested to assure they are capable of
 
opening and closing by operating manual switches in the control
 
room and observing the position lights. Portions of the reactor
 
building cooling water system normally closed to flow can be
 
tested to ensure their operability and the integrity of the
 
system. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.8-3 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 TABLE 10.8.1  REACTOR BUILDING COOLING WATER SYSTEM
 
EQUIPMENT DATA 
 
Reactor Building Cooling
 
Water System Pumps 2 (full-capacity)
 
Type  Horizontal Centrifugal
 
Flow and Head 1,350 gpm at 140 ft
 
Bhp at Rating 65 hp Material:
 
Casing/Impeller/Shaft Cast Iron/Bronze/Stainless Steel Motor:  Size 75 hp Voltage/Phase/Frequency 440 V/3 Phase/60 Hz
 
Speed  3,600 rpm
 
Reactor Building Cooling
 
Water System Heat Exchangers
 
Quantity 2 (full-capacity)
 
Type  Horizontal, Shell and Tube
 
Heat Transfer Duty 25,500,000 Btu/hr
 
Shell Design:
 
Pressure/Temperature 150 psig/200 F  Material Carbon steel
 
Flow Medium Inhibited Demineralized Water Tube design:
 
Pressure/Temperature 125 psig/200 F  Material:
 
Tube Admiralty
 
Tube Sheet Carbon Steel
 
Tube Joint Rolled Flow Medium River Water
 
CHAPTER 10 10.9-1 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 10.9  EMERGENCY SERVICE WATER SYSTEM 10.9.1  Safety Objective
 
The safety objective of the emergency service water system is to
 
provide a reliable supply of cooling water to diesel generator
 
coolers, ECCS and RCIC compartment air coolers, Core Spray Pump
 
Motor Oil Coolers and other selected equipment during a loss of
 
offsite power or during a loss of normal station service water due
 
to the design flood condition or the loss of the Conowingo pond.
 
10.9.2  Safety Design Basis
: 1. The emergency service water system is designed to seismic Class I criteria.
: 2. The emergency service water system is operable during the design flood condition and loss of Conowingo pond.
: 3. The emergency service water system has sufficient capacity and redundancy so that no single active
 
component failure can prevent the system from achieving
 
its safety objective.
: 4. The emergency service water system is operable during the loss of offsite power.
 
10.9.3  Description
 
The emergency service water system is common to both Units 2 and
: 3. The system consists of two full-capacity pumps installed in
 
parallel in the seismic Class I portion of the pump structure, and
 
associated equipment coolers, valves, and controls (Drawing M-
 
315). Normal water supply to the suction of the emergency service
 
water system pumps is from Conowingo Pond. The pump discharge
 
piping consists of two headers with service loops to ensure water
 
supply to the diesel engine coolers. These two headers combine, forming a common header, to supply selected equipment coolers. 
 
Valves in the supply headers provide loop isolation. A common
 
discharge header routes the system effluent normally to the pond.
 
The emergency service water system pumps are vertical, single-
 
stage, turbine type with an 8,000 gpm capacity developing a normal
 
average system pressure of 40 psig and a normal system flow of
 
approximately 4500 gpm. The pump mounting base is of watertight
 
construction to withstand hydrostatic pressure at the maximum
 
design flood condition. The pump design data is given in Table 
 
10.9.1.
 
The emergency service water system is a standby system to provide
 
adequate cooling water supply to the emergency equipment coolers 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.9-2 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 and compartment air coolers during a loss of offsite power or during a loss of normal station service water due to the design
 
flood condition or the loss of the Conowingo pond. During normal
 
plant operating conditions, the cooling  water supply to the
 
equipment served by the emergency service water system, except the
 
diesel generator coolers, is normally provided from the
 
service water system. This allows testing of safeguards equipment
 
using service water without starting the emergency service water
 
system pumps.
 
Chemical injection and corrosion monitoring systems are installed
 
to mitigate corrosion damage to emergency service water system
 
piping.
 
The emergency service water system may also be operated in
 
conjunction with the emergency heat sink (subsection 10.24). This
 
configuration (closed loop) is the preferred system alignment
 
during the design flood condition and loss of Conowingo pond.
 
Both emergency service water pumps start after a 36 second time
 
delay whenever 4 kV power is available (following the loss of
 
offsite power or a diesel generator start). One of the emergency
 
service water system pumps is manually shut off if both pumps are
 
running and emergency service water system pressure is verified to
 
be adequate. All system supervisory instrumentation and controls
 
are located in the main control room.
 
The emergency service water system piping and valves are designed
 
as described in Appendix A.
 
10.9.4  Safety Evaluation
 
The emergency service water system pumps are installed in a
 
seismic Class I structure. The system meets seismic Class I
 
criteria, and the pumps are further protected against the design
 
flood level using watertight construction. The emergency service
 
water system is designed with redundant pumps and piping. Each
 
loop is powered from a separate division of both normal and


standby power. Therefore, the system is both redundant and single
PBAPS UFSAR 10.6  SERVICE WATER SYSTEM 10.6.1  Power Generation Objective The power generation objective of the service water system is to supply water required for plant services.
10.6.2  Power Generation Design Basis
: 1. The service water system continuously supplies screened and chlorinated cooling water to the plant during normal plant operation and shutdown periods.
: 2. System interconnections are provided to enable the emergency service water system to serve the reactor building cooling water heat exchangers in the event of a loss of off-site power. This design feature exists although the heat sink, emergency service water (ESW),
for the reactor building closed cooling water (RBCCW) system has been eliminated as a result of locking closed the ESW-RBCCW cross-tie valves. Therefore, little, if any, cooling would be provided to the service water system loads during a loss of off-site power.
: 3. The service water system supplies cooling water to the core standby cooling equipment and space coolers during normal plant operation and shutdown period only.
: 4. The system inhibits the release of radioactive material into the river.
10.6.3  Description The service water system consists of three one-half capacity service water pumps in the pump structure, three horizontal fuel pool service water booster pumps in the reactor building, and associated piping, valves, and instrumentation (Drawing M-314, Sheets 1 through 9).
The three service water pumps are vertical, turbine-type pumps, connected in parallel, taking suction from the pump structure, and each delivering 14,000 gpm at a pump head of 155 ft. The pump bearings are supplied from lube water pumps. Nominal system pressure is 65 psig. The three fuel pool service water booster pumps deliver service water to the fuel pool cooling heat exchangers. These horizontal, centrifugal pumps are rated at 900 gpm at a pump head of 135 ft.
The safeguards equipment coolers and space air cooler are automatically served by the emergency service water system.
CHAPTER 10                  10.6-1              REV. 21, APRIL 2007


failure proof and is operable in the event of a loss of offsite
PBAPS UFSAR To inhibit leakage of radioactivity from potentially contaminated systems (mechanical vacuum pump and fuel pool heat exchangers),
service water pressure is maintained higher than process fluid pressure. A radiation monitor on the service water effluent header from the reactor building cooling water heat exchangers detects leakage of radioactive material from these exchangers. The monitor indicates, records, and alarms in the main control room.
10.6.4  Inspection and Testing The service water system components are proven operable by their use during normal plant operations. Portions of the system normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure their operability and the integrity of the system.
CHAPTER 10                  10.6-2            REV. 21, APRIL 2007


power.  
PBAPS UFSAR TABLE 10.6.1 SERVICE WATER SYSTEM DATA Service Water Pumps Quantity                                3 Type                                    Vertical, Turbine Type, Wet-Pit Flow/Pump Head                          14,000 gpm/155 ft Bhp Rating                              655 hp Speed                                    900 rpm Motor Type                              Vertical, Induction Type Voltage/Phase/Frequency                  2,300 V/3 phase/60 Hz Rated Horsepower                        700 hp Fuel Pool Service Water Booster Pumps Quantity                                3 Type                                    Horizontal Centrifugal Flow/Pump Head                          900 gpm/135 ft Bhp Rating                              39 hp Speed                                    3,600 rpm Motor Type                              Horizontal Voltage/Phase/Frequency                  460 V/3 phase/60 Hz Rated Horsepower                        40 hp CHAPTER 10                  10.6-3              REV. 21, APRIL 2007


10.9.5 Inspection and Testing
PBAPS UFSAR 10.7  HIGH PRESSURE SERVICE WATER SYSTEM 10.7.1  Safety Objective The safety objective of the high pressure service water system is to provide a reliable supply of cooling water for RHR under post-accident conditions.
10.7.2  Safety Design Basis
: 1. The high pressure service water system is designed to seismic Class I criteria to withstand the maximum credible earthquake without impairing system function.
: 2. The high pressure service water system is operable during flood conditions.
: 3. The high pressure service water system is designed with capacity and redundancy to supply cooling water to the RHRS under post-accident conditions.
: 4. The high pressure service water system is operable during the loss of offsite power.
10.7.3  Power Generation Objective The power generation objective of the high pressure service water system is to supply cooling water to the RHRS for shutdown cooling and for torus cooling.
10.7.4  Power Generation Design Basis
: 1. The high pressure service water system supplies a reliable source of cooling water to the RHRS.
: 2. The high pressure service water system is designed for remote-manual initiation.
: 3. The high pressure service water system inhibits leakage of radioactive material from the RHRS to the environment.
: 4. The high pressure service water system provides an additional source of water for post-accident containment flooding by a cross tie between the high pressure service water system and the RHRS.
10.7.5   Description Each high pressure service water system consists of four 4,500-gpm pumps installed in parallel in the pump structure (Drawing CHAPTER 10                  10.7-1              REV. 26, APRIL 2017


The cooling of equipment served by the emergency service water  
PBAPS UFSAR M-315, Sheets 1 through 4). Normal water supply to the suction of the pumps is from Conowingo Pond. When the high pressure service water system is operated in conjunction with the emergency heat sink (subsection 10.24, "Emergency Heat Sink"), the suction is from the HPSW pump bay which is fed from emergency cooling tower basin. The pump discharge is manifolded and provided with a normally closed, motor-operated valve separating the four pumps into groups of two. Two parallel headers run from the pump structure to the reactor building. Each header delivers the discharge from two pumps to two RHR heat exchangers also in parallel. Under normal conditions, when the respective loop of HPSW is in operation, the service water pressure on the discharge side of the RHR heat exchanger is maintained positive with respect to the RHRS side to inhibit leakage of radioactive material into the environment. In the event of a design basis accident or transient in which additional containment cooling capacity is required, a second HPSW pump can be aligned to a second RHR heat exchanger by opening the cross-tie valve.
Under abnormal operating conditions RHRS pressure could exceed high pressure service water system pressure. An RHR heat exchanger leak under these abnormal conditions would result in radioactive RHR water migrating into the high pressure service water system and into the river. To limit the release of radioactive water to the river from this potential release path, signals from the radiation monitors in the sample system which samples the high pressure service water system upstream and downstream of the RHR heat exchangers initiate an alarm in the control room at a predetermined radiation level.
Flanged connection points are available on the high pressure service water system, downstream of the RHR heat exchangers, to allow for a temporary flow path of the RHR heat exchanger cooling water in the event that the normal flow path becomes unavailable.
This alternative flow path is intended to be routed through secondary containment. Therefore, this flow path may only be used when secondary containment is not required.
An intertie is provided between units 2 and 3 high pressure service water system to provide flexibility. A cross tie to the RHRS provides the capability for primary containment flooding.
The high pressure service water system pumps are vertical multistage turbine type. The pump mounting base is of watertight construction to withstand the hydrostatic pressure at the design flood condition. The pump design data is given in Table 10.7.1.
The high pressure service water system piping and valves are designed as described in Appendix A.
CHAPTER 10                  10.7-2              REV. 26, APRIL 2017


system, except the standby diesel generator coolers, is
PBAPS UFSAR 10.7.6  Safety Evaluation The high pressure service water system pumps are installed in a seismic Class I structure. The system meets seismic Class I criteria and is protected against the design flood level.
Each pump is sized to accommodate the design heat removal capacity of one RHRS heat exchanger. They have adequate head (1) to maintain the high pressure service water system cooling water at a higher pressure than the RHRS, thus inhibiting the release of radioactive material to the environment, and (2) to permit operation in conjunction with the emergency heat sink. Further, the pumps have both a normal and a standby power supply. In the event of the loss of offsite power, the pumps are supplied from the diesel generators and manually started as required.
Sufficient redundancy is provided in the number of pumps and power supplies, and in the piping arrangement, so that no single system component failure can prevent the system from supplying cooling water to accommodate the normal shutdown mode and the containment cooling mode. Therefore, core decay heat removal during the shutdown periods, or containment cooling during the post-accident condition, can be maintained.
10.7.7  Inspection and Testing Pumps in the high pressure service water system are proven operable by their use or testing during normal station operations.
Motor operated isolation valves can be tested to assure they are capable of opening and closing by operating manual switches in the control room and observing the position lights. Portions of the high pressure service water system normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure their operability and the integrity of the system.
CHAPTER 10                  10.7-3            REV. 26, APRIL 2017


functionally tested using the plant service water system. Pump  
PBAPS UFSAR TABLE 10.7.1 HIGH PRESSURE SERVICE WATER SYSTEM EQUIPMENT DATA High Pressure Service Water Pumps Quantity                                  4 Per Unit Type                                      Vertical, Turbine Type Flow/Head Design Point                    4,500 gpm at 700 ft Bhp at Rating                            < 975 hp Speed                                    1,770 rpm Number of Stages                          6 Pump Design:
Shut-Off Head                            > 368 and < 445 psig Material:
Bowl/Impeller                          Cast Carbon Steel or Moly Iron/Bronze or Cast Stainless Steel Discharged Head/Column                Carbon Steel/Carbon Steel Line Shaft                            Stainless Steel Bearings                              Brass/Bronze/Rubber Motor:
Type                                  Vertical, Induction Horsepower                            1,000 hp Voltage/Phase/Frequency                4,160 V/3 Phase/60 Hz CHAPTER 10                  10.7-4              REV. 23, APRIL 2011


operation and diesel generator cooling capability is verified when
PBAPS UFSAR 10.8  REACTOR BUILDING COOLING WATER SYSTEM 10.8.1  Power Generation Objective The power generative objective of the reactor building cooling water system is to provide cooling water to auxiliary plant equipment associated with the nuclear steam supply system (NSSS).
10.8.2  Power Generation Design Basis
: 1. The reactor building cooling water system is designed to cool auxiliary plant equipment over the full range of reactor power operation.
: 2. The reactor building cooling water system is designed to inhibit the release of radioactive material to the environment.
10.8.3  Description The reactor building cooling water system consists of two full-capacity pumps, two full-capacity heat exchangers, one head tank, one chemical feed tank, and associated piping, valves, and controls (Drawing M-316). The cooling water pumps and heat exchangers are located in the reactor building auxiliary bay. The head tank is located on the reactor building refueling floor. The system equipment data is given in Table 10.8.1.
The system is a closed loop utilizing inhibited demineralized water. The heat exchangers are designed with service (river) water on the tube side and demineralized water on the shell side.
The reactor building cooling water system is designed for an operating pressure of 140 psig.
The head tank, located at the highest point in the loop, accommodates system volume changes, maintains static suction pressure on the pump, aids in detecting gross leaks in the reactor building cooling water system, and provides for adding makeup water. An automatic makeup control valve maintains water level in the tank. The automatic function is not required and may be valved out to monitor system inventory. High and low water levels are alarmed in the main control room. An inhibitor is added as necessary to the demineralized water by means of a chemical addition tank to limit corrosion.
The reactor building cooling water system supply and return headers penetrating the primary containment are each provided with a motor-operated isolation valve outside the containment. These isolation valves are manually controlled remotely from the main control room.
CHAPTER 10                  10.8-1              REV. 21, APRIL 2007


operability of the diesel generators is tested. Motor operated
PBAPS UFSAR Electrical power for operating the reactor building cooling water system pumps during failure of offsite power is supplied from the standby power supply.
In the event of offsite power failure, the reactor building cooling water system supply to the reactor water cleanup system non-regenerative heat exchanger and pumps, instrument nitrogen compressor skids, and various sample station coolers is isolated, and the water supply is maintained to the reactor recirculation pump motor oil and mechanical seal water coolers and the reactor building equipment drain sump cooler. In addition, water is supplied to the drywell air cooling system and the drywell equipment drain sump cooler, which are normally served by the chilled water system, and to the CRD pump oil coolers and air compressor jacket and after coolers, which are normally served by the turbine building cooling water system.
The reactor building cooling water system can also supply water to the fuel pool cooling heat exchangers, via removable spool pieces, in the event of loss of normal cooling water. The control and instrumentation is designed for remote system startup from the main control room.
These design features do exist although the heat sink, emergency service water (ESW), for the reactor building closed cooling water (RBCCW) system has been eliminated as a result of locking closed the ESW-RBCCW cross tie valves. These valves were locked closed because of the lack of required structural design of the piping, and due to the adverse hydraulic effects to safety related components served by ESW. Therefore, the cooling effect of the RBCCW system to any of the components described above will be minimal.
A radiation monitor is provided at the cooling water return header to indicate, record, and alarm leakage of radioactivity.
10.8.4  Inspection and Testing Equipment in the reactor building cooling water system is proven operable by use during normal plant operations. Motor operated isolation valves can be tested to assure they are capable of opening and closing by operating manual switches in the control room and observing the position lights. Portions of the reactor building cooling water system normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure their operability and the integrity of the system.
CHAPTER 10                  10.8-2            REV. 21, APRIL 2007


CHAPTER 10 10.9-3 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 valves can be exercised to confirm operability. Emergency service water system operability is verified by flow and heat transfer
PBAPS UFSAR TABLE 10.8.1 REACTOR BUILDING COOLING WATER SYSTEM EQUIPMENT DATA Reactor Building Cooling Water System Pumps                          2 (full-capacity)
Type                                        Horizontal Centrifugal Flow and Head                                1,350 gpm at 140 ft Bhp at Rating                                65 hp Material:
Casing/Impeller/Shaft                Cast Iron/Bronze/Stainless Steel Motor:  Size                                75 hp Voltage/Phase/Frequency                      440 V/3 Phase/60 Hz Speed                                        3,600 rpm Reactor Building Cooling Water System Heat Exchangers Quantity                                    2 (full-capacity)
Type                                        Horizontal, Shell and Tube Heat Transfer Duty                          25,500,000 Btu/hr Shell Design:
Pressure/Temperature                  150 psig/200F Material                              Carbon steel Flow Medium                          Inhibited Demineralized Water Tube design:
Pressure/Temperature                  125 psig/200F Material:
Tube                                  Admiralty Tube Sheet                            Carbon Steel Tube Joint                            Rolled Flow Medium                                  River Water CHAPTER 10                         10.8-3                   REV. 21, APRIL 2007


testing. Emergency service water system piping integrity is  
PBAPS UFSAR 10.9  EMERGENCY SERVICE WATER SYSTEM 10.9.1  Safety Objective The safety objective of the emergency service water system is to provide a reliable supply of cooling water to diesel generator coolers, ECCS and RCIC compartment air coolers, Core Spray Pump Motor Oil Coolers and other selected equipment during a loss of offsite power or during a loss of normal station service water due to the design flood condition or the loss of the Conowingo pond.
10.9.2  Safety Design Basis
: 1. The emergency service water system is designed to seismic Class I criteria.
: 2. The emergency service water system is operable during the design flood condition and loss of Conowingo pond.
: 3. The emergency service water system has sufficient capacity and redundancy so that no single active component failure can prevent the system from achieving its safety objective.
: 4. The emergency service water system is operable during the loss of offsite power.
10.9.3  Description The emergency service water system is common to both Units 2 and
: 3. The system consists of two full-capacity pumps installed in parallel in the seismic Class I portion of the pump structure, and associated equipment coolers, valves, and controls (Drawing M-315). Normal water supply to the suction of the emergency service water system pumps is from Conowingo Pond. The pump discharge piping consists of two headers with service loops to ensure water supply to the diesel engine coolers. These two headers combine, forming a common header, to supply selected equipment coolers.
Valves in the supply headers provide loop isolation. A common discharge header routes the system effluent normally to the pond.
The emergency service water system pumps are vertical, single-stage, turbine type with an 8,000 gpm capacity developing a normal average system pressure of 40 psig and a normal system flow of approximately 4500 gpm. The pump mounting base is of watertight construction to withstand hydrostatic pressure at the maximum design flood condition. The pump design data is given in Table 10.9.1.
The emergency service water system is a standby system to provide adequate cooling water supply to the emergency equipment coolers CHAPTER 10                  10.9-1              REV. 21, APRIL 2007


verified by visual and ultrasonic inspection and corrosion
PBAPS UFSAR and compartment air coolers during a loss of offsite power or during a loss of normal station service water due to the design flood condition or the loss of the Conowingo pond. During normal plant operating conditions, the cooling water supply to the equipment served by the emergency service water system, except the diesel generator coolers, is normally provided from the service water system. This allows testing of safeguards equipment using service water without starting the emergency service water system pumps.
Chemical injection and corrosion monitoring systems are installed to mitigate corrosion damage to emergency service water system piping.
The emergency service water system may also be operated in conjunction with the emergency heat sink (subsection 10.24). This configuration (closed loop) is the preferred system alignment during the design flood condition and loss of Conowingo pond.
Both emergency service water pumps start after a 36 second time delay whenever 4 kV power is available (following the loss of offsite power or a diesel generator start). One of the emergency service water system pumps is manually shut off if both pumps are running and emergency service water system pressure is verified to be adequate. All system supervisory instrumentation and controls are located in the main control room.
The emergency service water system piping and valves are designed as described in Appendix A.
10.9.4  Safety Evaluation The emergency service water system pumps are installed in a seismic Class I structure. The system meets seismic Class I criteria, and the pumps are further protected against the design flood level using watertight construction. The emergency service water system is designed with redundant pumps and piping. Each loop is powered from a separate division of both normal and standby power. Therefore, the system is both redundant and single failure proof and is operable in the event of a loss of offsite power.
10.9.5  Inspection and Testing The cooling of equipment served by the emergency service water system, except the standby diesel generator coolers, is functionally tested using the plant service water system. Pump operation and diesel generator cooling capability is verified when operability of the diesel generators is tested. Motor operated CHAPTER 10                  10.9-2            REV. 21, APRIL 2007


monitoring.  
PBAPS UFSAR valves can be exercised to confirm operability. Emergency service water system operability is verified by flow and heat transfer testing. Emergency service water system piping integrity is verified by visual and ultrasonic inspection and corrosion monitoring.
Emergency service water pump performance is verified in accordance with ASME Code requirements. Cooling equipment minimum flows are verified by magnetic or ultrasonic flow measurement devices.
The timer used to sequence the emergency service water pump during a LOCA is tested (with offsite power available) in accordance with surveillance test procedures. The test verifies the setting, operability, and functional performance of the relay, and provides assurance that the automatic loading sequence is being maintained and performs as required.
CHAPTER 10                  10.9-3              REV. 21, APRIL 2007


Emergency service water pump performance is verified in accordance
PBAPS UFSAR TABLE 10.9.1 EMERGENCY SERVICE WATER SYSTEM EQUIPMENT DATA Emergency Service Water System Pumps*
Quantity                              2 (common for Units 2 and 3)
Type                                  Vertical, Turbine Type Flow/Head                            8,000 gpm/96 ft Bhp at Rating                        237 hp Speed                                1,170 rpm Number of Stages                      1 Pump Design:
Shutoff Head                    132 ft Maximum Working Pressure        200 psig Material:                      Moly Iron Bowl/Impeller                  Cast Iron/Bronze Discharge Head/Column          Carbon Steel/Carbon Steel Line Shaft                      Stainless Steel Bearings                        Rubber Motor Design:
Type                            Vertical Induction Type Horsepower                      250 hp Voltage/Phase/Frequency        4,160 V/3 Phase/60 Hz
* Emergency cooling water pump and motor are identical except for the pump column length.
CHAPTER 10                  10.9-4              REV. 21, APRIL 2007


with ASME Code requirements. Cooling equipment minimum flows are  
PBAPS UFSAR 10.10  TURBINE BUILDING COOLING WATER SYSTEM 10.10.1  Power Generation Objective The power generation objective of the turbine building cooling water system is to provide cooling water to auxiliary plant equipment associated with the power conversion systems.
10.10.2  Power Generation Design Basis The turbine building cooling water system is designed to cool non-nuclear auxiliary plant equipment over the full range of plant operation.
10.10.3  Description The system consists of two full-capacity pumps, two full-capacity heat exchangers (system design does allow use of both heat exchangers if necessary due to high river temperatures or other limiting operating conditions), one head tank, one chemical feed tank, and associated piping, valves, and controls (Drawing M-316, Sheets 1 to 4). The cooling water pumps and heat exchangers are located on the turbine building ground floor. The system design data is given in Table 10.10.1.
The system is a closed loop utilizing inhibited demineralized water. The heat exchangers are designed with service (river) water on the tube side and demineralized water on the shell side.
The head tank, located at the highest point in the loop, accommodates system volume changes, maintains static suction pressure on the pumps, aids in detecting gross leaks in the turbine building cooling water system, and provides a means for adding makeup water. An automatic makeup control valve maintains water level in the tank. The automatic function is not required and may be valved out to monitor system inventory. High and low water levels are alarmed in the main control room. An inhibitor is added as necessary to the demineralized water by means of a chemical addition tank to limit corrosion.
In the event of offsite power failure, the turbine building cooling water system is not operated. Under loss of offsite power, the water supply to the instrument and service air compressor skids, CRD pump lube oil coolers and the thrust bearing housings is maintained from the reactor building cooling water system. This design feature still exists although the heat sink, emergency service water (ESW), for the reactor building closed cooling water (RBCCW) system has been eliminated as a result of locking closed the ESW cross tie valves.
CHAPTER 10                  10.10-1              REV. 21, APRIL 2007


verified by magnetic or ultrasonic flow measurement devices.  
PBAPS UFSAR Therefore, little, if any, cooling would be provided by the reactor building cooling water system during a loss of offsite power.
10.10.4  Inspection and Testing Equipment in the turbine building cooling water system is proven operable by use during normal plant operations. Transfer valves in the system can be tested to ensure that they are capable of transferring the water supply of essential equipment from the turbine building cooling water system to the reactor building cooling water system on loss of offsite power. This design feature still exists although the heat sink, emergency service water (ESW), for the reactor building closed cooling water (RBCCW) system has been eliminated as a result of locking closed the ESW cross tie valves. Therefore, little, if any, cooling would be provided by the reactor building cooling water system during a loss of offsite power. System subsections normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure their operability and system integrity.
CHAPTER 10                  10.10-2            REV. 21, APRIL 2007


The timer used to sequence the emergency service water pump during
PBAPS UFSAR TABLE 10.10.1 TURBINE BUILDING COOLING WATER SYSTEM EQUIPMENT DATA Turbine Building Cooling Water System Pumps Quantity                              2 (full-capacity)
Type                                  Horizontal, Centrifugal Flow and Head                        525 gpm at 180 ft Bhp at Rating                        34 hp Material:
Casting/Impeller/Shaft          Cast Iron/Bronze/Stainless Steel Motor:  Size                        40 hp Voltage/Phase/Frequency              440 V/3 Phase/60 Hz Speed                                3,600 rpm Turbine Building Cooling Water System Heat Exchangers Quantity                              2 (full-capacity)
Type                                  Horizontal, Shell and Tube Heat Transfer Duty                    3,850,000 Btu/hr Shell Design:
Pressure/Temperature            150 psig/200F Material                        Carbon Steel Flow Medium                    Inhibited Demineralized Water Tube Design:
Pressure/Temperature            125 psi/200F CHAPTER 10                  10.10-3              REV. 21, APRIL 2007


a LOCA is tested (with offsite power available) in accordance with
PBAPS UFSAR TABLE 10.10.1 (Continued)
Material:
Tube                        Admiralty Tube Sheet                  Carbon Steel Tube Joint                  Rolled Flow Medium                River Water CHAPTER 10              10.10-4              REV. 21, APRIL 2007


surveillance test procedures. The test verifies the setting, operability, and functional performance of the relay, and provides
PBAPS UFSAR 10.11  CHILLED WATER SYSTEM 10.11.1  Power Generation Objective The power generation objective of the chilled water system is to provide cooling water to the auxiliary equipment inside the primary containment.
10.11.2  Power Generation Design Basis
: 1. The chilled water system is designed to cool the auxiliary equipment inside the primary containment over the full range of plant operation.
: 2. The chilled water system provides a reliable source of cooling water.
: 3. The chilled water system is provided with inter-ties with the reactor building cooling water system, which serves the chilled water system during a loss of offsite power. This design feature exists although the heat sink, emergency service water (ESW), for the reactor building closed cooling water (RBCCW) system has been eliminated as a result of locking closed the ESW-RBCCW cross tie valves. Therefore, little, if any, cooling would be provided by the chilled water system during a loss of offsite power.
10.11.3  Description The chilled water system consists of three half-capacity, centrifugal refrigeration units, three half-capacity chilled water pumps, an expansion tank, piping, valves, instrumentation, and controls (Drawing M-327, Sheets 1 through 4). It is a closed-loop system utilizing inhibited demineralized water. The pumps circulate warm return water to the refrigeration unit chillers.
The chilled water is then piped to the drywell air coolers, the recirculation pump motor coolers, and the drywell equipment sump cooler. Two parallel supply headers and return headers penetrate the primary containment. A motor operated isolation valve is located outside the containment in each line. The inter-tie with the reactor building cooling water system is made by motor operated three-way valves. An automatic transfer from system to system is made upon loss of offsite power. Chilled water system shutdown requires a manual switchover. Chillers and pumps are remotely controlled from the main control room. A standby start feature is provided for each chilled water pump. Standby equipment is provided to assure system reliability.
CHAPTER 10                  10.11-1            REV. 21, APRIL 2007


assurance that the automatic loading sequence is being maintained
PBAPS UFSAR 10.11.4  Inspection and Testing The chilled water system is proved operable by use during normal plant operation. Portions of the system normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure operability and integrity of the system.
CHAPTER 10                  10.11-2            REV. 21, APRIL 2007


and performs as required.
PBAPS UFSAR 10.12  FIRE PROTECTION PROGRAM The Fire Protection Program (FPP) is described in a document transmitted to the NRC on September 30, 1986 titled, "Fire Protection Program, Peach Bottom Atomic Power Station, Units 2 and 3", and is hereby incorporated by reference into the UFSAR.
Chapter 1 of the FPP is an introduction.
Chapter 2 provides a general description of the fire detection and suppression systems.
Chapter 3 presents an item-by-item comparison of the Peach Bottom Atomic Power Station Units 2 and 3 fire protection program with the guidelines set forth in Branch Technical Position APCSB 9.5-1, Appendix A, the requirements of Appendix R to 10CFR50, and the requirements of the Fire Protection Safety Evaluation Report.
Chapter 4 provides a tabulation of the combustible loadings in plant fire areas, describes fire barriers, and describes fire detection and suppression systems in each area. The plant is divided into 47 fire areas.
Chapter 5 provides an evaluation of the ability to safely shut the plant down in the event of a fire in any one of the plant's 47 fire areas.
Chapter 6 addresses special topics.
Chapter 7 contains the fire protection requirements which have been relocated from the Technical Specifications by Technical Specifications Change Request 90-05, which was submitted to the NRC on March 28, 1994. The relocation of these requirements was in accordance with NRC Generic Letters (GL) 86-10, "Implementation of Fire Protection Requirements," and GL 88-12, "Removal of Fire Protection Requirements from Technical Specifications."
In addition to the above, administrative procedures, system operating procedures, surveillance tests, and pre-fire strategy plans have been established to implement the Fire Protection Program.
CHAPTER 10                  10.12-1            REV. 21, APRIL 2007


CHAPTER 10 10.9-4 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 TABLE 10.9.1  EMERGENCY SERVICE WATER SYSTEM EQUIPMENT DATA
PBAPS UFSAR 10.13  MAIN CONTROL ROOM AIR CONDITIONING 10.13.1  Power Generation Objective The power generation objective of the main control room air conditioning system is to provide a suitable environment for continuous personnel occupancy and to ensure the operability of control room equipment and instruments under normal and accident conditions per 12.3.4.
10.13.2  Power Generation Design Basis
: 1. The system is designed to provide an environment with a controlled temperature. Humidity control is available during periods of auxiliary boiler operation.
: 2. The system is capable of purging the main control room.
: 3. Redundant components are provided to ensure reliable system operation.
10.13.3   Safety Design Basis
: 1. The system is designed such that the control room is habitable even under the design basis accident conditions.
: 2. The fresh air portion of the system is designed to be operable during the loss of offsite power by using the standby power supplies.
: 3. The fresh air intake is filtered when main control room emergency ventilation is initiated to prevent iodine and particulate contamination of the main control room air.
10.13.4  Description The main control room air conditioning system consists of ventilation air supply fans (normal), emergency air supply fans, air conditioning supply and return fans, filters, heating coils and cooling coils, refrigerant water chillers, chilled water pumps, dampers, duct work, instrumentation, and controls (Drawing M-384).
Outside air is drawn through a filter by a fresh air supply fan and is discharged to the inlet of the air conditioning supply fan suction, and is then discharged to duct work leading to the main control room and adjacent offices. This air is conditioned to maintain a controlled temperature environment using heating and CHAPTER 10                  10.13-1            REV. 26, APRIL 2017


Emergency Service Water System Pumps*
PBAPS UFSAR cooling coils. Humidity is conditioned during periods of auxiliary boiler operation. Normally, control room air is recirculated by one of two return air fans. These fans take a suction from the north and south ends of the control room and discharge to the air conditioning supply fan suction with filtered outside air from the fresh air supply fans.
The control room heating coils are supplied from the auxiliary steam supply. Cooling is provided by a chilled water system consisting of two 100% chiller units, two 100% chilled water pumps, and a piping system which also supplies chilled water to the cable spreading room fan-coil supply unit and the health physics and chemistry labs fan-coil supply unit. The fresh air supply fans, both normal and emergency, are operable from the standby power supply during the loss of offsite power. The control room chiller and air conditioning supply and return fans do not run following loss of offsite power. The instrumentation and control for the main control room air conditioning system is designed for automatic operation. One fresh air supply fan, one air conditioning supply fan, and one return air fan are normally in operation. Emergency cooling and ventilation systems for the control room and other safety-related equipment rooms are installed in seismic Class I structures and are provided with 100 percent redundancy. Monitoring and adjustment of the control room emergency ventilation system air flow may be performed locally.
If an operating fan fails, the loss of duct pressure is sensed and the standby fan starts automatically, the associated fan dampers open, and an alarm sounds in the control room. Fans may also be started manually.
A radiation monitoring system in the fresh air intake duct work monitors the radioactivity level in the incoming outside air. This system includes two flow switches that monitor air flow through the fresh air intake duct work. If a high activity level or loss of flow is detected, the operating normal fresh air supply fan stops, one emergency air supply fan starts, and the air conditioning supply and return air fans shut down. The air is diverted through one of the two high efficiency and charcoal filter trains automatically. The monitor also annunciates in the control room. If a high-high activity level is detected, the monitor will indicate in the control room.
The control room is capable of being purged with 100 percent outside air. A once-through flow is established using the air conditioning supply fans, with the return air fans discharging to atmosphere at the radwaste building roof.
CHAPTER 10                10.13-2              REV. 26, APRIL 2017


Quantity 2 (common for Units 2 and 3)
PBAPS UFSAR 10.13.4.1 Control Room Habitability The primary design function of the Main Control Room (MCR) / Main Control Room Emergency Ventilation (MCREV) System is to provide a safe environment in which the operator can keep the nuclear reactor and auxiliary systems under control during normal operations and can safely shut down those systems during abnormal situations to protect the health and safety of the public and plant workers.
Technical Specifications 3.7.4 and its Bases are in place to ensure that appropriate equipment is maintained operable and inoperabilities are managed through compensatory actions and other plant actions.
A Control Room Envelope (CRE) Habitability Program is required by Technical Specifications 5.5.13. The program is established and implemented to ensure that the CRE habitability is maintained such that, with an operable MCREV system, CRE occupants can control the reactor safely under normal conditions and maintain it in a safe condition following a radiological event, hazardous chemical release as applicable, or a smoke challenge. The program shall ensure that adequate radiation protection is provided to permit access and occupancy of the CRE under design basis accident (DBA) conditions without personnel receiving radiation exposures in excess of 5 rem total effective does equivalent (TEDE) for the duration of the accident. The program includes elements required by Technical Specification 5.5.13.
As a result of Technical Specification 3.7.4 and 5.5.13 requirements, PBAPS is committed to applicable portions of NRC Reg Guide 1.197, NRC Reg Guide 1.196 as invoked by the Technical Specifications or its Bases. PBAPS is committed to NRC Reg Guide 1.78 (6/74) and NRC Reg Guide 1.95 (2/75), as applicable, for hazardous chemical assessments. The computer code HABIT is utilized for hazardous chemical assessments, which was approved in Revision 1 of Reg Guide 1.78. This is an exception to Revision 0, to which PBAPS remains committed. Additionally, Peach Bottom performs hazardous chemical assessments by probabilistic analysis in accordance with NUREG-0800, Standard Review Plan, Section 2.2.3.
10.13.5  Safety Evaluation The fresh air portion of the main control room ventilation system permits continuous occupancy of the main control room under normal and accident conditions, including maximum credible earthquake, contaminated outside air, and loss of offsite power.
The system has sufficient redundancy to maintain uninterrupted main control room ventilation for personnel occupancy and CHAPTER 10                  10.13-3             REV. 26, APRIL 2017


Type  Vertical, Turbine Type
PBAPS UFSAR instrument operability. Evaluation as to the expected dose rates under the design basis accident conditions is included in paragraph 12.3.4.
10.13.6  Inspection and Testing The main control room air conditioning system is proven operable by its use during normal plant operation. Portions of the system normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure operability and integrity of the system.
CHAPTER 10                  10.13-4            REV. 26, APRIL 2017


Flow/Head 8,000 gpm/96 ft
PBAPS UFSAR 10.14   EMERGENCY VENTILATING SYSTEM 10.14.1   Safety Objective The safety objective of the emergency ventilating systems is to maintain suitable temperatures in the plant engineered safeguards equipment rooms for equipment protection.
 
10.14.2   Safety Design Basis
Bhp at Rating 237 hp Speed  1,170 rpm Number of Stages 1
: 1. The systems protect the safeguards equipment against overheating.
Pump Design:
: 2. Selected systems shall be provided with redundant components for reliable operation.
 
: 3. The equipment is provided with alternate power supplies in the event of loss of offsite power.
Shutoff Head 132 ft Maximum Working Pressure 200 psig
: 4. The equipment is designed to seismic Class I criteria.
 
10.14.3   Description The emergency ventilating systems include the following:
Material: Moly Iron
: 1. Emergency switchgear and battery rooms.
 
: 2. Standby diesel generator rooms.
Bowl/Impeller Cast Iron/Bronze
: 3. Pump structure ventilation system (ESW/HPSW Compartment).
 
Discharge Head/Column Carbon Steel/Carbon Steel
 
Line Shaft Stainless Steel
 
Bearings Rubber Motor Design:
 
Type Vertical Induction Type
 
Horsepower 250 hp Voltage/Phase/Frequency 4,160 V/3 Phase/60 Hz
* Emergency cooling water pump and motor are identical except
 
for the pump column length. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.10-1 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 10.10  TURBINE BUILDING COOLING WATER SYSTEM 10.10.1  Power Generation Objective
 
The power generation objective of the turbine building cooling
 
water system is to provide cooling water to auxiliary plant
 
equipment associated with the power conversion systems.
 
10.10.2  Power Generation Design Basis
 
The turbine building cooling water system is designed to cool non-
 
nuclear auxiliary plant equipment over the full range of plant
 
operation.
 
10.10.3  Description
 
The system consists of two full-capacity pumps, two full-capacity
 
heat exchangers (system design does allow use of both heat
 
exchangers if necessary due to high river temperatures or other
 
limiting operating conditions), one head tank, one chemical feed
 
tank, and associated piping, valves, and controls (Drawing M-316, Sheets 1 to 4). The cooling water pumps and heat exchangers are
 
located on the turbine building ground floor. The system design
 
data is given in Table 10.10.1.
 
The system is a closed loop utilizing inhibited demineralized
 
water. The heat exchangers are designed with service (river)
 
water on the tube side and demineralized water on the shell side.
 
The head tank, located at the highest point in the loop, accommodates system volume changes, maintains static suction
 
pressure on the pumps, aids in detecting gross leaks in the
 
turbine building cooling water system, and provides a means for
 
adding makeup water. An automatic makeup control valve maintains
 
water level in the tank. The automatic function is not required
 
and may be valved out to monitor system inventory. High and low
 
water levels are alarmed in the main control room. An inhibitor
 
is added as necessary to the demineralized water by means of a
 
chemical addition tank to limit corrosion.
 
In the event of offsite power failure, the turbine building
 
cooling water system is not operated. Under loss of offsite
 
power, the water supply to the instrument and service air
 
compressor skids, CRD pump lube oil coolers and the thrust bearing
 
housings is maintained from the reactor building cooling water
 
system. This design feature still exists although the heat sink, emergency service water (ESW), for the reactor building closed
 
cooling water (RBCCW) system has been eliminated as a result of
 
locking closed the ESW cross tie valves. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.10-2 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 Therefore, little, if any, cooling would be provided by the reactor building cooling water system during a loss of offsite
 
power.
 
10.10.4  Inspection and Testing
 
Equipment in the turbine building cooling water system is proven
 
operable by use during normal plant operations. Transfer valves
 
in the system can be tested to ensure that they are capable of
 
transferring the water supply of essential equipment from the
 
turbine building cooling water system to the reactor building
 
cooling water system on loss of offsite power. This design
 
feature still exists although the heat sink, emergency service
 
water (ESW), for the reactor building closed cooling water (RBCCW)
 
system has been eliminated as a result of locking closed the ESW
 
cross tie valves. Therefore, little, if any, cooling would be
 
provided by the reactor building cooling water system during a
 
loss of offsite power. System subsections normally closed to flow
 
can be tested to ensure their operability and system integrity. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.10-3 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 TABLE 10.10.1  TURBINE BUILDING COOLING WATER SYSTEM EQUIPMENT DATA
 
Turbine Building Cooling Water System Pumps
 
Quantity 2 (full-capacity)
 
Type  Horizontal, Centrifugal
 
Flow and Head 525 gpm at 180 ft
 
Bhp at Rating 34 hp Material:
 
Casting/Impeller/Shaft Cast Iron/Bronze/Stainless
 
Steel Motor:  Size 40 hp Voltage/Phase/Frequency 440 V/3 Phase/60 Hz
 
Speed  3,600 rpm 
 
Turbine Building Cooling Water System Heat Exchangers
 
Quantity 2 (full-capacity)
 
Type  Horizontal, Shell and Tube
 
Heat Transfer Duty 3,850,000 Btu/hr
 
Shell Design:
 
Pressure/Temperature 150 psig/200 F  Material Carbon Steel
 
Flow Medium Inhibited Demineralized Water Tube Design:
 
Pressure/Temperature 125 psi/200 F 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.10-4 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 TABLE 10.10.1 (Continued)
 
Material:
 
Tube Admiralty
 
Tube Sheet Carbon Steel
 
Tube Joint Rolled Flow Medium River Water 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.11-1 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 10.11  CHILLED WATER SYSTEM 10.11.1  Power Generation Objective
 
The power generation objective of the chilled water system is to
 
provide cooling water to the auxiliary equipment inside the
 
primary containment.
 
10.11.2  Power Generation Design Basis
: 1. The chilled water system is designed to cool the auxiliary equipment inside the primary containment over
 
the full range of plant operation.
: 2. The chilled water system provides a reliable source of cooling water.
: 3. The chilled water system is provided with inter-ties with the reactor building cooling water system, which
 
serves the chilled water system during a loss of offsite
 
power. This design feature exists although the heat
 
sink, emergency service water (ESW), for the reactor
 
building closed cooling water (RBCCW) system has been
 
eliminated as a result of locking closed the ESW-RBCCW
 
cross tie valves. Therefore, little, if any, cooling
 
would be provided by the chilled water system during a
 
loss of offsite power.
 
10.11.3  Description
 
The chilled water system consists of three half-capacity, centrifugal refrigeration units, three half-capacity chilled water
 
pumps, an expansion tank, piping, valves, instrumentation, and
 
controls (Drawing M-327, Sheets 1 through 4). It is a closed-loop
 
system utilizing inhibited demineralized water. The pumps
 
circulate warm return water to the refrigeration unit chillers. 
 
The chilled water is then piped to the drywell air coolers, the
 
recirculation pump motor coolers, and the drywell equipment sump
 
cooler. Two parallel supply headers and return headers penetrate
 
the primary containment. A motor operated isolation valve is
 
located outside the containment in each line. The inter-tie with
 
the reactor building cooling water system is made by motor
 
operated three-way valves. An automatic transfer from system to
 
system is made upon loss of offsite power. Chilled water system
 
shutdown requires a manual switchover. Chillers and pumps are
 
remotely controlled from the main control room. A standby start
 
feature is provided for each chilled water pump. Standby equipment
 
is provided to assure system reliability. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.11-2 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 10.11.4  Inspection and Testing
 
The chilled water system is proved operable by use during normal
 
plant operation. Portions of the system normally closed to flow
 
can be tested to ensure operability and integrity of the system. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.12-1 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 10.12  FIRE PROTECTION PROGRAM The Fire Protection Program (FPP) is described in a document
 
transmitted to the NRC on September 30, 1986 titled, "Fire
 
Protection Program, Peach Bottom Atomic Power Station, Units 2 and
 
3", and is hereby incorporated by reference into the UFSAR.
 
Chapter 1 of the FPP is an introduction.
 
Chapter 2 provides a general description of the fire detection and
 
suppression systems.
 
Chapter 3 presents an item-by-item comparison of the Peach Bottom
 
Atomic Power Station Units 2 and 3 fire protection program with
 
the guidelines set forth in Branch Technical Position APCSB 9.5-1, Appendix A, the requirements of Appendix R to 10CFR50, and the
 
requirements of the Fire Protection Safety Evaluation Report.
 
Chapter 4 provides a tabulation of the combustible loadings in
 
plant fire areas, describes fire barriers, and describes fire
 
detection and suppression systems in each area. The plant is
 
divided into 47 fire areas.
 
Chapter 5 provides an evaluation of the ability to safely shut the
 
plant down in the event of a fire in any one of the plant's 47
 
fire areas.
 
Chapter 6 addresses special topics.
 
Chapter 7 contains the fire protection requirements which have
 
been relocated from the Technical Specifications by Technical
 
Specifications Change Request 90-05, which was submitted to the
 
NRC on March 28, 1994. The relocation of these requirements was
 
in accordance with NRC Generic Letters (GL) 86-10, "Implementation
 
of Fire Protection Requirements," and GL 88-12, "Removal of Fire
 
Protection Requirements from Technical Specifications."
 
In addition to the above, administrative procedures, system
 
operating procedures, surveillance tests, and pre-fire strategy
 
plans have been established to implement the Fire Protection
 
Program. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.13-1 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 10.13  MAIN CONTROL ROOM AIR CONDITIONING 10.13.1  Power Generation Objective
 
The power generation objective of the main control room air
 
conditioning system is to provide a suitable environment for
 
continuous personnel occupancy and to ensure the operability of
 
control room equipment and instruments under normal and accident
 
conditions per 12.3.4.
 
10.13.2  Power Generation Design Basis
: 1. The system is designed to provide an environment with a controlled temperature. Humidity control is available
 
during periods of auxiliary boiler operation.
: 2. The system is capable of purging the main control room.
: 3. Redundant components are provided to ensure reliable system operation.
 
10.13.3  Safety Design Basis
: 1. The system is designed such that the control room is habitable even under the design basis accident
 
conditions.
: 2. The fresh air portion of the system is designed to be operable during the loss of offsite power by using the
 
standby power supplies.
: 3. The fresh air intake is filtered when main control room emergency ventilation is initiated to prevent iodine and
 
particulate contamination of the main control room air.
 
10.13.4  Description
 
The main control room air conditioning system consists of
 
ventilation air supply fans (normal), emergency air supply fans, air conditioning supply and return fans, filters, heating coils
 
and cooling coils, refrigerant water chillers, chilled water
 
pumps, dampers, duct work, instrumentation, and controls (Drawing
 
M-384).
 
Outside air is drawn through a filter by a fresh air supply fan
 
and is discharged to the inlet of the air conditioning supply fan
 
suction, and is then discharged to duct work leading to the main
 
control room and adjacent offices. This air is conditioned to
 
maintain a controlled temperature environment using heating and 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.13-2 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 cooling coils. Humidity is conditioned during periods of auxiliary boiler operation. Normally, control room air is
 
recirculated by one of two return air fans. These fans take a suction from the north and south ends of the control room and
 
discharge to the air conditioning supply fan suction with filtered
 
outside air from the fresh air supply fans.
 
The control room heating coils are supplied from the auxiliary
 
steam supply. Cooling is provided by a chilled water system
 
consisting of two 100% chiller units, two 100% chilled water
 
pumps, and a piping system which also supplies chilled water to
 
the cable spreading room fan-coil supply unit and the health
 
physics and chemistry labs fan-coil supply unit. The fresh air
 
supply fans, both normal and emergency, are operable from the
 
standby power supply during the loss of offsite power. The
 
control room chiller and air conditioning supply and return fans
 
do not run following loss of offsite power. The instrumentation
 
and control for the main control room air conditioning system is
 
designed for automatic operation. One fresh air supply fan, one
 
air conditioning supply fan, and one return air fan are normally
 
in operation. Emergency cooling and ventilation systems for the
 
control room and other safety-related equipment rooms are
 
installed in seismic Class I structures and are provided with 100
 
percent redundancy. Monitoring and adjustment of the control room
 
emergency ventilation system air flow may be performed locally. 
 
If an operating fan fails, the loss of duct pressure is sensed and
 
the standby fan starts automatically, the associated fan dampers
 
open, and an alarm sounds in the control room. Fans may also be
 
started manually.
 
A radiation monitoring system in the fresh air intake duct work
 
monitors the radioactivity level in the incoming outside air. This
 
system includes two flow switches that monitor air flow through
 
the fresh air intake duct work. If a high activity level or loss
 
of flow is detected, the operating normal fresh air supply fan
 
stops, one emergency air supply fan starts, and the air
 
conditioning supply and return air fans shut down. The air is
 
diverted through one of the two high efficiency and charcoal
 
filter trains automatically. The monitor also annunciates in the
 
control room. If a high-high activity level is detected, the
 
monitor will indicate in the control room.
 
The control room is capable of being purged with 100 percent
 
outside air. A once-through flow is established using the air
 
conditioning supply fans, with the return air fans discharging to
 
atmosphere at the radwaste building roof.
 
CHAPTER 10 10.13-3 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 10.13.4.1Control Room Habitability The primary design function of the Main Control Room (MCR) / Main
 
Control Room Emergency Ventilation (MCREV) System is to provide a
 
safe environment in which the operator can keep the nuclear
 
reactor and auxiliary systems under control during normal
 
operations and can safely shut down those systems during abnormal
 
situations to protect the health and safety of the public and
 
plant workers.
 
Technical Specifications 3.7.4 and its Bases are in place to
 
ensure that appropriate equipment is maintained operable and
 
inoperabilities are managed through compensatory actions and other
 
plant actions.
 
A Control Room Envelope (CRE) Habitability Program is required by
 
Technical Specifications 5.5.13. The program is established and
 
implemented to ensure that the CRE habitability is maintained such
 
that, with an operable MCREV system, CRE occupants can control the
 
reactor safely under normal conditions and maintain it in a safe
 
condition following a radiological event, hazardous chemical
 
release as applicable, or a smoke challenge. The program shall
 
ensure that adequate radiation protection is provided to permit
 
access and occupancy of the CRE under design basis accident (DBA)
 
conditions without personnel receiving radiation exposures in
 
excess of 5 rem total effective does equivalent (TEDE) for the
 
duration of the accident. The program includes elements required
 
by Technical Specification 5.5.13.
 
As a result of Technical Specification 3.7.4 and 5.5.13
 
requirements, PBAPS is committed to applicable portions of NRC Reg
 
Guide 1.197, NRC Reg Guide 1.196 as invoked by the Technical
 
Specifications or its Bases. PBAPS is committed to NRC Reg Guide
 
1.78 (6/74) and NRC Reg Guide 1.95 (2/75), as applicable, for
 
hazardous chemical assessments. The computer code HABIT is
 
utilized for hazardous chemical assessments, which was approved in
 
Revision 1 of Reg Guide 1.78. This is an exception to Revision 0, to which PBAPS remains committed. Additionally, Peach Bottom performs hazardous chemical assessments by probabilistic analysis in accordance with NUREG-0800, Standard Review Plan, Section 2.2.3.
10.13.5  Safety Evaluation
 
The fresh air portion of the main control room ventilation system
 
permits continuous occupancy of the main control room
 
under normal and accident conditions, including maximum credible
 
earthquake, contaminated outside air, and loss of offsite power.
 
The system has sufficient redundancy to maintain uninterrupted
 
main control room ventilation for personnel occupancy and 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.13-4 REV. 26, APRIL 2017 instrument operability. Evaluation as to the expected dose rates under the design basis accident conditions is included in
 
paragraph 12.3.4.
 
10.13.6  Inspection and Testing
 
The main control room air conditioning system is proven operable
 
by its use during normal plant operation. Portions of the system
 
normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure operability and
 
integrity of the system. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.14-1 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 10.14  EMERGENCY VENTILATING SYSTEM 10.14.1 Safety Objective  
 
The safety objective of the emergency ventilating systems is to  
 
maintain suitable temperatures in the plant engineered safeguards  
 
equipment rooms for equipment protection.  
 
10.14.2 Safety Design Basis  
: 1. The systems protect the safeguards equipment against overheating.  
: 2. Selected systems shall be provided with redundant components for reliable operation.  
: 3. The equipment is provided with alternate power supplies in the event of loss of offsite power.  
: 4. The equipment is designed to seismic Class I criteria.  
 
10.14.3 Description  
 
The emergency ventilating systems include the following:  
: 1. Emergency switchgear and battery rooms.  
: 2. Standby diesel generator rooms.  
: 3. Pump structure ventilation system (ESW/HPSW Compartment).  
: 4. Pump rooms for the RHR, RCIC, HPCI, and core spray pumps.
: 4. Pump rooms for the RHR, RCIC, HPCI, and core spray pumps.
The reactor building heating and ventilating system normally  
The reactor building heating and ventilating system normally supplies ventilation air to the RHR, RCIC, HPCI, and core spray pump rooms (paragraph 5.3.2).
 
10.14.3.1   Emergency Switchgear and Battery Rooms The system consists of a common air supply system and separate exhaust systems for emergency switchgear and battery rooms (Drawing M-399). Outdoor air is filtered, conditioned by heating coils when required, and discharged by one of the two supply fans to the emergency switchgear and battery rooms of Units 2 and 3.
supplies ventilation air to the RHR, RCIC, HPCI, and core spray  
One of the two emergency switchgear room return air fans exhaust air to atmosphere at the radwaste building roof or back to the suction of the supply fan as controlled by an air-operated damper.
 
One of the two battery room exhaust fans discharges exhaust air from the battery rooms to atmosphere at the radwaste building CHAPTER 10                   10.14-1              REV. 21, APRIL 2007
pump rooms (paragraph 5.3.2).  
 
10.14.3.1 Emergency Switchgear and Battery Rooms  
 
The system consists of a common air supply system and separate  
 
exhaust systems for emergency switchgear and battery rooms (Drawing M-399). Outdoor air is filtered, conditioned by heating  
 
coils when required, and discharged by one of the two supply fans  
 
to the emergency switchgear and battery rooms of Units 2 and 3.
 
One of the two emergency switchgear room return air fans exhaust  
 
air to atmosphere at the radwaste building roof or back to the suction of the supply fan as controlled by an air-operated damper.  
 
One of the two battery room exhaust fans discharges exhaust air  
 
from the battery rooms to atmosphere at the radwaste building
 
CHAPTER 10 10.14-2 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 roof. Loss of duct pressure automatically starts standby fans and sounds an alarm in the main control room.
 
The equipment is installed in a seismic Class I structure adjacent


to the main control room. The ventilation system is normally in  
PBAPS UFSAR roof. Loss of duct pressure automatically starts standby fans and sounds an alarm in the main control room.
The equipment is installed in a seismic Class I structure adjacent to the main control room. The ventilation system is normally in operation and continues to operate during accident conditions including the loss of offsite power. All system controls are from a local panel. Redundant fans are provided for reliable system operation. A seismically supported, safety grade, pneumatic supply has been provided to maintain the dampers open in accident conditions.
10.14.3.2  Standby Diesel Generator Rooms Each standby diesel generator room is provided with ventilation air supply fans and an exhaust relief damper (Drawing M-385).
Combustion air for the diesel engine is taken from the room. The ventilation systems are supplied with power from the diesels during the loss of offsite power.
10.14.3.3  ESW/HPSW Compartments The ESW/HPSW compartment housing the high pressure service water pumps, emergency service water pumps, fire pumps, and service water screen wash pumps is provided with a ventilation supply and exhaust system in each of the two seismic Class I compartments.
The ventilation system is supplied with standby power during the loss of offsite power. Redundant ventilation equipment is furnished in each compartment for uninterrupted service. The pump structure ventilation system for each HPSW subsystem is single failure proof.
10.14.4  Safety Evaluation The emergency equipment rooms are provided with cooling and ventilating systems with sufficient redundancy to ensure proper operation of equipment during normal and accident conditions. In addition, equipment is designed and installed in accordance with seismic Class I criteria and is supplied with normal and standby power.
10.14.5  Inspection and Testing The emergency ventilating systems are proved operable by use during normal plant operation. The effectiveness of the energy removal from the local environments can be evaluated by measuring the compartment air temperatures where the equipment is located.
Portions of the systems normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure operability and integrity of these systems.
CHAPTER 10                  10.14-2            REV. 21, APRIL 2007


operation and continues to operate during accident conditions
PBAPS UFSAR The instantaneous auxiliary relays used to sequence the diesel generator room vent supply fans and the residual heat removal compartment fan coolers during a LOCA (with offsite power available) will be tested in accordance with surveillance test procedures. The test will verify the settings, operability, and functional performance of the relays, and will provide assurance that the automatic loading sequence is being maintained and will perform as required.
CHAPTER 10                10.14-3              REV. 21, APRIL 2007


including the loss of offsite power. All system controls are from
PBAPS UFSAR 10.15  PLANT HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS 10.15.1  Power Generation Objective The power generation objective of the plant heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems is to control the plant air temperatures and the flow of airborne radioactive contaminants to ensure the operability of plant equipment and the accessibility and habitability of plant buildings.
10.15.2  Power Generation Design Basis The plant heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems:
: 1. Provide appropriate temperature control for personnel comfort and equipment performance.
: 2. Provide sufficient filtered fresh air supply for personnel.
: 3. Provide air movement patterns from areas of lesser to areas of progressively greater contamination potential prior to final exhaust.
: 4. Minimize the possibility of plant exhaust air recirculation into the plant air intake.
10.15.3  Description 10.15.3.1  General The plant heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems provide heated or cooled air to main areas of the plant. Supply air temperature is controlled by heating coils and cooling coils.
Generally, airflow is routed from areas of lesser to areas of progressively greater contamination potential prior to final exhaust. Also, the ventilation system has sufficient design capacity to protect equipment from excessive temperatures.
The exhaust ventilation air from the turbine building and radwaste building is discharged to atmosphere from the ventilation stack above the reactor building roof. Exhaust from areas where radioactive particulate may be present, such as equipment rooms, is not recirculated but is exhausted through high-efficiency filters to atmosphere. Clean exhaust air from other plant areas is not filtered prior to being released to atmosphere.
The reactor building heating and ventilating system is described in paragraph 5.3.2. The main control room air conditioning system is described in subsection 10.13, and the emergency heating and ventilating systems are described in subsection 10.14.
CHAPTER 10                  10.15-1              REV. 21, APRIL 2007


a local panel. Redundant fans are provided for reliable system  
PBAPS UFSAR 10.15.3.2  Turbine Building The ventilation system supplies filtered and tempered outdoor air to the operating floor, main condenser area, and equipment compartments (Drawing M-387). The main condenser area is maintained at a slight negative pressure to reduce exfiltration of potential radioactive contaminants to the adjacent areas.
Ventilation air to the operating floor is recirculated or exhausted as required to maintain space temperature. The exhaust air from the operating floor and the main condenser area is discharged to the atmosphere through the ventilation stack located at the top of the reactor building. Air from potentially contaminated equipment compartments is exhausted through high-efficiency filters prior to release to the atmosphere at the ventilation stack. Supplementary cooling in the main condenser area and condensate pump room is provided by fan-coil units using service water for cooling. Additionally, unit heaters are provided in various areas for equipment freeze protection.
10.15.3.3  Radwaste Building The ventilation system for the radwaste building maintains a supply of filtered and tempered fresh air to all areas of the radwaste building (Drawing M-389). Generally, air is distributed from areas of lesser to areas of progressively higher contamination.
Two exhaust systems are used: normal and equipment compartment exhaust. The normal exhaust is unfiltered and is discharged to atmosphere at the reactor building roof through the ventilation stack. The equipment compartment exhaust air is filtered prior to release to atmosphere from the ventilation stack. Air vented from tanks containing radioactive liquids is exhausted through high-efficiency filters prior to joining the equipment compartment exhaust duct work.
10.15.3.4  Miscellaneous Rooms and Buildings The cable spreading room, located beneath the main control room, is provided with its own supply and exhaust fans, filters, heating and cooling coils, duct work, instrumentation, and controls.
Redundancy in the number of fans provides continued operation of the system. These fans shut down on a loss of offsite power.
The computer room, located in the cable spreading room area, is provided with self-contained air conditioning units, filters, and controls to maintain constant temperature and humidity in the room. These units operate from the standby power supply during a loss of offsite power.
CHAPTER 10                  10.15-2            REV. 21, APRIL 2007


operation. A seismically supported, safety grade, pneumatic
PBAPS UFSAR The administration building, chemical laboratory rooms, shop and warehouse building, water treatment building, and other structures in the plant are provided with separate conventional heating, ventilating, and/or air conditioning system.
10.15.4  Inspection and Testing The plant heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems are proved operable by their use during normal plant operation.
Portions of the systems normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure operability and integrity of the systems.
CHAPTER 10                  10.15-3              REV. 21, APRIL 2007


supply has been provided to maintain the dampers open in accident
PBAPS UFSAR 10.16  MAKEUP WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM 10.16.1  Power Generation Objective The power generation objective of the plant makeup water treatment system is to provide a supply of water suitable as makeup for the plant and reactor systems and other water requirements.
10.16.2  Power Generation Design Basis The makeup water treatment system is designed to provide reactor quality water for pre-operational tests, startup, and normal power operation.
10.16.3  Description The makeup water treatment system is common to Units 2 and 3 (Drawings M-317 and M-319).
The makeup water treatment system receives river water from the service water system. The system consists of a raw water treatment system, a clarified water storage tank, a makeup demineralizer system, a demineralized water tank, and associated pumps, piping, and instrumentation.
The raw water treatment system consists of skid mounted equipment that is vendor supplied and operated. This equipment produces up to 400 gpm of clarified and filtered water with a nominal flow of 200 gpm for use in the makeup demineralizer system, domestic water, and other uses. This water is pumped to a 200,000 gallon clarified water storage tank. The clarified and filtered water is continuously monitored by vendor supplied turbidity and pH measuring devices which initiate an alarm on a vendor panel.
The makeup water demineralizer system consists of three feed pumps taking suction on the clarified water storage tank and discharging to vendor supplied ultra pure water equipment. The discharge from the ultra pure water equipment goes to a 50,000-gal demineralized water storage tank. The discharge to the storage tank is monitored for quality by conductivity measuring devices which initiate an alarm on a local panel. Also, silica content is continuously monitored and recorded. The quality of water discharged to the storage tank is controlled to maintain water within the limits specified in EPRI BWR Water Chemistry Guidelines.
The piping, tanks, and associated equipment of the demineralized water treatment system are of corrosion-resistant metals which prevent contamination of the makeup water with foreign material.
CHAPTER 10                  10.16-1            REV. 23, APRIL 2011


conditions.  
PBAPS UFSAR 10.16.4  Inspection and Testing The makeup water treatment system is an operational system in daily use and as such does not require testing to ensure operability. High demineralizer effluent conductivity automatically initiates an alarm. Grab samples are tested in the laboratory to check demineralizer performance and to ascertain stored water quality.
CHAPTER 10                  10.16-2            REV. 23, APRIL 2011


10.14.3.2  Standby Diesel Generator Rooms
PBAPS UFSAR 10.17  INSTRUMENT AIR, SERVICE AIR, AND INSTRUMENT NITROGEN SYSTEMS 10.17.1  Safety Objective The safety objective of the instrument air, service air, and instrument nitrogen systems is to provide a safety grade, pneumatic supply to support short-term and long-term operations of safety equipment.
10.17.2  Safety Design Basis
: 1. The containment atmospheric control system containment purge and vent isolation valves are each provided with a backup, safety grade, pneumatic (nitrogen) supply to the valves' inflatable seals.
: 2. The containment isolation and flow control valves in the CAD vent lines are each provided with a separate, backup, safety grade, pneumatic (nitrogen) supply. The control valves in the CADS supply are provided with a safety grade supply of nitrogen from the CADS nitrogen supply.
: 3. The ADS valves are provided with a separate short-term, safety grade, pneumatic supply and also a long-term, backup, safety grade, pneumatic supply of nitrogen. To fulfill the requirements of Appendix R to 10CFR, Part 50 manual actions may be performed to connect a back-up safety grade pnuematic nitrogen supply to enable remote operation of safety relief valves. See FPP Table A-4 for actions required to credit this pneumatic supply.
: 4. A separate short-term, backup, safety grade, pneumatic supply is provided to each of the MSIVs.
: 5. The suppression chamber-to-secondary containment vacuum breaker air-operated valves are each provided with a backup, safety grade, pneumatic supply.
: 6. The emergency switchgear and battery room dampers are provided with a backup, safety grade, pneumatic supply.
10.17.3   Power Generation Objective The power generation objective of the instrument air and service air systems is to supply suitable quality air at adequate pressure for power plant operation.
CHAPTER 10                  10.17-1              REV. 25, APRIL 2015


Each standby diesel generator room is provided with ventilation
PBAPS UFSAR 10.17.4  Power Generation Design Basis
: 1. The instrument air system supplies clean, dry, oil-free air, nominally at 100 psig, to station instrumentation and controls.
: 2. The service air system supplies clean air, nominally at 100 psig, for station services.
: 3. Standby onsite power is provided to the backup air compressors, following a loss of offsite power, to replenish compressed air storage as required. This design feature exists although the heat sink, emergency service water (ESW), for the reactor building closed cooling water (RBCCW) system has been eliminated as a result of locking closed the ESW-RBCCW cross tie valves.
Therefore, little, if any, cooling would be provided to the backup air compressors during a loss of offsite power.
: 4. Service air use is restricted during emergency conditions so that the instrument air supply shall not be impaired.
: 5. Two separate systems are provided for each unit for the condensate filter demineralizer backwash operations.
: 6. Instrument nitrogen/instrument air is provided to the MSIV's for maintaining the valves open when operating the steam cycle.
: 7. A separate air supply system is provided to selected radwaste equipment.
10.17.5  Description The instrument air and service air systems (Drawing M-320) consist of four air compressors per unit operating in parallel to supply common discharge headers via individual air receiver tanks, piping, valves, and instrumentation. The instrument and service air systems of Units 2 and 3 can be crosstied.
Two of the three larger compressors (650 SCFM) normally supply all compressed air requirements for one reactor unit during normal operation. The three larger compressors are fed from non-1E power sources. During emergency conditions when neither station nor offsite power are available, the smaller (419 SCFM) compressor, which is fed by a Class 1E power source, is designed to provide desired operational flexibility. This design feature exists although the heat sink, emergency service water (ESW), for the CHAPTER 10                  10.17-2              REV. 25, APRIL 2015


air supply fans and an exhaust relief damper (Drawing M-385).  
PBAPS UFSAR reactor building closed cooling water (RBCCW) system has been eliminated as a result of locking closed the ESW-RBCCW cross tie valves. Therefore, little, if any, cooling would be provided to the air compressors during a loss of offsite power.
The instrument air compressors normally operate (load and unload) within a pressure range of approximately 10 psi. The service air compressor, which can feed either of the instrument air headers and the service air header, operates over approximately a 15 psi range so that it will not assume control from the instrument air compressors. In the unlikely event that header pressure decays to 97 psig, an air operated valve in the supply to the service air header will close, thus utilizing the instrument and service air compressors for instrument air only. The duty status of all three compressors can be changed to allow for maintenance and equalization of wear. During a loss of station or offsite power, only the 419 SCFM compressor (backup compressor), is fed by diesel backed power. This design feature exists although the heat sink, emergency service water (ESW), for the reactor building closed cooling water (RBCCW) system has been eliminated as a result of locking closed the ESW-RBCCW cross tie valves. Therefore, little, if any, cooling would be provided to the air compressors during a loss of offsite power. During a LOCA event the affected unit's backup compressor will trip if running or will be prevented from starting for 60 seconds. Identical backup compressors are provided for each unit, and manual crossties are provided so that either or both backup compressors can be utilized to supply either unit. A single backup compressor is sufficient to supply operational flexibility for one unit during shutdown following a LOOP and/or LOCA.
Each of the four compressors is of the 2-stage oil-free rotary screw design. These compressors are water cooled and are complete packaged units, incorporating an inter-cooler, after-cooler, oil cooler, bleed-off cooler, and all controls and instrumentation in a single sound attenuating enclosure. "Compressor trouble" alarms actuated by any compressor trip functions are provided both in the control room and locally on the compressors.
The lead compressors are rated at 691 ACFM at 125 psig maximum and utilize a 150 HP motor with a 1.15 service factor. The backup compressors are rated at 456 ACFM at 125 psig maximum and utilize a 100 HP motor with a 1.15 service factor. All compressor motors are capable of starting and accelerating at 75% of nominal voltage.
The prefilters of the air dryer are the coalescing type and are designed to remove effluent to 0.0013 ppmw. The dual tower instrument air dryer package is rated at 900 scfm, is of the heatless design and utilizes activated alumina desiccant for absorption of moisture. The dryer is designed for a discharge dew CHAPTER 10                10.17-3              REV. 25, APRIL 2015


Combustion air for the diesel engine is taken from the room. The
PBAPS UFSAR point of -40F. Each dryer incorporates a moisture sensing control which measures the actual moisture load present on the desiccant during each cycle. It then limits the number of regeneration (purge) cycles to only those required to remove moisture to maintain the required outlet dew point. The after filters are designed to remove particulate to 0.9 micron absolute.
Also incorporated in the dryer skid package are a flow meter and a dew point analyzer. The flow meter is provided with flow recording and totalizing capabilities to enable continuous monitoring of plant air usage. The dew point meter gives a continuous readout of moisture level. There are local alarms on each dryer skid to indicate high differential pressure across the prefilters, high moisture content in the outlet air, and dryer control malfunctions. There is one common alarm window per unit, located on C212L in the control room, to indicate an alarm condition exists on either of the two dryer skids for that unit.
The discharge from the dryer package than passes to the plant instrument air headers.
Breathing air stations are provided with air from the service air system headers.
Since the air is supplied by non-lubricated compressors, the instrument air system is supplied with clean, dry, oil-free air for use by instrumentation and controls. This system supplies air to the main steam isolation valves external to containment. The main steam isolation valves are provided with accumulators for reliable operation without compressor operation.
The control rod hydraulic control system air requirement is for scram reset purposes only, and its demand is met by the CRDS storage capacity. Other pneumatic-operated devices are also designed for the fail-safe mode, and do not require a continuous air supply under abnormal conditions.
The Condensate Filter Demineralizer backwash operation employs the use of two separate air backwash systems. The primary system is a high pressure air surge system which uses a non-lubricated, two stage, water cooled compressor rated at 200 scfm at 200 psig.
Each unit has two separate receiver tanks (150 ft3 each) which are cross-tied to allow either compressor to charge both units. In addition each unit is provided with a backup low pressure air scrub backwash system using low pressure centrifugal blowers rated at 1400 scfm.
The containment atmospheric control system purge and vent valves are supplied with separate safety grade pneumatic supplies to the inflatable seals to maintain their leaktight condition. The source of this pneumatic supply is from the Safety Grade CHAPTER 10                10.17-4              REV. 25, APRIL 2015


ventilation systems are supplied with power from the diesels
PBAPS UFSAR Instrument Gas (SGIG) system. The SGIG supplies pressurized nitrogen gas from the CAD tank as a backup to normal instrument air. The safety grade pneumatic supply is isolated from the nonsafety grade portion of the air supply by spring-loaded, soft-seat, check valves designed for zero leakage. The purge and vent valves alarm upon opening or on loss of seal pressure.
The suppression chamber-to-secondary containment vacuum breaker air-operated valves are each supplied with separate, safety grade, pneumatic supplies. There are two suppression chamber-to-secondary containment vacuum breaker lines on each unit. Each line is provided with a normally closed, fail open, air-operated butterfly valve. Each of these valves is provided with a safety grade pneumatic supply in order to maintain valve closure. One valve on each unit is equipped with an inflatable seal which is also supplied by the safety grade pneumatic supply. These valves alarm upon opening or, for the valves equipped with the inflatable seal, on loss of seal pressure. The source of this pneumatic supply is from the Safety Grade Instrument Gas (SGIG) system. The SGIG supplies pressurized nitrogen gas from the CAD tank as a backup to normal instrument air. The safety grade pneumatic supply is isolated from the nonsafety grade portion of the air supply by spring-loaded, soft-seat, check valves designed for zero leakage.
The safety grade supply to the CADS valves is described in paragraph 5.2.3.9 of subsection 5.2.
A separate air supply system is provided to selected radwaste equipment; the system contains two air compressors, associated controls, a receiver, and separate piping to connect the air supply to the equipment. This system eliminates the potential of service air system contamination in other areas of the plant due to backflow from radwaste equipment.
The ADS accumulators, which provide the short-term, backup, safety grade supply, and their long-term, safety grade, pneumatic supply are described in paragraph 4.4.5 of subsection 4.4.
An MSIV accumulator is located close to each isolation valve to provide pneumatic pressure for valve closing in the event of failure of the normal, non-safety grade, air supply system. The accumulator volumes are designed for inboard and outboard isolation valves when the normal pneumatic supply to the accumulator has failed. The supply line to the accumulator is large enough to make up pressure to the accumulator at a rate faster than the rate the valve operation bleeds pressure from the accumulator during valve opening and closing. The air supply lines are provided with check valves to assure the integrity of the accumulator air supplies.
CHAPTER 10                10.17-5              REV. 25, APRIL 2015


during the loss of offsite power.  
PBAPS UFSAR In order to eliminate the introduction of compressed air into the containment and to minimize the need for venting and discharge of the primary containment gases to the environment, an instrument nitrogen system is provided for pneumatic service to ensure the oxygen concentration is maintained less than 5 percent inside the drywell (Drawing M-333, Sheets 1 and 2).
Essentially, this system takes suction from the containment nitrogen atmosphere and discharge to a receiver which will be the source of supply for the required pneumatic services inside the drywell. In this manner, no air will be added to the containment atmosphere, but rather the containment nitrogen atmosphere will be recycled, with any losses of nitrogen made up by the normal inerting system.
The instrument nitrogen system lines are seismic Class I from the containment penetrations to the second isolation valve, and have automatic isolation valves which function as part of the primary containment and reactor vessel isolation control system when required.
Pneumatically operated devices located within the primary containment are normally operated by the instrument nitrogen system. A cross connection is provided between the instrument air system and the instrument nitrogen system to service the components in the primary containment should the instrument nitrogen system be inoperable. Additionally, vital components, such as the main steam isolation valves and main steam relief valves, are provided with accumulators for reliable operation without compressor operation.
The emergency switchgear and battery room dampers are supplied with safety grade pneumatic supplies to maintain the dampers open.
The source of the pneumatic supply is nitrogen cylinders. The safety grade pneumatic supply is isolated from the non-safety grade potion of the air supply by spring-loaded, soft seat, check valves. The safety grade supply to the E.S.G.B.R. dampers is described in paragraph 10.14.3.1.
10.17.6  Safety Evaluation The safety grade, pneumatic supplies to the essential valves of the CADS are provided so that the system can supply post-LOCA nitrogen addition to the containment and can facilitate controlled venting of containment. The safety evaluation for the CADS is contained in paragraph 5.2.3.9.
The safety grade, pneumatic supply to the containment purge and vent valves is provided to maintain pressure in the inflatable CHAPTER 10                  10.17-6            REV. 25, APRIL 2015


10.14.3.3  ESW/HPSW Compartments
PBAPS UFSAR valve seats to assure leaktight conditions. The safety evaluation is contained in paragraphs 5.2.3.7 and 5.2.4.
 
The safety grade, pneumatic supply to each of the suppression chamber-to-secondary containment vacuum breaker butterfly valve is provided to maintain valve closure. It also provides the pneumatic supply to the inflatable seal utilized in one of the valves on each unit. The safety evaluation is contained in paragraphs 5.2.3.6 and 5.2.4.
The ESW/HPSW compartment housing the high pressure service water
Each ADS valve is provided with a short-term, backup, safety grade, pneumatic supply by means of its associated accumulator and check valve to provide sufficient capacity to cycle the valve open five times at atmosphere pressure, twice at 70% of containment design pressure, or once at containment design pressure, all within a 4-hour period.
 
A long-term, backup, safety grade, pneumatic supply has been provided to the ADS valve accumulators inside the primary containment to assure ADS valve operability for a period of 100 days following an accident.
pumps, emergency service water pumps, fire pumps, and service
A split ring header is installed inside the containment with three ADS valves connected to one section of the split header and the remaining two ADS valves connected to the other section of the split header. The safety grade, pneumatic pressure is a series of nitrogen cylinders located within the reactor building with a connection provided outside the reactor building for the installation of additional bottles, as required. Also, a long-term, backup, safety grade pneumatic nitrogen supply has been provided to SRVs RV2(3)-02-071E, H&J. This pneumatic supply is provided to enable remote operation of the above valves for a period of 72 hours following a Design Basis fire in Fire Areas 6S (Unit 2) and 13S (Unit 3) which has been postulated to render the ADS valves available for only short-term operation. The source of the pneumatic nitrogen supply is the Safety Grade Instrument Gas (SGIG) system. The SGIG system is tied into the 6,000 gallon liquid nitrogen tank which supplies the Containment Atmospheric Dilution (CAD) system. The CAD tank is located outside of Fire Areas 6S (Unit 2) and 13S (Unit 3).
 
Spare primary containment penetrations, two for each unit, have been modified to provide a permanent means of connection to each section of the safety grade, pneumatic supply headers within each drywell. Containment isolation has been provided for the instrument gas supply lines into containment by the use of check valves and other automatic valves outside the primary containment.
water screen wash pumps is provided with a ventilation supply and
The outer, automatic valves are manually controlled from the control room and automatically close on low differential pressure CHAPTER 10                  10.17-7            REV. 25, APRIL 2015
 
exhaust system in each of the two seismic Class I compartments.
 
The ventilation system is supplied with standby power during the  
 
loss of offsite power. Redundant ventilation equipment is  
 
furnished in each compartment for uninterrupted service. The pump
 
structure ventilation system for each HPSW subsystem is single
 
failure proof.  
 
10.14.4 Safety Evaluation
 
The emergency equipment rooms are provided with cooling and  
 
ventilating systems with sufficient redundancy to ensure proper
 
operation of equipment during normal and accident conditions. In
 
addition, equipment is designed and installed in accordance with
 
seismic Class I criteria and is supplied with normal and standby
 
power.  
 
10.14.5  Inspection and Testing
 
The emergency ventilating systems are proved operable by use
 
during normal plant operation. The effectiveness of the energy
 
removal from the local environments can  be evaluated by measuring
 
the compartment air temperatures where the equipment is located. 
 
Portions of the systems normally closed to flow can be tested to
 
ensure operability and integrity of these systems.  
 
CHAPTER 10 10.14-3 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 The instantaneous auxiliary relays used to sequence the diesel generator room vent supply fans and the residual heat removal
 
compartment fan coolers during a LOCA (with offsite power
 
available) will be tested in accordance with surveillance test
 
procedures. The test will verify the settings, operability, and
 
functional performance of the relays, and will provide assurance
 
that the automatic loading sequence is being maintained and will
 
perform as required. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.15-1 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 10.15  PLANT HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS 10.15.1  Power Generation Objective
 
The power generation objective of the plant heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems is to control the plant air
 
temperatures and the flow of airborne radioactive contaminants to
 
ensure the operability of plant equipment and the accessibility
 
and habitability of plant buildings.
 
10.15.2  Power Generation Design Basis  
 
The plant heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems:
: 1. Provide appropriate temperature control for personnel comfort and equipment performance.
: 2. Provide sufficient filtered fresh air supply for personnel.
: 3. Provide air movement patterns from areas of lesser to areas of progressively greater contamination potential
 
prior to final exhaust.  
: 4. Minimize the possibility of plant exhaust air recirculation into the plant air intake.
 
10.15.3  Description
 
10.15.3.1  General
 
The plant heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems
 
provide heated or cooled air to main areas of the plant. Supply
 
air temperature is controlled by heating coils and cooling coils.  
 
Generally, airflow is routed from areas of lesser to areas of
 
progressively greater contamination potential prior to final
 
exhaust. Also, the ventilation system has sufficient design
 
capacity to protect equipment from excessive temperatures.  
 
The exhaust ventilation air from the turbine building and radwaste
 
building is discharged to atmosphere from the ventilation stack
 
above the reactor building roof. Exhaust from areas where
 
radioactive particulate may be present, such as equipment rooms, is not recirculated but is exhausted through high-efficiency
 
filters to atmosphere. Clean exhaust air from other plant areas
 
is not filtered prior to being released to atmosphere.
 
The reactor building heating and ventilating system is described
 
in paragraph 5.3.2. The main control room air conditioning system
 
is described in subsection 10.13, and the emergency heating and
 
ventilating systems are described in subsection 10.14. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.15-2 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 10.15.3.2  Turbine Building
 
The ventilation system supplies filtered and tempered outdoor air
 
to the operating floor, main condenser area, and equipment
 
compartments (Drawing M-387). The main condenser area is
 
maintained at a slight negative pressure to reduce exfiltration of
 
potential radioactive contaminants to the adjacent areas.
 
Ventilation air to the operating floor is recirculated or
 
exhausted as required to maintain space temperature. The exhaust
 
air from the operating floor and the main condenser area is
 
discharged to the atmosphere through the ventilation stack located
 
at the top of the reactor building. Air from potentially
 
contaminated equipment compartments is exhausted through high-
 
efficiency filters prior to release to the atmosphere at the
 
ventilation stack. Supplementary cooling in the main condenser
 
area and condensate pump room is provided by fan-coil units using
 
service water for cooling. Additionally, unit heaters are
 
provided in various areas for equipment freeze protection.
 
10.15.3.3  Radwaste Building
 
The ventilation system for the radwaste building maintains a
 
supply of filtered and tempered fresh air to all areas of the
 
radwaste building (Drawing M-389). Generally, air is distributed
 
from areas of lesser to areas of progressively higher
 
contamination.
 
Two exhaust systems are used:  normal and equipment compartment
 
exhaust. The normal exhaust is unfiltered and is discharged to
 
atmosphere at the reactor building roof through the ventilation
 
stack. The equipment compartment exhaust air is filtered prior to
 
release to atmosphere from the ventilation stack. Air vented from
 
tanks containing radioactive liquids is exhausted through high-
 
efficiency filters prior to joining the equipment compartment
 
exhaust duct work.
 
10.15.3.4  Miscellaneous Rooms and Buildings
 
The cable spreading room, located beneath the main control room, is provided with its own supply and exhaust fans, filters, heating
 
and cooling coils, duct work, instrumentation, and controls. 
 
Redundancy in the number of fans provides continued operation of
 
the system. These fans shut down on a loss of offsite power.
 
The computer room, located in the cable spreading room area, is
 
provided with self-contained air conditioning units, filters, and
 
controls to maintain constant temperature and humidity in the
 
room. These units operate from the standby power supply during a
 
loss of offsite power. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.15-3 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 The administration building, chemical laboratory rooms, shop and
 
warehouse building, water treatment building, and other structures
 
in the plant are provided with separate conventional heating, ventilating, and/or air conditioning system.
 
10.15.4  Inspection and Testing
 
The plant heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems are
 
proved operable by their use during normal plant operation.
 
Portions of the systems normally closed to flow can be tested to
 
ensure operability and integrity of the systems. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.16-1 REV. 23, APRIL 2011 10.16  MAKEUP WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM 10.16.1  Power Generation Objective
 
The power generation objective of the plant makeup water treatment
 
system is to provide a supply of water suitable as makeup for the
 
plant and reactor systems and other water requirements.
 
10.16.2  Power Generation Design Basis
 
The makeup water treatment system is designed to provide reactor
 
quality water for pre-operational tests, startup, and normal power
 
operation.
 
10.16.3  Description
 
The makeup water treatment system is common to Units 2 and 3 (Drawings M-317 and M-319).
 
The makeup water treatment system receives river water from the
 
service water system. The system consists of a raw water
 
treatment system, a clarified water storage tank, a makeup
 
demineralizer system, a demineralized water tank, and associated
 
pumps, piping, and instrumentation.
 
The raw water treatment system consists of skid mounted equipment that is vendor supplied and operated. This equipment produces up to 400 gpm of clarified and filtered water with a nominal flow of 200 gpm for use in the makeup demineralizer system, domestic water, and other uses. This water is pumped to a 200,000 gallon clarified water storage tank. The clarified and filtered water is continuously monitored by vendor supplied turbidity and pH measuring devices which initiate an alarm on a vendor panel.
 
The makeup water demineralizer system consists of three feed pumps
 
taking suction on the clarified water storage tank and discharging
 
to vendor supplied ultra pure water equipment. The discharge from
 
the ultra pure water equipment goes to a 50,000-gal demineralized
 
water storage tank. The discharge to the storage tank is
 
monitored for quality by conductivity measuring devices which
 
initiate an alarm on a local panel. Also, silica content is
 
continuously monitored and recorded. The quality of water
 
discharged to the storage tank is controlled to maintain water
 
within the limits specified in EPRI BWR Water Chemistry
 
Guidelines.
 
The piping, tanks, and associated equipment of the demineralized
 
water treatment system are of corrosion-resistant metals which
 
prevent contamination of the makeup water with foreign material.
 
CHAPTER 10 10.16-2 REV. 23, APRIL 2011 10.16.4  Inspection and Testing The makeup water treatment system is an operational system in
 
daily use and as such does not require testing to ensure
 
operability. High demineralizer effluent conductivity
 
automatically initiates an alarm. Grab samples are tested in the
 
laboratory to check demineralizer performance and to ascertain
 
stored water quality. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.17-1 REV. 25, APRIL 2015 10.17  INSTRUMENT AIR, SERVICE AIR, AND INSTRUMENT NITROGEN SYSTEMS  10.17.1  Safety Objective
 
The safety objective of the instrument air, service air, and
 
instrument nitrogen systems is to provide a safety grade, pneumatic supply to support short-term and long-term operations of
 
safety equipment.
 
10.17.2  Safety Design Basis
: 1. The containment atmospheric control system containment purge and vent isolation valves are each provided with a
 
backup, safety grade, pneumatic (nitrogen) supply to the
 
valves' inflatable seals.
: 2. The containment isolation and flow control valves in the CAD vent lines are each provided with a separate, backup, safety grade, pneumatic (nitrogen) supply. The
 
control valves in the CADS supply are provided with a
 
safety grade supply of nitrogen from the CADS nitrogen
 
supply. 
: 3. The ADS valves are provided with a separate short-term, safety grade, pneumatic supply and also a long-term, backup, safety grade, pneumatic supply of nitrogen. To
 
fulfill the requirements of Appendix R to 10CFR, Part 50
 
manual actions may be performed to connect a back-up
 
safety grade pnuematic nitrogen supply to enable remote
 
operation of safety relief valves. See FPP Table A-4
 
for actions required to credit this pneumatic supply.
: 4. A separate short-term, backup, safety grade, pneumatic supply is provided to each of the MSIVs.
: 5. The suppression chamber-to-secondary containment vacuum breaker air-operated valves are each provided with a
 
backup, safety grade, pneumatic supply.
: 6. The emergency switchgear and battery room dampers are provided with a backup, safety grade, pneumatic supply.
 
10.17.3  Power Generation Objective
 
The power generation objective of the instrument air and service
 
air systems is to supply suitable quality air at adequate pressure
 
for power plant operation. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.17-2 REV. 25, APRIL 2015 10.17.4  Power Generation Design Basis
: 1. The instrument air system supplies clean, dry, oil-free air, nominally at 100 psig, to station instrumentation
 
and controls.
: 2. The service air system supplies clean air, nominally at 100 psig, for station services.
: 3. Standby onsite power is provided to the backup air compressors, following a loss of offsite power, to
 
replenish compressed air storage as required. This
 
design feature exists although the heat sink, emergency
 
service water (ESW), for the reactor building closed
 
cooling water (RBCCW) system has been eliminated as a
 
result of locking closed the ESW-RBCCW cross tie valves.
 
Therefore, little, if any, cooling would be provided to
 
the backup air compressors during a loss of offsite
 
power. 
: 4. Service air use is restricted during emergency conditions so that the instrument air supply shall not
 
be impaired.
: 5. Two separate systems are provided for each unit for the condensate filter demineralizer backwash operations.
: 6. Instrument nitrogen/instrument air is provided to the MSIV's for maintaining the valves open when operating
 
the steam cycle.
: 7. A separate air supply system is provided to selected radwaste equipment.
 
10.17.5  Description
 
The instrument air and service air systems (Drawing M-320) consist
 
of four air compressors per unit operating in parallel to supply
 
common discharge headers via individual air receiver tanks, piping, valves, and instrumentation. The instrument and service
 
air systems of Units 2 and 3 can be crosstied.
 
Two of the three larger compressors (650 SCFM) normally supply all
 
compressed air requirements for one reactor unit during normal
 
operation. The three larger compressors are fed from non-1E power
 
sources. During emergency conditions when neither station nor
 
offsite power are available, the smaller (419 SCFM) compressor, which is fed by a Class 1E power source, is designed to provide
 
desired operational flexibility. This design feature exists
 
although the heat sink, emergency service water (ESW), for the 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.17-3 REV. 25, APRIL 2015 reactor building closed cooling water (RBCCW) system has been eliminated as a result of locking closed the ESW-RBCCW cross tie
 
valves. Therefore, little, if any, cooling would be provided to
 
the air compressors during a loss of offsite power.
 
The instrument air compressors normally operate (load and unload)
 
within a pressure range of approximately 10 psi. The service air
 
compressor, which can feed either of the instrument air headers
 
and the service air header, operates over approximately a 15 psi
 
range so that it will not assume control from the instrument air
 
compressors. In the unlikely event that header pressure decays to
 
97 psig, an air operated valve in the supply to the service air
 
header will close, thus utilizing the instrument and service air
 
compressors for instrument air only. The duty status of all three
 
compressors can be changed to allow for maintenance and
 
equalization of wear. During a loss of station or offsite power, only the 419 SCFM compressor (backup compressor), is fed by diesel
 
backed power. This design feature exists although the heat sink, emergency service water (ESW), for the reactor building closed
 
cooling water (RBCCW) system has been eliminated as a result of
 
locking closed the ESW-RBCCW cross tie valves. Therefore, little, if any, cooling would be provided to the air compressors during a
 
loss of offsite power. During a LOCA event the affected unit's
 
backup compressor will trip if running or will be prevented from
 
starting for 60 seconds. Identical backup compressors are
 
provided for each unit, and manual crossties are provided so that
 
either or both backup compressors can be utilized to supply either
 
unit. A single backup compressor is sufficient to supply
 
operational flexibility for one unit during shutdown following a
 
LOOP and/or LOCA.
 
Each of the four compressors is of the 2-stage oil-free rotary
 
screw design. These compressors are water cooled and are complete
 
packaged units, incorporating an inter-cooler, after-cooler, oil
 
cooler, bleed-off cooler, and all controls and instrumentation in
 
a single sound attenuating enclosure.  "Compressor trouble" alarms
 
actuated by any compressor trip functions are provided both in the
 
control room and locally on the compressors.
 
The lead compressors are rated at 691 ACFM at 125 psig maximum and
 
utilize a 150 HP motor with a 1.15 service factor. The backup
 
compressors are rated at 456 ACFM at 125 psig maximum and utilize
 
a 100 HP motor with a 1.15 service factor. All compressor motors
 
are capable of starting and accelerating at 75% of nominal
 
voltage.
 
The prefilters of the air dryer are the coalescing type and are
 
designed to remove effluent to 0.0013 ppmw. The dual tower
 
instrument air dryer package is rated at 900 scfm, is of the
 
heatless design and utilizes activated alumina desiccant for
 
absorption of moisture. The dryer is designed for a discharge dew 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.17-4 REV. 25, APRIL 2015 point of -40 F. Each dryer incorporates a moisture sensing control which measures the actual moisture load present on the desiccant during each cycle. It then limits the number of
 
regeneration (purge) cycles to only those required to remove
 
moisture to maintain the required outlet dew point. The after
 
filters are designed to remove particulate to 0.9 micron absolute.
 
Also incorporated in the dryer skid package are a flow meter and a
 
dew point analyzer. The flow meter is provided with flow
 
recording and totalizing capabilities to enable continuous
 
monitoring of plant air usage. The dew point meter gives a
 
continuous readout of moisture level. There are local alarms on
 
each dryer skid to indicate high differential pressure across the
 
prefilters, high moisture content in the outlet air, and dryer
 
control malfunctions. There is one common alarm window per unit, located on C212L in the control room, to indicate an alarm
 
condition exists on either of the two dryer skids for that unit. 
 
The discharge from the dryer package than passes to the plant
 
instrument air headers.
 
Breathing air stations are provided with air from the service air
 
system headers.
 
Since the air is supplied by non-lubricated compressors, the
 
instrument air system is supplied with clean, dry, oil-free air
 
for use by instrumentation and controls. This system supplies air
 
to the main steam isolation valves external to containment. The
 
main steam isolation valves are provided with accumulators for
 
reliable operation without compressor operation.
 
The control rod hydraulic control system air requirement is for
 
scram reset purposes only, and its demand is met by the CRDS
 
storage capacity. Other pneumatic-operated devices are also
 
designed for the fail-safe mode, and do not require a continuous
 
air supply under abnormal conditions.
 
The Condensate Filter Demineralizer backwash operation employs the
 
use of two separate air backwash systems. The primary system is a
 
high pressure air surge system which uses a non-lubricated, two
 
stage, water cooled compressor rated at 200 scfm at 200 psig. 
 
Each unit has two separate receiver tanks (150 ft 3 each) which are cross-tied to allow either compressor to charge both units. In
 
addition each unit is provided with a backup low pressure air
 
scrub backwash system using low pressure centrifugal blowers rated
 
at 1400 scfm.
 
The containment atmospheric control system purge and vent valves
 
are supplied with separate safety grade pneumatic supplies to the
 
inflatable seals to maintain their leaktight condition. The
 
source of this pneumatic supply is from the Safety Grade 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.17-5 REV. 25, APRIL 2015 Instrument Gas (SGIG) system. The SGIG supplies pressurized nitrogen gas from the CAD tank as a backup to normal instrument
 
air. The safety grade pneumatic supply is isolated from the
 
nonsafety grade portion of the air supply by spring-loaded, soft-
 
seat, check valves designed for zero leakage. The purge and vent
 
valves alarm upon opening or on loss of seal pressure.
 
The suppression chamber-to-secondary containment vacuum breaker
 
air-operated valves are each supplied with separate, safety grade, pneumatic supplies. There are two suppression chamber-to-
 
secondary containment vacuum breaker lines on each unit. Each
 
line is provided with a normally closed, fail open, air-operated
 
butterfly valve. Each of these valves is provided with a safety
 
grade pneumatic supply in order to maintain valve closure. One
 
valve on each unit is equipped with an inflatable seal which is
 
also supplied by the safety grade pneumatic supply. These valves
 
alarm upon opening or, for the valves equipped with the inflatable
 
seal, on loss of seal pressure. The source of this pneumatic
 
supply is from the Safety Grade Instrument Gas (SGIG) system. The
 
SGIG supplies pressurized nitrogen gas from the CAD tank as a
 
backup to normal instrument air. The safety grade pneumatic
 
supply is isolated from the nonsafety grade portion of the air
 
supply by spring-loaded, soft-seat, check valves designed for zero
 
leakage.
 
The safety grade supply to the CADS valves is described in
 
paragraph 5.2.3.9 of subsection 5.2.
 
A separate air supply system is provided to selected radwaste
 
equipment; the system contains two air compressors, associated
 
controls, a receiver, and separate piping to connect the air
 
supply to the equipment. This system eliminates the potential of
 
service air system contamination in other areas of the plant due
 
to backflow from radwaste equipment.
 
The ADS accumulators, which provide the short-term, backup, safety
 
grade supply, and their long-term, safety grade, pneumatic supply
 
are described in paragraph 4.4.5 of subsection 4.4.
 
An MSIV accumulator is located close to each isolation valve to
 
provide pneumatic pressure for valve closing in the event of
 
failure of the normal, non-safety grade, air supply system. The
 
accumulator volumes are designed for inboard and outboard
 
isolation valves when the normal pneumatic supply to the
 
accumulator has failed. The supply line to the accumulator is
 
large enough to make up pressure to the accumulator at a rate
 
faster than the rate the valve operation bleeds pressure from the
 
accumulator during valve opening and closing. The air supply
 
lines are provided with check valves to assure the integrity of
 
the accumulator air supplies. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.17-6 REV. 25, APRIL 2015 In order to eliminate the introduction of compressed air into the containment and to minimize the need for venting and discharge of
 
the primary containment gases to the environment, an instrument
 
nitrogen system is provided for pneumatic service to ensure the
 
oxygen concentration is maintained less than 5 percent inside the
 
drywell (Drawing M-333, Sheets 1 and 2).
 
Essentially, this system takes suction from the containment
 
nitrogen atmosphere and discharge to a receiver which will be the
 
source of supply for the required pneumatic services inside the
 
drywell. In this manner, no air will be added to the containment
 
atmosphere, but rather the containment nitrogen atmosphere will be
 
recycled, with any losses of nitrogen made up by the normal
 
inerting system.
 
The instrument nitrogen system lines are seismic Class I from the
 
containment penetrations to the second isolation valve, and have
 
automatic isolation valves which function as part of the primary
 
containment and reactor vessel isolation control system when
 
required.
 
Pneumatically operated devices located within the primary
 
containment are normally operated by the instrument nitrogen
 
system. A cross connection is provided between the instrument air
 
system and the instrument nitrogen system to service the
 
components in the primary containment should the instrument
 
nitrogen system be inoperable. Additionally, vital components, such as the main steam isolation valves and main steam relief
 
valves, are provided with accumulators for reliable operation
 
without compressor operation.
 
The emergency switchgear and battery room dampers are supplied
 
with safety grade pneumatic supplies to maintain the dampers open.
 
The source of the pneumatic supply is nitrogen cylinders. The
 
safety grade pneumatic supply is isolated from the non-safety
 
grade potion of the air supply by spring-loaded, soft seat, check
 
valves. The safety grade supply to the E.S.G.B.R. dampers is
 
described in paragraph 10.14.3.1.
 
10.17.6  Safety Evaluation
 
The safety grade, pneumatic supplies to the essential valves of
 
the CADS are provided so that the system can supply post-LOCA
 
nitrogen addition to the containment and can facilitate controlled
 
venting of containment. The safety evaluation for the CADS is
 
contained in paragraph 5.2.3.9.
 
The safety grade, pneumatic supply to the containment purge and
 
vent valves is provided to maintain pressure in the inflatable 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.17-7 REV. 25, APRIL 2015 valve seats to assure leaktight conditions. The safety evaluation is contained in paragraphs 5.2.3.7 and 5.2.4.
 
The safety grade, pneumatic supply to each of the suppression
 
chamber-to-secondary containment vacuum breaker butterfly valve is
 
provided to maintain valve closure. It also provides the
 
pneumatic supply to the inflatable seal utilized in one of the
 
valves on each unit. The safety evaluation is contained in
 
paragraphs 5.2.3.6 and 5.2.4.
 
Each ADS valve is provided with a short-term, backup, safety
 
grade, pneumatic supply by means of its associated accumulator and
 
check valve to provide sufficient capacity to cycle the valve open
 
five times at atmosphere pressure, twice at 70% of containment
 
design pressure, or once at containment design pressure, all
 
within a 4-hour period.
 
A long-term, backup, safety grade, pneumatic supply has been
 
provided to the ADS valve accumulators inside the primary
 
containment to assure ADS valve operability for a period of 100
 
days following an accident.
 
A split ring header is installed inside the containment with three
 
ADS valves connected to one section of the split header and the
 
remaining two ADS valves connected to the other section of the
 
split header. The safety grade, pneumatic pressure is a series of
 
nitrogen cylinders located within the reactor building with a
 
connection provided outside the reactor building for the
 
installation of additional bottles, as required. Also, a long-
 
term, backup, safety grade pneumatic nitrogen supply has been
 
provided to SRVs RV2(3)-02-071E, H&J. This pneumatic supply is
 
provided to enable remote operation of the above valves for a
 
period of 72 hours following a Design Basis fire in Fire Areas
 
6S (Unit 2) and 13S (Unit 3) which has been postulated to render
 
the ADS valves available for only short-term operation. The
 
source of the pneumatic nitrogen supply is the Safety Grade
 
Instrument Gas (SGIG) system. The SGIG system is tied into the
 
6,000 gallon liquid nitrogen tank which supplies the Containment
 
Atmospheric Dilution (CAD) system. The CAD tank is located
 
outside of Fire Areas 6S (Unit 2) and 13S (Unit 3).
 
Spare primary containment penetrations, two for each unit, have
 
been modified to provide a permanent means of connection to each
 
section of the safety grade, pneumatic supply headers within each
 
drywell. Containment isolation has been provided for the
 
instrument gas supply lines into containment by the use of check
 
valves and other automatic valves outside the primary containment.
 
The outer, automatic valves are manually controlled from the
 
control room and automatically close on low differential pressure 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.17-8 REV. 25, APRIL 2015 between pneumatic supply pressure and containment pressure or if gas flow becomes excessively high.
 
The MSIV accumulators are provided to supply a safety grade, backup, pneumatic supply to close the MSIV's by pneumatic pressure
 
following the loss of normal non-safety grade pneumatic supply.
 
The safety function of the accumulators is assured by a safety
 
grade check valve which isolates the accumulators and allows them
 
to perform their safety function.
 
The safety grade, pneumatic supply to the emergency switchgear and
 
battery room dampers is provided to assure continued operation of
 
the ventilation system.
 
10.17.7  Inspection and Testing
 
The instrument air and service air systems are proved operable by
 
their use during normal plant operation. Portions of the system
 
normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure operability and
 
integrity of the system.  


PBAPS UFSAR between pneumatic supply pressure and containment pressure or if gas flow becomes excessively high.
The MSIV accumulators are provided to supply a safety grade, backup, pneumatic supply to close the MSIV's by pneumatic pressure following the loss of normal non-safety grade pneumatic supply.
The safety function of the accumulators is assured by a safety grade check valve which isolates the accumulators and allows them to perform their safety function.
The safety grade, pneumatic supply to the emergency switchgear and battery room dampers is provided to assure continued operation of the ventilation system.
10.17.7  Inspection and Testing The instrument air and service air systems are proved operable by their use during normal plant operation. Portions of the system normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure operability and integrity of the system.
The post-LOCA CADS is functionally tested in accordance with plant procedures. The atmospheric analyzing system is functionally tested in accordance with the Technical Requirements Manual.
The post-LOCA CADS is functionally tested in accordance with plant procedures. The atmospheric analyzing system is functionally tested in accordance with the Technical Requirements Manual.
Inspection and testing of the ADS is discussed in paragraph 4.4.8.  
Inspection and testing of the ADS is discussed in paragraph 4.4.8.
 
CHAPTER 10                 10.17-8            REV. 25, APRIL 2015
CHAPTER 10 10.18-1 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 10.18  DOMESTIC AND SANITARY WATER SYSTEM 10.18.1  Power Generation Objective
 
The power generation objective of the domestic and sanitary water
 
system is to provide the potable water supplies and sewage
 
treatment necessary for normal plant operations and shutdown


periods.  
PBAPS UFSAR 10.18  DOMESTIC AND SANITARY WATER SYSTEM 10.18.1  Power Generation Objective The power generation objective of the domestic and sanitary water system is to provide the potable water supplies and sewage treatment necessary for normal plant operations and shutdown periods.
 
10.18.2   Power Generation Design Basis
10.18.2 Power Generation Design Basis  
: 1. Domestic water is chlorinated.
: 1. Domestic water is chlorinated.  
: 2. Sanitary system water (sewage) is treated prior to release.
: 2. Sanitary system water (sewage) is treated prior to release.
10.18.3 Description  
10.18.3   Description Domestic water is supplied from the clarified water system, discussed in subsection 10.16, "Makeup Water Treatment System."
 
The domestic water system consists of a 5,000-gal domestic water storage tank, two domestic water pumps, a domestic water hydro-pneumatic tank, hypo-chlorinator, and distribution piping (Drawing M-317). Clarified and filtered water is chlorinated and stored in the domestic water storage tank, then pumped to the hydro-pneumatic tank, where it is pressurized for system distribution.
Domestic water is supplied from the clarified water system, discussed in subsection 10.16, "Makeup Water Treatment System."
Water heating units are provided for domestic showers.
The domestic water system consists of a 5,000-gal domestic water  
An onsite sewage treatment plant is provided to treat the normal sewage prior to release. The facility has the capacity to handle Units 2 and 3 and to handle the variable loading at the plant due to population fluctuations between outage and non-outage periods.
 
The sewage treatment system is designed to provide an effluent that meets the regulations of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.
storage tank, two domestic water pumps, a domestic water hydro-
10.18.4   Inspection and Testing The domestic and sanitary water system is proved operable by its use during normal plant operation. Portions of the system normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure operability and integrity of the system.
 
CHAPTER 10                 10.18-1             REV. 21, APRIL 2007
pneumatic tank, hypo-chlorinator, and distribution piping (Drawing  
 
M-317). Clarified and filtered water is chlorinated and stored in  
 
the domestic water storage tank, then pumped to the hydro-
 
pneumatic tank, where it is pressurized for system distribution.  
 
Water heating units are provided for domestic showers.  
 
An onsite sewage treatment plant is provided to treat the normal  
 
sewage prior to release. The facility has the capacity to handle  
 
Units 2 and 3 and to handle the variable loading at the plant due  
 
to population fluctuations between outage and non-outage periods.  
 
The sewage treatment system is designed to provide an effluent  
 
that meets the regulations of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.  
 
10.18.4 Inspection and Testing  
 
The domestic and sanitary water system is proved operable by its  
 
use during normal plant operation. Portions of the system  
 
normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure operability and  
 
integrity of the system.
 
CHAPTER 10 10.19-1 REV. 25, APRIL 2015 10.19  PLANT EQUIPMENT AND FLOOR DRAINAGE SYSTEM 10.19.1  Power Generation Objective
 
The power generation objective of the plant equipment and floor
 
drainage system is to collect and remove waste liquids from their
 
points of origin to a suitable disposable area.
 
10.19.2  Power Generation Design Basis
: 1. Liquid waste drains are classified in accordance with radioactive contamination potentials and conductivity
 
levels and chemical content.
: 2. Potentially radioactive liquid wastes are collected separately from the non-radioactive wastes, in a
 
controlled and safe manner.
 
10.19.3  Description
 
The plant equipment and floor drainage system handles both
 
radioactive and potentially radioactive wastes. Radioactive
 
wastes are collected in the building sumps and transferred to the
 
radwaste building for treatment, sampling, and analysis prior to
 
disposal or reuse in the plant. Non-radioactive wastes are pumped or drained by gravity into the sewer system, storm drain system, or intake bay, and released.
 
10.19.3.1  Radioactive Equipment Drainage System
: 1. Reactor Building Drains
 
Reactor containment systems' equipment wastes are collected in two separate systems. The drywell
 
equipment drain sump system collects equipment drains
 
located in the primary containment. The reactor
 
building equipment drain sump system handles drainage
 
from equipment drains located in the secondary
 
containment. Equipment drains are collected in closed
 
piping and discharged to the equipment drain sump. 
 
Pumps transfer these wastes to the radwaste system. 
 
Containment is provided in transferring waste from the
 
sumps to the radwaste system by maintaining a minimum
 
water level in the sump, which seals the pump suction
 
lines. To prevent blowout of water seals, the drywell
 
equipment drain discharge line penetrating the primary
 
containment has two isolation valves which close upon a
 
high drywell pressure signal. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.19-2 REV. 25, APRIL 2015
: 2. Turbine Building
 
The turbine building radioactive equipment drainage system is collected in sumps located below the basement
 
level. Sump pumps transfer the liquid to the radwaste
 
system. 
: 3. Radwaste Building
 
The radwaste building is provided with an equipment drain sump. Sump pumps transfer the liquid to the
 
radwaste system. Radioactive drainage within the
 
radwaste onsite storage facility is discussed in section
 
9.3.3.2. 
: 4. Recombiner Building
 
The recombiner building is provided with an equipment drain sump. Sump pumps transfer the liquid to the
 
radwaste system.
 
10.19.3.2  Floor Drainage System
 
In general, floor drains from the primary containment, reactor
 
building, turbine building, recombiner building, and radwaste
 
building are collected in sumps located in the basement or lowest
 
level of the building. Sump pumps transfer the waste from the
 
sumps to the radwaste system.
 
10.19.3.3  Non-Radioactive Drainage System
 
Roof drains from the reactor buildings, turbine building, radwaste
 
building, and other buildings, and some floor drains in the
 
turbine building service areas are collected and typically discharged by gravity to the storm drain system. Floor and equipment drains associated with the Unit 2 and Unit 3 critical pump portions of the Circulating Water Pump Structure are collected in a common sump and pumped to the intake bay.
Rainwater from the roof drain is normally routed directly to the intake bay. Refer to UFSAR Section 12.2.10 for details regarding how this drainage system provides protection of critical equipment during external flood conditions.
 
10.19.3.4  Miscellaneous Drainage System
 
Non-radioactive chemical liquid wastes are collected, neutralized, and routed to the settling basin prior to release to the pond. 
 
Oil drains and oil-contaminated liquid drains are collected in a
 
separate oil collection tank for offsite disposal. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.19-3 REV. 25, APRIL 2015 10.19.3.5  Torus Dewatering Facilities
 
A 1.2 million-gal capacity storage tank and associated valving and
 
piping is provided for dewatering the torus to support containment
 
suppression chamber inspections and/or modifications. The tank
 
provides temporary storage for the entire volume of the torus.
 
The Torus De-Watering System (TDWS) is only connected to the torus
 
for dewatering/polishing in plant modes 4 and 5. Removable spool
 
pieces with isolation valves are utilized to allow the TDWS pump
 
suction to be connected to the torus. The spool piece assemblies (with closed isolation valves) are fully qualified to allow the
 
torus to maintain a reliable source of water for ECCS operation
 
while operations with the potential to drain the vessel are in
 
progress. 
 
Torus water transfer is via the torus dewatering pumps (Units 2
 
and 3) and sludge pump (Unit 3 only). The torus water may be sent
 
to either the Condensate Storage Tank or the Torus Dewatering Tank (TDT). Transfer is generally routed through a condensate filter
 
demineralizer to improve water quality prior to storage in the
 
TDT. Additionally, the TDWS may be used to filter and polish the
 
torus water by operating the system in closed loop from the torus
 
through a condensate filter demineralizer, and back to the torus. 
 
10.19.4  Inspection and Testing
 
The plant equipment and floor drainage system is proved operable
 
by use during normal plant operation. Portions of the system
 
normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure operability and
 
integrity of the system. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.20-1 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 10.20  PROCESS SAMPLING SYSTEM 10.20.1  Power Generation Objective
 
The power generation objective of the process sampling system is
 
to monitor the operation of equipment and systems, and to provide
 
information for making operational decisions.
 
10.20.2  Power Generation Design Basis
: 1. The process sampling system is designed to obtain representative samples which can be used in the
 
radiochemical laboratory.
: 2. The process sampling system minimizes contamination and radiation effects at the sampling stations.
: 3. The process sampling system is designed to reduce decay and sample line plateout.
 
10.20.3  Description
 
Samples are taken at locations throughout the plant from the
 
process and auxiliary systems (Table 10.20.1). Sample points are
 
grouped as much as possible at normally accessible locations, and
 
drains are provided at these locations to limit the risk of
 
contamination. Lines are sized to ensure purging and sufficient
 
velocities to obtain representative samples. The samples are
 
analyzed and the resulting information is used to evaluate the
 
condition of the plant.
 
10.20.4  Inspection and Testing
 
The process sampling system is proved operable by its use during
 
normal plant operation. Grab samples are taken to verify the
 
proper operation of the continuous samplers. Portions of the
 
system normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure the
 
operability and integrity of the system. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.20-2 REV. 23, APRIL 2011 TABLE 10.20.1 PROCESS SAMPLING SYSTEM
 
Description Locations Purpose
 
Nuclear Steam Supply System
 
Reactor water Recirculation pump discharge Reactor water quality, crack arrest verification
 
Main steam Main steam line Carryover, moisture RHRS RHR HX outlet HX leakage
 
Cleanup Demineralizer
 
Filter-demineralizer Influent header Reactor water quality Filter-demineralizer Powdex unit effluent Filter condition Filter-demineralizer Precoat recycle line Element leakage Regenerative HX Return to reactor HX leakage Non-regenerative HX Cooling water outlet pipe HX leakage
 
Condensate System
 
Condensate Hotwell trays Tube leakage Condensate Condensate pump discharge Tube leakage, water quality Condensate demineralizer Influent header Condensate quality Condensate demineralizer Powdex unit effluent Filter condition Condensate demineralizer Effluent header Treated condensate quality Consensate demineralizer Precoat recycle line Element leakage
 
Feedwater Systems
 
Heater drains Heater No. 3 outlet Water quality Feedwater Heater No. 5 outlet Water quality Feedwater Reactor inlet Water quality Closed Cooling Water Systems
 
Turbine building cooling water Pump discharge Inhibitor concentration Reactor building cooling Pump discharge Inhibitor concentration
 
Circulating and Service Water Systems
 
Service water Pump discharge header Determine background Circulating water Condenser outlet Chlorine residual Circulating water Discharge canal Activity release
 
CHAPTER 10 10.20-3 REV. 23, APRIL 2011 TABLE 10.20.1 (Continued)
 
Description Locations Purpose
 
Circulating and Service Water Systems
 
Service water Pump discharge header Determine background Circulating water Condenser outlet Chlorine residual Circulating water Discharge canal Activity release
 
Liquid Radwaste System
 
Laundry drain tank Pump discharge Process data Laundry drain filter Filter effluent Water quality Floor drain collector tank Pump discharge Process data Floor drain filter Filter effluent Process data Floor drain demineralizer Demineralizer effluent Process data Floor drain sample tank Pump discharge Discharge suitability Waste collector tank Pump discharge Process data Waste surge tank Pump discharge Process data Waste collector filter Filter effluent Process data Waste demineralizer Demineralizer effluent Process data Waste sample tank Pump discharge Discharge suitability R/W fuel pool F/D precoat Precoat recycle line Element testing Fuel pool HX HX outlet Fuel pool quality, HX leakage Fuel pool filter demineralizer Powdex unit effluent Filter/demineralizer condition Chemical waste tank Pump discharge Process data Condensate phase separator decant Pump discharge Process data Cleanup phase separator decant Pump discharge Process data Centrifuge liquid effluent Liquid discharge pipe Process data
 
Makeup Water Treatment Systems
 
Raw water inlet GE M52 skid inlet Process data Filtered water outlet GE M52 outlet Process data Domestic water Pump discharge Chlorine residual Carbon filter Filter effluent Process data
 
CHAPTER 10 10.20-4 REV. 23, APRIL 2011 TABLE 10.20.1 (Continued)
 
Description Locations Purpose
 
Makeup Water Treatment Systems (Continued)
 
Cation unit Effluent Process data Anion unit Effluent Process data Mixed bed unit Effluent Water quality Dilute acid Header Process data Dilute caustic Header Process data Neutralizer tank Outlet pipe Process data Demineralized water storage tank Pump discharge Water quality Condensate transfer system Pump discharge Water quality Refueling water transfer system Pump discharge Water quality
 
Plant Off-Gas Systems
 
Air ejector discharge Header Activity; H 2 , 0 2 , and air in-leakage Off-gas stack sample Main stack Noble gas monitoring and particulate
 
and iodine samples to determine release rates Recombiner area monitoring Fan discharge from individual Activity  equipment rooms, hydrogen analyzers, instrument racks,  equipment sumps, and cooling water surge tank. Identifica-tion of specific source of leakage is obtainable.
Building ventilation exhaust Building ventilation stack Noble gas monitoring and particulate
 
and iodine samples to determine release rates Control room, radwaste, Fan discharge Activity  recombiner ventilation 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.21-1 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 10.21  COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 10.21.1  Power Generation Objective
 
The power generation objective of internal and external
 
communications is to establish a combined system of loudspeakers
 
and telephones to provide convenient, effective operational
 
communications between various plant buildings and locations.
 
10.21.2  Power Generation Design Basis
: 1. Voice communication to points outside the station is provided by a dial telephone system.
: 2. Voice communication between various plant buildings and locations is provided.
 
10.21.3  Description
 
The following means of communication are provided in the plant:
: 1. A dial phone system with a self-contained power supply is provided for communicating with points outside the
 
station. 
: 2. An intraplant communication system consisting of handsets and loudspeakers is provided for paging and
 
communications in all appropriate areas. The intraplant
 
system employs equipment that operates from the AC
 
instrument bus. Loudspeakers powered by individual
 
amplifiers are located throughout the station, with
 
muting facilities provided where required. Paging plus
 
two-party line channels are provided for simultaneous
 
operation.
: 3. A separate intraplant telephone system allows uninterrupted private communication for maintenance and
 
general use between the main control room, reactor
 
refueling area, and other selected plant areas. The
 
system is designed to ensure that no interference in
 
vital communication is caused by other plant
 
communication systems.
: 4. An evacuation alarm system is located in strategic points throughout the plant to warn personnel of
 
emergency conditions. Additional speakers are located, especially in high noise areas, to provide plant
 
evacuation signal.
 
CHAPTER 10 10.21-2 REV. 21, APRIL 2007  5. A distributed antenna system was installed throughout the plant to provide the capability of using low power walkie talkies as a supplementary means of communicating
 
within the plant. Because these walkie talkies are low
 
power, they will not interfere with plant
 
instrumentation.
: 6. A dedicated communications system, using the distributed antenna system is installed to allow plant operators to
 
communicate between the main control room and the Unit 2
 
and Unit 3 Alternative Control Stations. This system is
 
used for coordinating testing of the Alternative Control
 
Stations and in an Emergency, for a Safe Shutdown from
 
the Alternative Control Stations. See the Fire
 
Protection Program (FPP) for details.
 
10.21.4  Inspection and Testing
 
The communication systems are proved operable by use during normal
 
plant operation. Loss of offsite power operation can be tested to
 
ensure operability and integrity of the systems. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.22-1 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 10.22  STATION LIGHTING SYSTEM 10.22.1  Power Generation Objective
 
The power generation objective of the station lighting system is
 
to provide adequate normal and emergency indoor station lighting.
 
Power is supplied from a normal AC source, standby AC system, and
 
from the station battery system.
 
10.22.2  Power Generation Design Basis
: 1. Lighting intensities approximate levels recommended by the Illuminating Engineering Society.
: 2. Mercury vapor fixtures and mercury switches are not used inside the primary containment or directly above the
 
reactor on the refueling floor.
: 3. The main control room has a fluorescent lighted, glare-free, luminous ceiling to reduce glare and shadows at
 
the control boards.
: 4. Emergency lighting is provided in the control room, diesel generator rooms, emergency switchgear area, and
 
other points where lighting may be required under
 
abnormal conditions.
 
10.22.3  Description
 
The station lighting system is supplied from the station auxiliary
 
power system described in Section 8.0, "Electrical Power Systems."
Normal power is supplied from the unit auxiliary or the startup
 
transformers. The power supply for lighting areas required during
 
shutdown or abnormal conditions is automatically transferred to
 
the standby diesel generator system if the normal power supply is
 
lost.
 
The lighting distribution system has separate, dry-type lighting
 
transformers and circuit breaker type panel boards.
 
A separate emergency DC lighting system, energized from the
 
station batteries, is provided for safe exit lighting if all AC
 
power sources are lost.
 
Separate 8-hour, battery-powered lighting is provided to support
 
safe shutdown operations remote from the control room (Reference
 
Table A-4 of the PBAPS Fire Protection Program). Task lighting is
 
provided at the sites of the operations. The routes used to
 
access and egress the sites are also illuminated. See Fire
 
Protection Program (FPP) for details. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.22-2 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 10.22.4  Inspection and Testing
 
The station lighting system is proven operable during normal plant
 
operation. Loss of offsite power operation can be tested to
 
ensure operability and integrity of the system. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.23-1 REV. 23, APRIL 2011 10.23  PLANT AUXILIARY BOILERS 10.23.1  Power Generation Objective
 
The power generation objective of the plant auxiliary boiler
 
system is to supply necessary steam for plant uses.
 
10.23.2  Power Generation Design Basis
: 1. The plant auxiliary steam system operates independently from the nuclear steam system. Wherever the two systems
 
have interfaces, a positive means of separation is
 
provided.
: 2. The auxiliary steam system is designed to provide operational flexibility to accommodate the seasonal
 
steam demand.
 
10.23.3  Description
 
The plant auxiliary boilers are common to both Units 2 and 3. The
 
auxiliary steam system consists of two 40,000-lb/hr, oil-fired, water-tube package boilers and associated equipment and
 
instrumentation (Drawing M-324, Sheets 1, 1A, 2, 2A, 3, 3A, and 4). The boilers have a design and maximum allowable working pressure of 275 psig. The boilers are designed, fabricated, tested, and stamped in accordance with the ASME Boiler and
 
Pressure Vessel Code, Section I, and the rules and regulations of
 
the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.
 
Process steam (200 psig system) and plant heating steam (50 psig
 
system) are distributed from the boiler steam outlet header.
 
Except for cold startup of a boiler or a startup subsequent to a
 
safety trip, the boiler control system is designed for unattended
 
operation.
 
The 200 psig process steam header provides the following process
 
steam during the plant startup until the nuclear steam pressure is
 
adequate:
: 1. Condensate deaeration in the hotwell during startup.
: 2. Turbine shaft seal steam during startup.
 
The condensate from this process is not returned to the deaerator
 
but is drained to the main condenser. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.23-2 REV. 23, APRIL 2011 10.23.4  Inspection and Testing
 
The auxiliary steam system is proven operable by its use during
 
normal plant operation. Portions of the system normally closed to
 
flow can be tested to ensure operability and integrity of the
 
system. 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.24-1 REV. 25, APRIL 2015 10.24  EMERGENCY HEAT SINK 10.24.1  Power Generation Objective
 
The power generation objective of the emergency heat sink is to
 
provide an onsite heat removal capability so that the reactors of
 
Units 2 and 3 can be shut down in the event of the unavailability
 
of the normal heat sink.
 
10.24.2  Power Generation Design Basis
: 1. The emergency heat sink has a sufficient capacity for removing the sensible and decay heat from the reactors'
 
primary systems and auxiliary systems so that the
 
reactors can be shut down in the event of the
 
unavailability of the normal heat sink.
: 2. The emergency heat sink has the heat removal capacity to supply a source of cooling water to the emergency
 
service water system and the high pressure service water
 
system when required.
: 3. The emergency heat sink provides sufficient water storage capacity to permit emergency cooling tower operation until a makeup water supply can be
 
established.
: 4. The emergency heat sink can operate during a loss of offsite power and can withstand a seismic event.
 
10.24.3  Description
 
The emergency heat sink facility consists of a fireproof, multicell, mechanical, induced-draft cooling tower, constructed as
 
a seismic Class I structure, with an integral onsite 3.55 million-
 
gal water storage reservoir (Drawing C-2). The facility operates in conjunction with the high pressure service water pumps (subsection 10.7), the emergency service water pumps (subsection
 
10.9) at the pump structure, and the emergency service water
 
booster pumps (Drawing M-330). The equipment, valves, and piping
 
in the emergency heat sink system are designed in accordance with
 
seismic Class I criteria. Power requirements are supplied from
 
the standby power supply. Equipment data is shown in Table
 
10.24.1.
 
The high pressure service water pumps take suction from the pump
 
bays to supply water to the RHR heat exchangers. Sufficient head
 
is available to pump the return water directly to the emergency
 
cooling tower. Water supplied from the onsite reservoir flows by
 
gravity to the pump structure in two full-capacity lines, this 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.24-2 REV. 25, APRIL 2015 flow being regulated by two motor operated flow control valves in series in each line. The emergency service water pumps, also
 
located in the pump structure, take suction from the pump bays and
 
supply water to standby diesel generator coolers and the CSCS's
 
pump room air coolers. The return water from the various coolers
 
is boosted in pressure by one of two full-capacity emergency
 
service water booster pumps and delivered to the emergency cooling
 
tower. After an extended period of time, the fuel pool cooling
 
system may be served by the emergency service water system by
 
adding cross connections.
 
Sluice gates in the pump structure isolate the high pressure
 
service water and emergency service water pump bays from Conowingo
 
Pond. These gates are manually closed prior to utilizing the
 
onsite reservoir.
 
The cooling tower is a mechanical, induced-draft type consisting
 
of three cells each capable of handling the heat transfer duty of
 
one RHR heat exchanger (one HPSW pump) plus the plant auxiliary
 
cooling requirement (one ESW pump). The tower heat transfer duty
 
is based on the heat duty occurring when the RHRS operating mode
 
is switched from the containment (torus) cooling mode to the
 
shutdown cooling mode at the time the reactor water temperature reaches 300 F. The emergency heat sink system supplies cooling water to two high
 
pressure service water pumps and one emergency service water pump
 
continuously until all the nuclear fuel can be shipped offsite.
 
Makeup water is supplied from an offsite source.
 
The installed capacity of 3.55 million gal of water stored in the
 
emergency cooling reservoir is adequate for 1 week of operation
 
without makeup. Makeup of water to the system will be initiated
 
as expeditiously as possible after shutdown of the reactors and
 
will be continued for an indefinite period as required.
 
After a two-reactor shutdown, assuming the turbine condensers are
 
not available as heat sinks, it is estimated that continued
 
operation of the RHRS in the shutdown cooling mode can cool the reactors to 212 F in approximately 12 hr and to 125 F in about 3 weeks. Based on controlled cooling tower operation at the rated flow condition, the total water consumed at the end of 7 days is
 
approximately 2.9 x 10 6 gal and a makeup rate of 250 gpm will be required after the first week. The turbine-condensers, if available, will be used as heat sinks for the removal of reactor
 
heat as long as effective. The minimum Conowingo Pond level required for effective operation of the main condenser circulating water pumps is approximately 93.8 feet (C.D.). Note: Water level 
 
CHAPTER 10 10.24-3 REV. 25, APRIL 2015 in the pump bays will be lower due to level differential across the traveling screens.
The offsite makeup water supply to the plant will be made by truck
 
trailers, or temporary hose lines, and portable pumping equipment
 
will be available and used to withdraw water from waterholes in
 
the Susquehanna River or Rock Run Creek. Water transportation
 
into the plant will be initiated as soon as practicable after the
 
loss of the dam accident. The 250 gpm makeup rate required 1 week
 
after reactor shutdown represents about three 5,000 gal water
 
trucks per hour.
 
The feasibility of transporting a large quantity of water was
 
demonstrated during the 1965 drought period in York, Pennsylvania, when several million gallons were delivered by truck daily to the
 
potable water system of that city. Fuel oil is also delivered (two or three trucks per hour) to several generating stations on
 
the licensee's system.
 
10.24.4  Inspection and Testing
 
To assure that the emergency heat sink will function properly, the
 
tower and reservoir are inspected for integrity and reservoir
 
level. The high pressure service water, emergency service water, and emergency cooling water pumps are tested in conjunction with
 
their systems' testing. Portions of the system normally closed to
 
flow can be tested to ensure operability and integrity of the
 
system.
 
Flow measurement devices are provided in the emergency cooling
 
water system to facilitate testing of the emergency cooling water
 
pump and the emergency service water booster pumps in accordance


with AMSE Code requirements.  
PBAPS UFSAR 10.19  PLANT EQUIPMENT AND FLOOR DRAINAGE SYSTEM 10.19.1  Power Generation Objective The power generation objective of the plant equipment and floor drainage system is to collect and remove waste liquids from their points of origin to a suitable disposable area.
10.19.2  Power Generation Design Basis
: 1. Liquid waste drains are classified in accordance with radioactive contamination potentials and conductivity levels and chemical content.
: 2. Potentially radioactive liquid wastes are collected separately from the non-radioactive wastes, in a controlled and safe manner.
10.19.3  Description The plant equipment and floor drainage system handles both radioactive and potentially radioactive wastes. Radioactive wastes are collected in the building sumps and transferred to the radwaste building for treatment, sampling, and analysis prior to disposal or reuse in the plant. Non-radioactive wastes are pumped or drained by gravity into the sewer system, storm drain system, or intake bay, and released.
10.19.3.1  Radioactive Equipment Drainage System
: 1. Reactor Building Drains Reactor containment systems' equipment wastes are collected in two separate systems. The drywell equipment drain sump system collects equipment drains located in the primary containment. The reactor building equipment drain sump system handles drainage from equipment drains located in the secondary containment. Equipment drains are collected in closed piping and discharged to the equipment drain sump.
Pumps transfer these wastes to the radwaste system.
Containment is provided in transferring waste from the sumps to the radwaste system by maintaining a minimum water level in the sump, which seals the pump suction lines. To prevent blowout of water seals, the drywell equipment drain discharge line penetrating the primary containment has two isolation valves which close upon a high drywell pressure signal.
CHAPTER 10                  10.19-1              REV. 25, APRIL 2015


The timer used to sequence the emergency cooling water pump during  
PBAPS UFSAR
: 2. Turbine Building The turbine building radioactive equipment drainage system is collected in sumps located below the basement level. Sump pumps transfer the liquid to the radwaste system.
: 3. Radwaste Building The radwaste building is provided with an equipment drain sump. Sump pumps transfer the liquid to the radwaste system. Radioactive drainage within the radwaste onsite storage facility is discussed in section 9.3.3.2.
: 4. Recombiner Building The recombiner building is provided with an equipment drain sump. Sump pumps transfer the liquid to the radwaste system.
10.19.3.2  Floor Drainage System In general, floor drains from the primary containment, reactor building, turbine building, recombiner building, and radwaste building are collected in sumps located in the basement or lowest level of the building. Sump pumps transfer the waste from the sumps to the radwaste system.
10.19.3.3  Non-Radioactive Drainage System Roof drains from the reactor buildings, turbine building, radwaste building, and other buildings, and some floor drains in the turbine building service areas are collected and typically discharged by gravity to the storm drain system. Floor and equipment drains associated with the Unit 2 and Unit 3 critical pump portions of the Circulating Water Pump Structure are collected in a common sump and pumped to the intake bay.
Rainwater from the roof drain is normally routed directly to the intake bay. Refer to UFSAR Section 12.2.10 for details regarding how this drainage system provides protection of critical equipment during external flood conditions.
10.19.3.4  Miscellaneous Drainage System Non-radioactive chemical liquid wastes are collected, neutralized, and routed to the settling basin prior to release to the pond.
Oil drains and oil-contaminated liquid drains are collected in a separate oil collection tank for offsite disposal.
CHAPTER 10                  10.19-2            REV. 25, APRIL 2015


a LOCA will be tested in accordance with surveillance test
PBAPS UFSAR 10.19.3.5  Torus Dewatering Facilities A 1.2 million-gal capacity storage tank and associated valving and piping is provided for dewatering the torus to support containment suppression chamber inspections and/or modifications. The tank provides temporary storage for the entire volume of the torus.
The Torus De-Watering System (TDWS) is only connected to the torus for dewatering/polishing in plant modes 4 and 5. Removable spool pieces with isolation valves are utilized to allow the TDWS pump suction to be connected to the torus. The spool piece assemblies (with closed isolation valves) are fully qualified to allow the torus to maintain a reliable source of water for ECCS operation while operations with the potential to drain the vessel are in progress.
Torus water transfer is via the torus dewatering pumps (Units 2 and 3) and sludge pump (Unit 3 only). The torus water may be sent to either the Condensate Storage Tank or the Torus Dewatering Tank (TDT). Transfer is generally routed through a condensate filter demineralizer to improve water quality prior to storage in the TDT. Additionally, the TDWS may be used to filter and polish the torus water by operating the system in closed loop from the torus through a condensate filter demineralizer, and back to the torus.
10.19.4  Inspection and Testing The plant equipment and floor drainage system is proved operable by use during normal plant operation. Portions of the system normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure operability and integrity of the system.
CHAPTER 10                  10.19-3            REV. 25, APRIL 2015


procedures. The test will verify the setting, operability, and
PBAPS UFSAR 10.20  PROCESS SAMPLING SYSTEM 10.20.1  Power Generation Objective The power generation objective of the process sampling system is to monitor the operation of equipment and systems, and to provide information for making operational decisions.
10.20.2  Power Generation Design Basis
: 1. The process sampling system is designed to obtain representative samples which can be used in the radiochemical laboratory.
: 2. The process sampling system minimizes contamination and radiation effects at the sampling stations.
: 3. The process sampling system is designed to reduce decay and sample line plateout.
10.20.3  Description Samples are taken at locations throughout the plant from the process and auxiliary systems (Table 10.20.1). Sample points are grouped as much as possible at normally accessible locations, and drains are provided at these locations to limit the risk of contamination. Lines are sized to ensure purging and sufficient velocities to obtain representative samples. The samples are analyzed and the resulting information is used to evaluate the condition of the plant.
10.20.4  Inspection and Testing The process sampling system is proved operable by its use during normal plant operation. Grab samples are taken to verify the proper operation of the continuous samplers. Portions of the system normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure the operability and integrity of the system.
CHAPTER 10                  10.20-1              REV. 21, APRIL 2007


functional performance of the relay, and will provide assurance
PBAPS UFSAR TABLE 10.20.1 PROCESS SAMPLING SYSTEM Description                      Locations                          Purpose Nuclear Steam Supply System Reactor water                  Recirculation pump discharge          Reactor water quality, crack arrest verification Main steam                    Main steam line                      Carryover, moisture RHRS                          RHR HX outlet                        HX leakage Cleanup Demineralizer Filter-demineralizer          Influent header                      Reactor water quality Filter-demineralizer          Powdex unit effluent                  Filter condition Filter-demineralizer          Precoat recycle line                  Element leakage Regenerative HX                Return to reactor                    HX leakage Non-regenerative HX            Cooling water outlet pipe            HX leakage Condensate System Condensate                    Hotwell trays                        Tube leakage Condensate                    Condensate pump discharge            Tube leakage, water quality Condensate demineralizer      Influent header                      Condensate quality Condensate demineralizer      Powdex unit effluent                  Filter condition Condensate demineralizer      Effluent header                      Treated condensate quality Consensate demineralizer      Precoat recycle line                  Element leakage Feedwater Systems Heater drains                  Heater No. 3 outlet                  Water quality Feedwater                      Heater No. 5 outlet                  Water quality Feedwater                      Reactor inlet                        Water quality Closed Cooling Water Systems Turbine building cooling water Pump discharge                        Inhibitor concentration Reactor building cooling      Pump discharge                        Inhibitor concentration Circulating and Service Water Systems Service water                  Pump discharge header                Determine background Circulating water              Condenser outlet                      Chlorine residual Circulating water              Discharge canal                      Activity release CHAPTER 10                                10.20-2                      REV. 23, APRIL 2011


that the automatic loading sequence will be maintained and will
PBAPS UFSAR TABLE 10.20.1 (Continued)
Description                          Locations                          Purpose Circulating and Service Water Systems Service water                    Pump discharge header                Determine background Circulating water                Condenser outlet                      Chlorine residual Circulating water                Discharge canal                      Activity release Liquid Radwaste System Laundry drain tank                Pump discharge                        Process data Laundry drain filter              Filter effluent                      Water quality Floor drain collector tank        Pump discharge                        Process data Floor drain filter                Filter effluent                      Process data Floor drain demineralizer        Demineralizer effluent                Process data Floor drain sample tank          Pump discharge                        Discharge suitability Waste collector tank              Pump discharge                        Process data Waste surge tank                  Pump discharge                        Process data Waste collector filter            Filter effluent                      Process data Waste demineralizer              Demineralizer effluent                Process data Waste sample tank                Pump discharge                        Discharge suitability R/W fuel pool F/D precoat        Precoat recycle line                  Element testing Fuel pool HX                      HX outlet                            Fuel pool quality, HX leakage Fuel pool filter demineralizer    Powdex unit effluent                  Filter/demineralizer condition Chemical waste tank              Pump discharge                        Process data Condensate phase separator decant Pump discharge                        Process data Cleanup phase separator decant    Pump discharge                        Process data Centrifuge liquid effluent        Liquid discharge pipe                Process data Makeup Water Treatment Systems Raw water inlet                  GE M52 skid inlet                    Process data Filtered water outlet            GE M52 outlet                        Process data Domestic water                    Pump discharge                        Chlorine residual Carbon filter                    Filter effluent                      Process data CHAPTER 10                                    10.20-3                      REV. 23, APRIL 2011


perform as required.
PBAPS UFSAR TABLE 10.20.1 (Continued)
Description                            Locations                          Purpose Makeup Water Treatment Systems (Continued)
Cation unit                          Effluent                              Process data Anion unit                          Effluent                              Process data Mixed bed unit                      Effluent                              Water quality Dilute acid                          Header                                Process data Dilute caustic                      Header                                Process data Neutralizer tank                    Outlet pipe                            Process data Demineralized water storage tank    Pump discharge                        Water quality Condensate transfer system          Pump discharge                        Water quality Refueling water transfer system      Pump discharge                        Water quality Plant Off-Gas Systems Air ejector discharge                Header                                Activity; H2, 02, and air in-leakage Off-gas stack sample                Main stack                            Noble gas monitoring and particulate and iodine samples to determine release rates Recombiner area monitoring          Fan discharge from individual          Activity equipment rooms, hydrogen analyzers, instrument racks, equipment sumps, and cooling water surge tank. Identifica-tion of specific source of leakage is obtainable.
Building ventilation exhaust        Building ventilation stack            Noble gas monitoring and particulate and iodine samples to determine release rates Control room, radwaste,              Fan discharge                          Activity recombiner ventilation CHAPTER 10                                      10.20-4                        REV. 23, APRIL 2011


CHAPTER 10 10.24-4 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 TABLE 10.24.1  EMERGENCY HEAT SINK EQUIPMENT DATA
PBAPS UFSAR 10.21  COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 10.21.1  Power Generation Objective The power generation objective of internal and external communications is to establish a combined system of loudspeakers and telephones to provide convenient, effective operational communications between various plant buildings and locations.
10.21.2  Power Generation Design Basis
: 1. Voice communication to points outside the station is provided by a dial telephone system.
: 2. Voice communication between various plant buildings and locations is provided.
10.21.3  Description The following means of communication are provided in the plant:
: 1. A dial phone system with a self-contained power supply is provided for communicating with points outside the station.
: 2. An intraplant communication system consisting of handsets and loudspeakers is provided for paging and communications in all appropriate areas. The intraplant system employs equipment that operates from the AC instrument bus. Loudspeakers powered by individual amplifiers are located throughout the station, with muting facilities provided where required. Paging plus two-party line channels are provided for simultaneous operation.
: 3. A separate intraplant telephone system allows uninterrupted private communication for maintenance and general use between the main control room, reactor refueling area, and other selected plant areas. The system is designed to ensure that no interference in vital communication is caused by other plant communication systems.
: 4. An evacuation alarm system is located in strategic points throughout the plant to warn personnel of emergency conditions. Additional speakers are located, especially in high noise areas, to provide plant evacuation signal.
CHAPTER 10                 10.21-1              REV. 21, APRIL 2007


Design Performance and Type
PBAPS UFSAR
: 5. A distributed antenna system was installed throughout the plant to provide the capability of using low power walkie talkies as a supplementary means of communicating within the plant. Because these walkie talkies are low power, they will not interfere with plant instrumentation.
: 6. A dedicated communications system, using the distributed antenna system is installed to allow plant operators to communicate between the main control room and the Unit 2 and Unit 3 Alternative Control Stations. This system is used for coordinating testing of the Alternative Control Stations and in an Emergency, for a Safe Shutdown from the Alternative Control Stations. See the Fire Protection Program (FPP) for details.
10.21.4  Inspection and Testing The communication systems are proved operable by use during normal plant operation. Loss of offsite power operation can be tested to ensure operability and integrity of the systems.
CHAPTER 10                  10.21-2              REV. 21, APRIL 2007


Type    Induced Draft/
PBAPS UFSAR 10.22  STATION LIGHTING SYSTEM 10.22.1  Power Generation Objective The power generation objective of the station lighting system is to provide adequate normal and emergency indoor station lighting.
Counter Flow Design Wet Bulb Temperature 78.0 F Number of Towers/Number of Cells per Tower 1 / 3 Total Heat Load 357 x 10 6 Btu/hr Water Side High Pressure Flow Hot Water Flow 9,000 gpm   Hot Water Temperature 160 F  Cold Water Temperature 90 F  Evaporation Loss at Rated Flow 7%
Power is supplied from a normal AC source, standby AC system, and from the station battery system.
Low Pressure Flow Hot Water Flow 8,000 gpm   Hot Water Temperature 100 F  Cold Water Temperature 90 F  Evaporation Loss at Rated Flow 1%
10.22.2   Power Generation Design Basis
Total Water Concentration/Cell 3.69 gpm/ft 2  Water Load on Tower Base Area 187 gal/ft 2*  Hot Water Overload Capability 50% (Approx.)  Cold Water Temperature at  Overload Flow 96 F
: 1. Lighting intensities approximate levels recommended by the Illuminating Engineering Society.
* Drift Water Loss at Rated Flow
: 2. Mercury vapor fixtures and mercury switches are not used inside the primary containment or directly above the reactor on the refueling floor.
<0.05%  Retention Time through Tower 7.0 sec  Air Flow Stack Height 20.0 ft  Air Flow 8.01 x 10 6 lb/hr  Draft Loss Inches 0.633 in H 2 0  Total Fan Power Demand, Bhp at Motor Coupling 185.0/cell
: 3. The main control room has a fluorescent lighted, glare-free, luminous ceiling to reduce glare and shadows at the control boards.
* Both systems at 50 percent overload.
: 4. Emergency lighting is provided in the control room, diesel generator rooms, emergency switchgear area, and other points where lighting may be required under abnormal conditions.
10.22.3  Description The station lighting system is supplied from the station auxiliary power system described in Section 8.0, "Electrical Power Systems."
Normal power is supplied from the unit auxiliary or the startup transformers. The power supply for lighting areas required during shutdown or abnormal conditions is automatically transferred to the standby diesel generator system if the normal power supply is lost.
The lighting distribution system has separate, dry-type lighting transformers and circuit breaker type panel boards.
A separate emergency DC lighting system, energized from the station batteries, is provided for safe exit lighting if all AC power sources are lost.
Separate 8-hour, battery-powered lighting is provided to support safe shutdown operations remote from the control room (Reference Table A-4 of the PBAPS Fire Protection Program). Task lighting is provided at the sites of the operations. The routes used to access and egress the sites are also illuminated. See Fire Protection Program (FPP) for details.
CHAPTER 10                  10.22-1              REV. 21, APRIL 2007


CHAPTER 10 10.24-5 REV. 21, APRIL 2007 TABLE 10.24.1 (Continued)
PBAPS UFSAR 10.22.4  Inspection and Testing The station lighting system is proven operable during normal plant operation. Loss of offsite power operation can be tested to ensure operability and integrity of the system.
Mechanical Equipment (per Cell)
CHAPTER 10                 10.22-2            REV. 21, APRIL 2007


Fans Number  1 RPM   116.7 rpm  Blade Material Reinforced Fiberglass Epoxy
PBAPS UFSAR 10.23  PLANT AUXILIARY BOILERS 10.23.1  Power Generation Objective The power generation objective of the plant auxiliary boiler system is to supply necessary steam for plant uses.
10.23.2  Power Generation Design Basis
: 1. The plant auxiliary steam system operates independently from the nuclear steam system. Wherever the two systems have interfaces, a positive means of separation is provided.
: 2. The auxiliary steam system is designed to provide operational flexibility to accommodate the seasonal steam demand.
10.23.3   Description The plant auxiliary boilers are common to both Units 2 and 3. The auxiliary steam system consists of two 40,000-lb/hr, oil-fired, water-tube package boilers and associated equipment and instrumentation (Drawing M-324, Sheets 1, 1A, 2, 2A, 3, 3A, and 4). The boilers have a design and maximum allowable working pressure of 275 psig. The boilers are designed, fabricated, tested, and stamped in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section I, and the rules and regulations of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.
Process steam (200 psig system) and plant heating steam (50 psig system) are distributed from the boiler steam outlet header.
Except for cold startup of a boiler or a startup subsequent to a safety trip, the boiler control system is designed for unattended operation.
The 200 psig process steam header provides the following process steam during the plant startup until the nuclear steam pressure is adequate:
: 1. Condensate deaeration in the hotwell during startup.
: 2. Turbine shaft seal steam during startup.
The condensate from this process is not returned to the deaerator but is drained to the main condenser.
CHAPTER 10                  10.23-1              REV. 23, APRIL 2011


Tower and Cell Structure
PBAPS UFSAR 10.23.4  Inspection and Testing The auxiliary steam system is proven operable by its use during normal plant operation. Portions of the system normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure operability and integrity of the system.
CHAPTER 10                  10.23-2            REV. 23, APRIL 2011


Tower Height 57 ft 4 in Air Intake Height 10 ft 6 in Cell Dimension 48.0 ft x 48.0 ft Stack Height 20.0 ft 
PBAPS UFSAR 10.24  EMERGENCY HEAT SINK 10.24.1  Power Generation Objective The power generation objective of the emergency heat sink is to provide an onsite heat removal capability so that the reactors of Units 2 and 3 can be shut down in the event of the unavailability of the normal heat sink.
10.24.2  Power Generation Design Basis
: 1. The emergency heat sink has a sufficient capacity for removing the sensible and decay heat from the reactors' primary systems and auxiliary systems so that the reactors can be shut down in the event of the unavailability of the normal heat sink.
: 2. The emergency heat sink has the heat removal capacity to supply a source of cooling water to the emergency service water system and the high pressure service water system when required.
: 3. The emergency heat sink provides sufficient water storage capacity to permit emergency cooling tower operation until a makeup water supply can be established.
: 4. The emergency heat sink can operate during a loss of offsite power and can withstand a seismic event.
10.24.3  Description The emergency heat sink facility consists of a fireproof, multicell, mechanical, induced-draft cooling tower, constructed as a seismic Class I structure, with an integral onsite 3.55 million-gal water storage reservoir (Drawing C-2). The facility operates in conjunction with the high pressure service water pumps (subsection 10.7), the emergency service water pumps (subsection 10.9) at the pump structure, and the emergency service water booster pumps (Drawing M-330). The equipment, valves, and piping in the emergency heat sink system are designed in accordance with seismic Class I criteria. Power requirements are supplied from the standby power supply. Equipment data is shown in Table 10.24.1.
The high pressure service water pumps take suction from the pump bays to supply water to the RHR heat exchangers. Sufficient head is available to pump the return water directly to the emergency cooling tower. Water supplied from the onsite reservoir flows by gravity to the pump structure in two full-capacity lines, this CHAPTER 10                  10.24-1              REV. 25, APRIL 2015


Emergency Cooling Water Pumps For specifications see Table 10.9.1
PBAPS UFSAR flow being regulated by two motor operated flow control valves in series in each line. The emergency service water pumps, also located in the pump structure, take suction from the pump bays and supply water to standby diesel generator coolers and the CSCS's pump room air coolers. The return water from the various coolers is boosted in pressure by one of two full-capacity emergency service water booster pumps and delivered to the emergency cooling tower. After an extended period of time, the fuel pool cooling system may be served by the emergency service water system by adding cross connections.
Sluice gates in the pump structure isolate the high pressure service water and emergency service water pump bays from Conowingo Pond. These gates are manually closed prior to utilizing the onsite reservoir.
The cooling tower is a mechanical, induced-draft type consisting of three cells each capable of handling the heat transfer duty of one RHR heat exchanger (one HPSW pump) plus the plant auxiliary cooling requirement (one ESW pump). The tower heat transfer duty is based on the heat duty occurring when the RHRS operating mode is switched from the containment (torus) cooling mode to the shutdown cooling mode at the time the reactor water temperature reaches 300F.
The emergency heat sink system supplies cooling water to two high pressure service water pumps and one emergency service water pump continuously until all the nuclear fuel can be shipped offsite.
Makeup water is supplied from an offsite source.
The installed capacity of 3.55 million gal of water stored in the emergency cooling reservoir is adequate for 1 week of operation without makeup. Makeup of water to the system will be initiated as expeditiously as possible after shutdown of the reactors and will be continued for an indefinite period as required.
After a two-reactor shutdown, assuming the turbine condensers are not available as heat sinks, it is estimated that continued operation of the RHRS in the shutdown cooling mode can cool the reactors to 212F in approximately 12 hr and to 125F in about 3 weeks. Based on controlled cooling tower operation at the rated flow condition, the total water consumed at the end of 7 days is approximately 2.9 x 106 gal and a makeup rate of 250 gpm will be required after the first week. The turbine-condensers, if available, will be used as heat sinks for the removal of reactor heat as long as effective. The minimum Conowingo Pond level required for effective operation of the main condenser circulating water pumps is approximately 93.8 feet (C.D.). Note: Water level CHAPTER 10                  10.24-2              REV. 25, APRIL 2015


Emergency Service Water Booster Pumps
PBAPS UFSAR in the pump bays will be lower due to level differential across the traveling screens.
The offsite makeup water supply to the plant will be made by truck trailers, or temporary hose lines, and portable pumping equipment will be available and used to withdraw water from waterholes in the Susquehanna River or Rock Run Creek. Water transportation into the plant will be initiated as soon as practicable after the loss of the dam accident. The 250 gpm makeup rate required 1 week after reactor shutdown represents about three 5,000 gal water trucks per hour.
The feasibility of transporting a large quantity of water was demonstrated during the 1965 drought period in York, Pennsylvania, when several million gallons were delivered by truck daily to the potable water system of that city. Fuel oil is also delivered (two or three trucks per hour) to several generating stations on the licensees system.
10.24.4  Inspection and Testing To assure that the emergency heat sink will function properly, the tower and reservoir are inspected for integrity and reservoir level. The high pressure service water, emergency service water, and emergency cooling water pumps are tested in conjunction with their systems' testing. Portions of the system normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure operability and integrity of the system.
Flow measurement devices are provided in the emergency cooling water system to facilitate testing of the emergency cooling water pump and the emergency service water booster pumps in accordance with AMSE Code requirements.
The timer used to sequence the emergency cooling water pump during a LOCA will be tested in accordance with surveillance test procedures. The test will verify the setting, operability, and functional performance of the relay, and will provide assurance that the automatic loading sequence will be maintained and will perform as required.
CHAPTER 10                  10.24-3            REV. 25, APRIL 2015


Quantity 2 (common to both units)
PBAPS UFSAR TABLE 10.24.1 EMERGENCY HEAT SINK EQUIPMENT DATA Design Performance and Type Type                                           Induced Draft/
Pump Design Type   Horizontal split  Flow/Head 8,000 gpm/100 feet  Bhp at Rating 230  Speed  1,170 rpm  Number of Stages 1
Counter Flow Design Wet Bulb Temperature                    78.0F Number of Towers/Number of Cells per Tower                                1 / 3 Total Heat Load                                357 x 106 Btu/hr Water Side High Pressure Flow Hot Water Flow                      9,000 gpm Hot Water Temperature              160F Cold Water Temperature              90F Evaporation Loss at Rated Flow                    7%
Material Bowl  Bronze  Shaft  AISI 303  Shaft Sleeve AISI 440c  Wear Ring Bronze  Impeller/Liner ASTM B143 Bronze
Low Pressure Flow Hot Water Flow                      8,000 gpm Hot Water Temperature              100F Cold Water Temperature              90F Evaporation Loss at Rated Flow                    1%
Total Water Concentration/Cell                3.69 gpm/ft2 Water Load on Tower Base Area            187 gal/ft2*
Hot Water Overload Capability            50% (Approx.)
Cold Water Temperature at Overload Flow                      96F
* Drift Water Loss at Rated Flow            <0.05%
Retention Time through Tower              7.0 sec Air Flow Stack Height                              20.0 ft Air Flow                                  8.01 x 106 lb/hr Draft Loss Inches                        0.633 in H20 Total Fan Power Demand, Bhp at Motor Coupling                      185.0/cell
* Both systems at 50 percent overload.
CHAPTER 10                  10.24-4            REV. 21, APRIL 2007


Motor Design Type   Horizontal Induc-tion Type Horsepower 250 hp Voltage/Phase/Frequency 4,000 V/3 Phase/
PBAPS UFSAR TABLE 10.24.1 (Continued)
60 Hz}}
Mechanical Equipment (per Cell)
Fans Number                                    1 RPM                                        116.7 rpm Blade Material                            Reinforced Fiberglass Epoxy Tower and Cell Structure Tower Height                                    57 ft 4 in Air Intake Height                              10 ft 6 in Cell Dimension                                  48.0 ft x 48.0 ft Stack Height                                    20.0 ft Emergency Cooling Water Pumps                  For specifications see Table 10.9.1 Emergency Service Water Booster Pumps Quantity                                        2 (common to both units)
Pump Design Type                                      Horizontal split Flow/Head                                  8,000 gpm/100 feet Bhp at Rating                              230 Speed                                      1,170 rpm Number of Stages                          1 Material Bowl                                Bronze Shaft                                AISI 303 Shaft Sleeve                        AISI 440c Wear Ring                            Bronze Impeller/Liner                      ASTM B143 Bronze Motor Design Type                                       Horizontal Induc-tion Type Horsepower                                 250 hp Voltage/Phase/Frequency                   4,000 V/3 Phase/
60 Hz CHAPTER 10                  10.24-5              REV. 21, APRIL 2007}}

Latest revision as of 17:18, 4 February 2020

Revision 26 to Updated Final Safety Analysis Report, Section 10.0, Auxiliary Systems
ML17130A249
Person / Time
Site: Peach Bottom  Constellation icon.png
Issue date: 04/06/2017
From:
Exelon Generation Co
To:
Office of Nuclear Reactor Regulation
Shared Package
ML17130A259 List: ... further results
References
Download: ML17130A249 (117)


Text

PBAPS UFSAR SECTION 10.0 - AUXILIARY SYSTEMS TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION TITLE 10.1

SUMMARY

DESCRIPTION 10.2 NEW FUEL STORAGE 10.2.1 Introduction 10.2.2 Description 10.3 SPENT FUEL STORAGE 10.3.1 Power Generation Objective 10.3.2 Power Generation Design Basis 10.3.3 Safety Design Basis 10.3.4 Description 10.3.4.1 High Density Spent Fuel Storage Racks 10.3.4.1.1 Cell Assembly 10.3.4.1.1.1 Cell Enclosure 10.3.4.1.1.2 Neutron Absorbing Material 10.3.4.1.1.3 Wrapper Plate 10.3.4.1.1.4 Neutron Absorbing Inserts 10.3.4.1.1.4.1 Seismic and Structural Integrity 10.3.4.1.1.4.2 Fuel Handling Accidents 10.3.4.1.1.4.3 Criticality Analysis 10.3.4.1.1.4.4 Abnormal or Accident Conditions 10.3.4.1.1.4.5 Boraflex Credit for the Interim Period 10.3.4.1.2 Base Plate 10.3.4.1.3 Base Support Assembly 10.3.4.2 Spent Fuel Pool 10.3.4.3 Fuel Pool Level Alarms 10.3.5 Safety Evaluation 10.3.6 Inspection and Testing 10.3.6.1 Boraflex Inspection and Testing 10.3.6.2 Neutron Absorbing Inserts Surveillance Program 10.3.6.2.1 Fast Start Coupon Surveillance Program 10.3.6.2.2 Long-Term Coupon Surveillance Program 10.3.6.2.3 Full rack Insert Surveillance Inspections 10.4 TOOLS AND SERVICING EQUIPMENT 10.4.1 Introduction 10.4.2 Fuel Servicing Equipment 10.4.3 Servicing Aids CHAPTER 10 10-i REV. 25, APRIL 2015

PBAPS UFSAR TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont'd)

SECTION TITLE 10.4.4 Reactor Vessel Servicing Equipment 10.4.5 In-Vessel Servicing Equipment 10.4.5.1 Reactor Cavity Work Platform 10.4.6 Refueling Equipment 10.4.7 Storage Equipment 10.4.8 Under-Reactor-Vessel Servicing Equipment 10.4.9 Equipment Storage Pit 10.4.10 Reactor Building Crane 10.4.11 Heavy Loads Compliance 10.4.11.1 NUREG-0612 Phase I Requirements 10.4.11.2 NUREG-0612 Phase II Requirements 10.4.11.3 Safety Evaluation 10.5 FUEL POOL COOLING AND CLEANUP SYSTEM 10.5.1 Power Generation Objective 10.5.2 Power Generation Design Basis 10.5.3 Description 10.5.4 Inspection and Testing 10.6 SERVICE WATER SYSTEM 10.6.1 Power Generation Objective 10.6.2 Power Generation Design Basis 10.6.3 Description 10.6.4 Inspection and Testing 10.7 HIGH-PRESSURE SERVICE WATER SYSTEM 10.7.1 Safety Objective 10.7.2 Safety Design Basis 10.7.3 Power Generation Objective 10.7.4 Power Generation Design Basis 10.7.5 Description 10.7.6 Safety Evaluation 10.7.7 Inspection and Testing 10.8 REACTOR BUILDING COOLING WATER SYSTEM 10.8.1 Power Generation Objective 10.8.2 Power Generation Design Basis 10.8.3 Description 10.8.4 Inspection and Testing 10.9 EMERGENCY SERVICE WATER SYSTEM 10.9.1 Safety Objective 10.9.2 Safety Design Basis 10.9.3 Description CHAPTER 10 10-ii REV. 25, APRIL 2015

PBAPS UFSAR TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont'd)

SECTION TITLE 10.9.4 Safety Evaluation 10.9.5 Inspection and Testing 10.10 TURBINE BUILDING COOLING WATER SYSTEM 10.10.1 Power Generation Objective 10.10.2 Power Generation Design Basis 10.10.3 Description 10.10.4 Inspection and Testing 10.11 CHILLED WATER SYSTEM 10.11.1 Power Generation Objective 10.11.2 Power Generation Design Basis 10.11.3 Description 10.11.4 Inspection and Testing 10.12 FIRE PROTECTION PROGRAM 10.13 MAIN CONTROL ROOM AIR CONDITIONING 10.13.1 Power Generation Objective 10.13.2 Power Generation Design Basis 10.13.3 Safety Design Basis 10.13.4 Description 10.13.4.1 Control Room Habitability 10.13.5 Safety Evaluation 10.13.6 Inspection and Testing 10.14 EMERGENCY VENTILATING SYSTEMS 10.14.1 Safety Objective 10.14.2 Safety Design Basis 10.14.3 Description 10.14.3.1 Emergency Switchgear and Battery Rooms 10.14.3.2 Standby Diesel Generator Rooms 10.14.3.3 Service Water Pump Rooms 10.14.4 Safety Evaluation 10.14.5 Inspection and Testing 10.15 PLANT HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS 10.15.1 Power Generation Objective 10.15.2 Power Generation Design Basis 10.15.3 Description 10.15.3.1 General 10.15.3.2 Turbine Building 10.15.3.3 Radwaste Building 10.15.3.4 Miscellaneous Rooms and Buildings CHAPTER 10 10-iii REV. 25, APRIL 2015

PBAPS UFSAR TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont'd)

SECTION TITLE 10.15.4 Inspection and Testing 10.16 MAKEUP WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM 10.16.1 Power Generation Objective 10.16.2 Power Generation Design Basis 10.16.3 Description 10.16.4 Inspection and Testing 10.17 INSTRUMENT AIR, SERVICE AIR, AND INSTRUMENT NITROGEN SYSTEMS 10.17.1 Safety Objective 10.17.2 Safety Design Basis 10.17.3 Power Generation Objective 10.17.4 Power Generation Design Basis 10.17.5 Description 10.17.6 Safety Evaluation 10.17.7 Inspection and Testing 10.18 DOMESTIC AND SANITARY WATER SYSTEM 10.18.1 Power Generation Objective 10.18.2 Power Generation Design Basis 10.18.3 Description 10.18.4 Inspection and Testing 10.19 PLANT EQUIPMENT AND FLOOR DRAINAGE SYSTEM 10.19.1 Power Generation Objective 10.19.2 Power Generation Design Basis 10.19.3 Description 10.19.3.1 Radioactive Equipment Drainage System 10.19.3.2 Floor Drainage System 10.19.3.3 Non-Radioactive Drainage System 10.19.3.4 Miscellaneous Drainage System 10.19.3.5 Torus Dewatering Facilities 10.19.4 Inspection and Testing 10.20 PROCESS SAMPLING SYSTEM 10.20.1 Power Generation Objective 10.20.2 Power Generation Design Basis 10.20.3 Description 10.20.4 Inspection and Testing 10.21 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 10.21.1 Power Generation Objective 10.21.2 Power Generation Design Basis 10.21.3 Description 10.21.4 Inspection and Testing CHAPTER 10 10-iv REV. 25, APRIL 2015

PBAPS UFSAR TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont'd)

SECTION TITLE 10.22 STATION LIGHTING SYSTEM 10.22.1 Power Generation Objective 10.22.2 Power Generation Design Basis 10.22.3 Description 10.22.4 Inspection and Testing 10.23 PLANT AUXILIARY BOILERS 10.23.1 Power Generation Objective 10.23.2 Power Generation Design Basis 10.23.3 Description 10.23.4 Inspection and Testing 10.24 EMERGENCY HEAT SINK 10.24.1 Power Generation Objective 10.24.2 Power Generation Design Basis 10.24.3 Description 10.24.4 Inspection and Testing CHAPTER 10 10-v REV. 25, APRIL 2015

PBAPS UFSAR SECTION 10.0 - AUXILIARY SYSTEMS LIST OF TABLES TABLE TITLE 10.3.1 Available Makeup Water Sources 10.3.2 Rack Module Data (per unit) 10.3.6.1 Long-Term Surveillance Coupons 10.3.6.2 Long-Term Surveillance General Coupon Characterization 10.3.6.3 Frequency for Coupon Inspection 10.5.1 Fuel Pool Cooling and Cleanup System 10.5.2 Summary of Cooling System Analysis Results 10.6.1 Service Water System Data 10.7.1 High-Pressure Service Water System Equipment Data 10.8.1 Reactor Building Cooling Water System Equipment Data 10.9.1 Emergency Service Water System Equipment Data 10.10.1 Turbine Building Cooling Water System Equipment Data 10.20.1 Process Sampling System 10.24.1 Emergency Heat Sink Equipment Data CHAPTER 10 10-vi REV. 25, APRIL 2015

PBAPS UFSAR SECTION 10.0 - AUXILIARY SYSTEMS LIST OF FIGURES FIGURE TITLE 10.3.1 Rack Assembly 10.3.2 Spent Fuel Storage Cell Nominal Dimensions 10.3.3 Consolidated Fuel Canister Arrangement 10.3.4 Spent Fuel Pool Storage Rack Arrangement (Unit 2) 10.3.5 Spent Fuel Pool Storage Rack Arrangement (Unit 3) 10.3.6 Fuel Rack Plan View 10.3.7 Fuel Storage Rack Assembly Details 10.4.1 Plant Refueling Outage Diagram 10.4.2 Thermal Sleeve 10.4.3 Thermal Sleeve Installation Tool 10.5.1 Deleted 10.5.2 Deleted 10.6.1 Deleted 10.7.1 Deleted 10.8.1 Deleted 10.10.1 Deleted 10.11.1 Deleted 10.12.1a Deleted 10.12.1b Deleted 10.13.1 Deleted 10.13.2 Deleted CHAPTER 10 10-vii REV. 25, APRIL 2015

PBAPS UFSAR LIST OF FIGURES (cont'd)

FIGURE TITLE 10.14.1 Deleted 10.14.2 Deleted 10.15.1 Deleted 10.15.2 Deleted 10.16.1 Deleted 10.16.2 Deleted 10.17.1 Deleted 10.17.1 Deleted 10.23.1 Deleted 10.24.1 Deleted 10.24.2 Deleted 10.24.3 Deleted 10.24.4 Emergency Heat Sink Facility CHAPTER 10 10-viii REV. 25, APRIL 2015

PBAPS UFSAR SECTION 10.0 AUXILIARY SYSTEMS 10.1

SUMMARY

DESCRIPTION This section describes the reactor and plant auxiliary systems that are required for operation, but which are not integral portions of the reactor and power conversion equipment or their safety systems.

CHAPTER 10 10.1-1 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR 10.2 NEW FUEL STORAGE 10.2.1 Introduction New fuel is stored in high density storage racks located in the spent fuel pool.

10.2.2 Description New fuel assemblies as received at the plant are stored in metal boxes inside an outer metal container. Each outer container and metal box holds two fuel bundles. After removing the box from the outer container, the boxes are hoisted to the refueling floor and the fuel bundles are receipt inspected and placed in the spent fuel pool using the fuel-handling equipment. If a bundle fails receipt inspection, it is tagged in accordance with procedure, placed back into the container, and left on the refueling floor. A GE inspector checks the bundle. He either repairs the problem at the site or returns the damaged bundle for a replacement. In the event that the new fuel cannot be taken to the refueling floor immediately, it can be off-loaded and stored in a roped-off area with a security guard posted.

CHAPTER 10 10.2-1 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR 10.3 SPENT FUEL STORAGE 10.3.1 Power Generation Objective The power generation objective of the spent fuel storage arrangement is to provide storage space for the spent fuel assemblies which require shielding during storage and handling.

10.3.2 Power Generation Design Basis

1. Spent fuel storage racks for each reactor are designed to accommodate 3819 fuel assemblies.
2. Spent fuel storage racks are designed and arranged so that the fuel assemblies can be efficiently handled during refueling operations.
3. Dry storage casks are designed so that spent fuel may be transferred from the wet storage racks into the casks in an efficient manner 10.3.3 Safety Design Basis
1. All arrangements of fuel in the spent fuel storage racks are maintained in a subcritical configuration having a keff 0.95 for all conditions.
2. Each spent fuel storage rack loaded with fuel and the pool structure are designed to withstand seismic loading to minimize distortion of the spent fuel storage arrangement or loss of spent fuel pool level.
3. Fuel designated for dry cask storage will have a Keff

< 0.95.

4. Dry storage casks are evaluated for design basis environmental events and are placed in configurations which do not impact the structural capabilities of the fuel pool, reactor building, or cask transport path.

10.3.4 Description The high density spent fuel storage racks provide storage at the bottom of the fuel pool for the spent fuel received from the reactor vessel and new fuel for loading to the reactor vessel. The fuel storage racks at the bottom of the pool are covered with water (normally about 23 ft CHAPTER 10 10.3-1 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR above the stored fuel) for radiation shielding. Sufficient shielding is provided by maintaining a minimum depth of water at all times. The racks are freestanding, full-length top entry and are designed to maintain the spent fuel in a space geometry which precludes the possibility of criticality (keff will not exceed 0.95) under any conditions.

The high density spent fuel storage racks are of the "poison" type, utilizing a neutron absorbing material to maintain a subcritical fuel array (see Figures 10.3.1, 10.3.2, and 10.3.3). The rack modules are rectilinear in shape and are of nine different array sizes. The racks are arranged in the spent fuel pool as shown in Figure 10.3.4 for Unit 2 and Figure 10.3.5 for Unit 3. A total of 3819 storage locations are provided per pool. The racks are capable of storing BWR fuel assemblies (with or without their channels) with a maximum incore k-infinity of 1.270. Maintaining the incore k-infinity 1.270 will assure that the rack k-effective will be equal to or less than that determined in the safety design basis. TS Amendment Nos. 175/178 demonstrated a k-infinity limit of

< 1.362 using an analysis of the criticality aspects of the storage of PBAPS fuel assemblies having a fuel enrichment up to 4.5 weight percent of U-235. The analysis methodology and results were described in the GE report, GENE-512-92073, "Peach Bottom Atomic Power Station Spent Fuel Storage K-infinity Conversion Analyses,"

November 1992. The method and the cross-section library used consist of the GE MERIT computer code, using the ENDF/B-IV cross section set, which is stated to have been verified against extensive critical experiments. The MERIT program is a three-dimensional Monte Carlo neutron tracking code that calculates the system effective neutron multiplication factor (K-effective) using a 190 group cross-section library with the Haywood scattering kernel of water. A spent fuel storage criticality validation is performed for each reload to demonstrate that the reload fuel assemblies meet incore K-infinity and rack K-effective storage criticality requirements. Rack module data is given in Table 10.3.2.

TS Amendment 287/290 approved use of neutron absorbing inserts in the spent fuel pool (SFP) storage racks for the purpose of criticality control in the SFPs. This amendment modified TS 4.3, "Fuel storage" and added a new license condition 2.C(14) to support the installation of NETCO-SNAP-IN neutron absorbing inserts into the individual cells of the existing PBAPS SFP storage racks. The CHAPTER 10 10.3-2 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR installation of inserts addresses the degradation of the neutron absorbing material (Boraflex) previously installed in the SFP racks. The rack inserts are manufactured by NETCO using an aluminum and boron carbide composite material produced by Rio Tinto Alcan, Inc.

Analyses of the safety considerations concerning the high density spent fuel storage racks are set forth in a document entitled "Design Report of High Density Spent Fuel Storage Racks for PECO Energy Company (PECO),

formerly Philadelphia Electric Company, Peach Bottom Atomic Power Station Units 2 and 3, Revision 2," dated July 21, 1986. This document describes the high density spent fuel storage racks in detail and contains analyses for seismic events, criticality concerns, structural requirements, thermal and hydraulic requirements, and postulated accident conditions associated with the high density spent fuel racks. Additional analysis has been performed that justifies application of the results of this document for Spent Fuel Pool water temperatures as low as 40F.

The technical evaluation that allowed the use of GE-14 fuel in the Peach Bottom reactors is contained in ECR PB 99-02682. The acceptability of storing GE-14 fuel in the Spent Fuel Pool is documented in "GE14 Spent Fuel Storage Rack Analysis for Peach Bottom Atomic Power Station,"

Global Nuclear Fuel Document No. J11-03761-00-SFP, July 2000. GNF2 Fuel was evaluated in TS Amendment 287/290 for use of the NETCO-SNAP-IN inserts.

The dry storage cask consists of a fuel basket, a cask body, a protective cover, an overpressure system, penetrations with bolted and sealed covers for leak detection and venting, closure bolts and locating pins.

The cask is designed to be lifted in a single failure proof configuration.

Analysis of the safety considerations concerning the usage of the dry cask storage system is documented in the PBAPS Independent Fuel Storage Safety Analysis Report (IFSSAR) and PBAPS 10CFR 72.212 Report. These documents discuss in detail the various design basis cask storage at PBAPS.

CHAPTER 10 10.3-3 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR 10.3.4.1 High Density Spent Fuel Storage Racks The high density spent fuel racks are constructed of stainless steel materials and each rack module is composed of cell assemblies, base plate, and base support assembly.

10.3.4.1.1 Cell Assembly Each cell assembly is composed of (1) a full length enclosure constructed of 0.075 inch thick stainless steel, (2) sections of Bisco Boraflex which is neutron absorbing material, and (3) wrapper plates constructed of 0.020 inch thick stainless steel. Additionally, NETCO-SNAP-IN inserts provide augmented neutron absorbing capability.

10.3.4.1.1.1 Cell Enclosure The primary functions of the enclosure are to house fuel assemblies, to maintain the necessary separation between assemblies for subcriticality and to provide structural stiffness for the rack module. The inside square dimension of the cell enclosure is 6.070 inches nominal which accommodates either channeled or unchanneled fuel or consolidated fuel assemblies. A partial plan view is shown in Figure 10.3.6 and a partial elevation view is shown in Figure 10.3.7.

10.3.4.1.1.2 Neutron Absorbing Material The Bisco Boraflex manufactured by Brand Industrial Services provided the additional neutron absorbing media required above that inherent in the rack structure material. The Boraflex is fabricated to safety-related nuclear criteria of 10CFR50, Appendix B, and it consists of boron carbide particles as neutron absorbers held in place by a nonmetallic binder. Boraflex contains an initial minimum B10 areal density of 0.021 gm/cm2. It is a continuous sheet centered on the length of the active fuel. Depending on the location of the cells in a rack module, some cells have the Boraflex on all four sides, some of three sides and some on two sides. Cells with four wrappers are located in the interior of the rack, cells with three wrappers are located on the periphery of the rack, and cells with two (adjacent) wrappers are located at the corners of the rack.

Since NETCO SNAP-IN rack inserts have been fully installed in the Peach Bottom Units 2 and 3 Spent Fuel CHAPTER 10 10.3-4 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR Pool racks, Boraflex is no longer credited as a neutron absorbing material.

10.3.4.1.1.3 Wrapper Plate The wrapper plates are attached to the outside of the cell enclosure by intermediate spot welding along the entire length of the wrapper, forming the encapsulation of the Boraflex. A water tight seal is not provided between the wrappers and enclosures.

10.3.4.1.1.4 Neutron Absorbing Inserts The NETCO-SNAP-IN neutron absorbing inserts are manufactured by NETCO using an aluminum and boron carbide composite material produced by Rio Tinto Alcan, Inc. The material contains 19% by volume of boron carbide. The minimum certified areal density is 0.0105 grams/cm2. An AA1100 aluminum alloy is used as a metal matrix to retain the boron carbide.

The inserts are designed to be an integral part of the existing PBAPS spent fuel racks. The inserts are nominally 0.075 inch-thick, are chevron shaped and have a vertical length which is equal to the cell height of the existing PBAPS spent fuel racks (169 inches). The aluminum and boron carbide composite inserts function by maintaining a greater than 90 degree bend angle when formed, but are subsequently compressed to a 90 degree bend angle when installed in the individual spent fuel rack cells, which provides a bearing force against the inside of the cell walls to retain the inserts in place.

10.3.4.1.1.4.1 Seismic and Structural Integrity A combination of analysis and testing has been used to demonstrate acceptable structural and seismic performance of the inserts.

The impact load of a fuel assembly on the neutron absorbing inserts, generated by the horizontal acceleration of a fuel assembly during a design-basis seismic event, was determined to be 403 pounds per square inch (psi). Given that the NETCO-SNAP-IN insert yield stress is approximately 8000 psi, the deformation and subsequent failure of the insert due to seismically-induced impact loads will not occur.

CHAPTER 10 10.3-5 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR To determine the stresses imparted on the cells of the existing PBAPS spent fuel racks by the inserts, the limiting case involves the installation of the inserts into the cells. The stresses imparted on the cell walls during installation are not expected to exceed the allowable stress. The additional stress that occurs during installation of the inserts will have no effect on the cell wall structural integrity and the stress remains below the allowable value.

The increased load on the fuel racks from the inserts, which weigh approximately 18 pounds each, will be insignificant and bounded by the existing design.

Analytical and confirmatory numerical analysis were used to evaluate the stresses on the inserts during installation. The stresses remained below the insert material ultimate stress limit. Some instances were identified of plastic deformation, particularly in the wing and bend sections of the insert. However, sufficient elastic margin exists in the inserts, such that adequate retention force is maintained between the insert and cell walls.

Pre-installation testing demonstrated that adequate retention force is maintained by the inserts, such that they remain in place during normal (i.e., fuel handling) and abnormal (i.e., design-basis seismic event) loading conditions. In the unlikely event of warping or bowing of an insert, any additional drag on a fuel assembly will be recognized by a hoist load cell, which is typically used during normal fuel handling activities.

Withdrawal testing showed that the inserts maintained a static friction-based retention force well above the established 200 pounds minimum removal criteria. During a design-basis seismic event, the inserts must maintain a retention force of 40.8 pounds to ensure that the insert configuration remains unchanged, which is a 79.6%

reduction of the 200 pound minimum removal force criteria. Over the 20-year expected life of the inserts, it is expected that the inserts will experience a stress relaxation of approximately 50%.

CHAPTER 10 10.3-6 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR 10.3.4.1.1.4.2 Fuel Handling Accidents The inserts have no effect on previously evaluated fuel handling accidents. This is based on the fact that the installation of the inserts does not reduce the ability of the cell wall or rack base plate to resist dynamic impact loads resulting from a dropped fuel assembly, nor does it affect whether a fuel assembly may become stuck at the bottom of the existing racks.

An evaluation was performed to identify any previously unanalyzed fuel handling accidents resulting from the use of the tool used for installing and removing the inserts. Due to similarities in geometry and the lower weight of the insert tool and inserts compared to a fuel assembly and grapple device used for normal fuel handling activities, a postulated drop of the insert tool and insert is bounded by previously analyzed fuel handling accidents.

10.3.4.1.1.4.3 Criticality Analysis A SFP criticality analysis crediting the NETCO-SNAP-IN inserts was provided by Global Nuclear Fuel (GNF) report NECD-33672P, Rev. 1, "Peach Bottom Atomic Power Station:

Fuel Storage Criticality Safety Analysis of Spent Fuel Storage Racks with Rack Inserts." The analysis determined a maximum k-effective of 0.92552 at a 95%

probability and 95% confidence level, and provides an adequate reactivity margin to the regulatory k-effective limit of 0.95.

Two computational methods were used by GNF in the criticality analysis. GNF lattice design code TGBLA06 was used to calculate burned fuel compositions and the in-core k-infinity values. The burned fuel compositions were then used in MCNP-05P, the GNF proprietary version of MCNP5, to obtain fuel storage rack k-effective values.

Tables 12, 13, and 14 of NEDC-33672P provide the biases and uncertainties used to determine the maximum in-rack k-effective. Biases are arithmetically added to the calculated k-effective to account for conditions not directly modeled in the base case analysis. Biases are added for operational variables, abnormal or accident conditions, and additional configurations. Uncertainty components are statistically summed and then added to the calculated k-effective. Uncertainties include CHAPTER 10 10.3-7 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR manufacturing tolerances as well as computational uncertainties.

10.3.4.1.1.4.4 Abnormal or Accident Conditions The following abnormal accident conditions were considered in the PBAPS SFP criticality analysis.

1. Missing NETCO-SNAP-IN insert,
2. Dropped fuel,
3. Damaged fue1,
4. No NETCO-SNAP-IN inserts on rack periphery,
5. Misplacement of a fuel assembly,
6. Lateral movement of a rack module,
7. Loss of SFP cooling, and
8. Inaccessible storage locations.

Analysis has determined the reactivity impact for the above conditions and determined that they are either bounded by other conditions or the corresponding reactivity increase has been added to the calculated k-effective.

10.3.4.1.1.4.5 Boraflex Credit for the Interim Period As part of a Peach Bottom license amendment (287/290, 5/21/16) for the NETCO SNAP-IN rack inserts, a license condition took credit for Boraflex during an interim period prior to installation of all inserts. Since NETCO SNAP-IN rack inserts have been fully installed in both Peach Bottom Unit 2 and Unit 3 Spent Fuel Pool racks, Boraflex is no longer credited as a neutron absorbing material.

GNF report 000N6365-R0, Revision 0, "Peach Bottom Atomic Power Station Units 2 and 3 Spent Fuel Pool Criticality Analysis Gap Sensitivity Study," provides a supplement to NEDC-33686P, Revision 1 that evaluates additional gap configurations. This analysis demonstrates that the results of NEDC-33686P, Revision 1 are bounding when compared to actual gap distributions in the pool.

10.3.4.1.2 Base Plate The base plate is a 0.50 inch thick stainless steel plate with chamfered through holes centered at each storage location which provides for a seating surface for the fuel assemblies. These holes also provide passage for coolant flow for each fuel assembly.

CHAPTER 10 10.3-8 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR 10.3.4.1.3 Base Support Assembly Each rack module is provided with base support assemblies which are located at the center of the four corner cells within the module and at interior module locations to distribute pool floor loading.

Each base support assembly is composed of a leveling block assembly, a leveling screw, and a support pad (see Figure 10.3.7). The top of the leveling block assembly is welded to the bottom of the base plate. The leveling block assembly is threaded at the bottom to accept the leveling screw which sits in the support pad providing support for the rack. The screw is remotely adjustable at rack installation to obtain a level condition. The screw has an adjustable range up to 1 inch. The leveling pad has a swivel joint to accommodate a maximum of 2 out-or-level condition of the pool liner.

The base support assemblies are welded to the bottom of the base plate at their appropriate support locations for each rack (refer to Figure 10.3.7). The cell assemblies are then positioned and welded to the top surface of the base plate. The cell assemblies are positioned in a checkerboard pattern with the space between four cell assemblies forming a fifth storage locations. In addition to being welded to the base plate, the vertical corners of adjacent cells are welded to each other at two locations along their length to form a integral structure. Along the peripheral rows of the rack module, stainless steel cover plates are welded between the cell assemblies to enclose the non-cell locations. Some cover plates have wrapper plates with Boraflex, identical to those used on the cells, affixed to their inward side to satisfy adjacent rack module criticality concerns. Each rack has provisions for attachment of a lifting fixture for installation and/or removal of the racks in the spent fuel pool. The base plate has slotted holes at four locations designed to accept lift rods which are inserted down through the storage cells. The lift rods are connected at the top of a lifting fixture.

The structure of the racks is designed to maintain the required spacing between stored fuel assemblies in the event of impact of a fuel bundle dropped on the racks from an elevation of 24 inches (maximum). For this case, the integrity of the storage rack is not compromised and damage to the racks is above the poison area; therefore, CHAPTER 10 10.3-9 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR the criticality requirements are not violated. The structure of the racks is also analyzed for effects of the impact of a fuel bundle dropped through an empty storage cavity. The fuel drop accident analysis shows that the structure absorbs the energy and the criticality requirements are not violated. Analyses are also conducted of the stresses on a storage rack due to maximum uplift of the refueling crane on a fuel bundle which is stuck. The evaluation of this case showed no permanent deformation of the storage rack. The high density spent fuel storage racks are seismic Category I equipment as defined in NRC Regulatory Guide 1.13. These racks are designed to withstand the effects of a maximum credible earthquake and remain functional, in accordance with NRC Regulatory Guide 1.29 and the Code of Federal Regulations, Title 10, Part 100.

The basic design criteria for the spent fuel storage rack are outlined by the NRC position paper. The NRC position paper entitled "OT Position For Review and Acceptance of Spent Fuel Storage and Handling Applications" dated April 14, 1978, as amended by the NRC letter dated January 18, 1979, offers two codes for deriving the allowable stresses. The two codes are AISC Code or the ASME Code III Subsection NF. The structural analysis herein is based on the allowable stresses as outlined in ASME Code III Subsection NF. The results of the seismic and structural analyses are interrelated as the loads of the seismic analysis are used in the structural analysis to calculate stresses. The resulting margins of safety are positive and satisfy the requirements of the ASME code.

The pool floor loads resulting from the seismic and structural analyses also satisfy the requirements of the PECO specification for the spent fuel storage racks. The displacement results of the seismic analyses are used in the lift-off stability calculation and show that factor of safety against overturning is greater that the 1.5 minimum requirement of the NRC position paper. The rack seismic displacements are used in conjunction with thermal displacements to show that there is no rack-to-rack, rack-to-pool floor obstruction collision.

10.3.4.2 Spent Fuel Pool The fuel pool together with the dryer-separator storage pool form a channel-shaped beam supported in the middle by the biological concrete shield structure and at the outer ends by the building walls.

CHAPTER 10 10.3-10 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR The pool floor carries a live load in addition to the water load. A system of large steel shapes is used to support the weight of the wet concrete only. Deep beam action was checked and interactions of elements accounted for. A finite element analysis was performed to check temperature stresses in combination with other loads.

Hydrodynamic effects of water were also included in the analysis.

Once the integrity of the system was ascertained, local stresses, embedments, connections, girder deflection, and discontinuities were investigated.

The pool is lined with stainless steel and is designed to preclude inadvertent loss of water from the pool.

There are no connections to the fuel storage pool which could allow the fuel pool to be drained below the pool gate between the reactor well and the fuel pool when the pool gate is in place or below 10 feet above the top of active fuel. Lines extending below this level are equipped with syphon breaker holes to prevent inadvertent pool drainage. Systems for maintaining water quality and quantity are designed so that any maloperation or failure of such systems will not cause fuel to be uncovered.

The fuel storage pool is designed to seismic Class I criteria and so that no single failure of structures or equipment will cause the inability (1) to maintain irradiated fuel submerged in water, (2) to reestablish normal fuel pool water level, or (3) to safely remove fuel. To prevent leakage, the pool is lined with stainless steel. In addition to providing a high degree of integrity, the lining is reinforced to withstand forces that might occur when the transfer cask is moved in the cask storage area.

Interconnected drainage paths are provided behind the liner. These paths are designed (1) to prevent pressure buildup behind the liner plate, (2) to prevent the uncontrolled loss of contaminated pool water to the secondary containment, and (3) to provide expedient liner leak detection and measurement.

Protection of the pool liner in the cask storage area for the normal cask lowering operation is provided by a 1-inch thick steel wearing plate. This will prevent any damage to the liner over plant life occasioned by normal fuel cask handling. Additionally, interlocks are provided to prevent the crane trolley, with a predetermined load on CHAPTER 10 10.3-11 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR its main hook, from passing over the fuel pool. Strict administrative control is used for bypassing the interlocks during cask handling operations.

The reactor building crane main hook and the lifting device associated with the cask are of a single failure proof design such that a single failure will not result in dropping the load. The available makeup water sources to the spent fuel pool and associated flow rates are presented in Table 10.3.1.

The spent fuel pool cask pit area restraining structure has been analyzed to withstand cask impacts due to postulated design events. Cask placement in the center of the cask pit area is controlled in accordance with station procedures. This includes maintaining the appropriate centering tolerance as well the angular placement of the cask with respect to the trunnions and the restraining structure.

10.3.4.3 Fuel Pool Level Alarms Low water level alarms are provided locally and in the main control room in the event of water loss. The low water level alarms are part of the fuel pool cooling system. As a backup, flow alarms are provided in the drain lines of the reactor vessel to drywell seal, drywell to concrete seal, and fuel pool gate to detect leakage.

10.3.4.4 Dry Cask Storage Dry Cask Storage of spent nuclear fuel has been evaluated for PBAPS. This program meets the requirements of 10CFR 72 and utilizes the General License issued under 10CFR 72.

10.3.4.4.1 Dry Cask Storage Rigging and Handling The storage cask is handled by the Reactor Building Crane in a single failure proof configuration. Other cask components such as the lid and basket hold down ring are also handled in a single failure proof configuration unless specifically evaluated otherwise in accordance with UFSAR Section 10.A.11. All cask movement in the Reactor Building will be consistent with NUREG-0612, over designated safe load paths and either with the single failure proof Reactor Building Crane or with the cask transporter with the cask at the appropriate analyzed heights. All cask movement in the Reactor Building will be on designated safe load paths to ensure that cask drop loads where applicable will not affect the safety of the CHAPTER 10 10.3-12 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR PBAPS plant. The cask transporter is not single failure proof but has been evaluated for cask drops and found to be acceptable. The cask is rigged in a single-failure-proof configuration while in the spent fuel pool by ensuring a procedurally controlled amount of water is removed from the loaded cask.

10.3.4.4.2 Dry Cask Structural Considerations A calculation was performed to consider the acceptability of a drop of a loaded cask from a cask transporter in the Reactor Building onto the Elevation 135' floor. The calculation demonstrates the structural adequacy of the impact floor and the absence of effects on safety related equipment beneath it at a lift height less than 2.5.

Superficial damage to the floor at el. 135' would be repaired as appropriate. The lift height is procedurally controlled.

The cask will be rigged in a single failure proof configuration while rigged from the reactor building crane in the Reactor Building hatchway. The placement of the cask in the hatchway will be such that credible cask swinging in the hatchway during a seismic event will not result in cask / plant impacts. Therefore, damage to the plant is precluded.

The structural capacity of the Reactor Building floor at el. 234' has been evaluated for cask operations. These analyses assumed a coincident maximum credible earthquake.

The designated cask laydown area is controlled by spent fuel procedures.

The restraint structure (without the vertical guides) in the spent fuel cask pit area of the fuel pool was modeled using finite element analysis techniques and evaluated for structural adequacy under the effects of combined loadings postulated for the structure consistent with the PBAPS UFSAR Appendix C.

Cask impacts on the restraint structure due to postulated seismic (MCE) event were evaluated for the suspended cask (pendulum effect during hoisting) and for the free-standing cask located on the wear plate (sliding and tipping) and found acceptable.

Administrative controls and procedural requirements assure that the cask is appropriately centered within the specified tolerance during the move-in/move-out and cask placement operations.

CHAPTER 10 10.3-13 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR Passage of the cask transporter over the access road and haul path, with or without a cask, does not physically affect systems, structures and components (SSCs) of the PBAPS plants. The haul path and access road are well defined by roadway markings to guide the cask transporter driver. In the event the transporter fails or is inadvertently driven off the designated haul path, off-normal procedures exist to ensure that operations are halted. Cask drops along the transport route were evaluated and found acceptable.

10.3.4.4.3 Dry Cask Fuel Pool Operations Cask insertion into the fuel pool will be controlled by procedures to ensure that the fuel pool level is maintained. Fuel pool level will be procedurally controlled by a combination of activities, including as necessary, turning off the fuel pool cooling system, lowering and raising the fuel pool level control weir gate, draining/filling the skimmer surge tanks, and controlling the filling and draining of the casks as appropriate. None of the involved activities can result in inadvertent draining of the fuel pool.

Before each cask loading campaign a plan will be prepared that specifies the fuel assemblies to be moved from the pool into the cask, and their specified assigned location in the cask fuel basket. Selection of the correct fuel assemblies from the fuel pool racks and correct placement in the cask basket will be controlled by procedural methods. Any mispositioning that could occur would be detected by confirmatory monitoring. Normal site fuel movement procedures will be used by appropriately qualified personnel.

The elevation of the fuel bundles must be increased in order to provide clearance over the lip of the open dry storage casks, which are taller than the cask for which the spent fuel pool was originally designed.

The new normal-up setpoint needed to load an ISFSI cask will be used only for fuel cask loading and unloading operations.

10.3.4.4.5 Dry Cask Storage Design Basis Events The postulated events that could occur during cask operations are discussed in the IFSSAR and 10CFR 72.212 Report. The following is a summary of those events that CHAPTER 10 10.3-14 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR could have potential impacts or interaction with PBAPS 2 and 3.

Fuel Bundle Drop A design basis fuel bundle drop was evaluated and found to be bounded by existing accident analysis. Criticality, radiological releases and effects on the ISFSI cask and fuel pool liner were evaluated and found acceptable.

Wrong Fuel Insertion The TN-68 IFSSAR evaluates the impact on the cask if an incorrect fuel assembly is loaded. These events are precluded due to administrative control and training of personnel involved with loading the cask. Procedural controls will ensure that only allowed fuel is selected for loading into a cask. Additionally, verifications of fuel being loaded will ensure that incorrectly loaded fuel does not go undetected. The TN-68 IFSSAR concludes that fuel with heat generation greater than allowed is not a concern to the cask as long as the cask is submerged in the fuel pool. Because there are multiple layers of fuel verification prior to placing the lid on the cask, there is no concern for incorrectly loaded fuel with a higher than allowed heat generation rate. The TN-68 IFSSAR evaluates the loading of a fuel assembly with higher than allowed enrichment and determines the impact on the criticality margin in the cask. For worst case conditions and placement into the cask, a fuel assembly with an initial enrichment of 5.0% was evaluated and determined to not cause any criticality concerns. Loading verifications prior to placing the lid on the cask would detect the incorrectly loaded assembly and remove it prior to continuing loading operations.

Cask Drop / Tip Various scenarios involving the potential for cask drop/tip were evaluated. In no case, does the cask tip over. For the drop scenarios, the cask remains within its licensed design basis.

Natural Events The cask and associated support equipment has been evaluated for various natural events. In all cases, the cask was shown to not tip over. Cask drops are possible when suspended on the transporter, however, these drops have been evaluated as discussed earlier. Impacts of CHAPTER 10 10.3-15 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR natural events have been considered in the analysis of the cask while in the Reactor Building and have been found to not result in an uncontrolled lowering of the cask or other damage to plant equipment due to cask impacts.

Fires and Explosions The TN-68 cask is designed to withstand various fires and explosions. The cask is not combustible and therefore poses no new significant fire or explosion threat to the plant. The transporter has been evaluated and found acceptable.

Cask Seal Leak The worst case seal leakage has been demonstrated in the TN-68 SAR to be well below regulatory limits.

Cask Loading Operations Issues During cask loading, various contingency actions may be required to perform in the event (for example) of the inability to get the cask adequately drained and filled with helium or the inability to meet the leak tightness requirements. Procedures exist to direct actions in these off-normal conditions. These conditions are governed by TN-68 Tech Specs to ensure that cask parameters are not exceeded. These actions may include returning the cask to the spent fuel pool for unloading. Because there are adequate controls on the cask in these off-normal conditions, there is no impact to PBAPS 2 and 3 operations.

Cask Unloading Operations If the cask is required to be unloaded or a seal repair is required, the cask is returned to the Reactor Building.

The cask transport route follows the same load path as for transport to the ISFSI. A cavity gas sample shall be obtained and analyzes and the cask depressurized to a nominal atmospheric pressure. The cask is refilled with water and the outlet line from the cask is piped below the surface of the pool with a sparger attached at the discharge end. Steam is quenched by the relatively cool fuel pool water. Helium bubbles released from the cask would rise to the surface to mix with the refueling floor atmosphere and be dissipated by the HVAC system.

Particulates released from the cask would be scrubbed out by the fuel pool water and filtered by the Spent Fuel Pool Cooling and Cleanup System (SFPCCS). Except for Kr-85 and CHAPTER 10 10.3-16 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR I-129, the constituents of the gas gap from leaking rods is scrubbed out by the fuel pool water and handled by the SFPCCS. The dose due to noble gases from the unloading operation, assuming 100% failed fuel in the cask, results in a lower offsite dose than that from the refueling accident analyzed in Section 14.6.4 of the PBAPS SAR.

The heat added to the pool water is well within the cooling capacity of the SFPCCS. It is capable of receiving a full core offload directly from the reactor and still keep the pool temperature at an acceptable value. The heat from only 68 assemblies plus the latent heat stored in the cask materials is insignificant compared to that from a full core offload.

10.3.4.4.6 Dry Cask Storage Programs As required by 10 CFR 72.212, the PBAPS radiation protection, emergency preparedness, security and training programs were updated to incorporate dry cask storage.

10.3.4.4.7 Dry Cask Operations Helium is used during dry cask operations. The exhaust of helium into the reactor building atmosphere is not a concern to the plant since the helium is an inert gas and readily dissipates. The exhaust will be vented to the Fuel Floor area for further processing in the ventilation system.

The cask is drained of water when it is raised to the fuel pool surface water level. Evaluations and procedural controls have been developed to ensure that the cask is not raised out of the pool such that the reactor building crane or lift beam would exceed its single failure proof rating.

The casks are dried to ensure that long term corrosion of the cask is minimized. The vacuum pumps exhaust will be appropriately monitored by radiation protection personnel and filtered as necessary. The vacuum pump discharge is directed to the fuel floor area for further processing by the refuel floor ventilation system. Cask over-pressurization with helium is not a concern when using procedurally controlled standard bottles and pressures.

This is due to the large volume of the cask compared to the small volume of the helium bottle.

Leak testing is performed using calibrated leak testing equipment. This equipment is appropriately controlled and CHAPTER 10 10.3-17 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR poses no significant risk to the plant. Leak testing ensures that the cask is properly sealed for transport and storage outside of the reactor building.

The operations skid is designed to facilitate the evaluations required to drain, dry, inert, and test a spent fuel cask. This equipment is not safety related.

Appropriate I&C measuring and test equipment will be controlled in accordance with procedures and will be within calibration frequency.

10.3.5 Safety Evaluation The design of the spent fuel storage racks and dry storage casks provides for a subcritical effective multiplication factor (keff) for both normal and abnormal storage conditions. Under any condition the keff is equal to or less than 0.95. The spent fuel pool concrete structure, as well as each spent fuel storage rack and fixture loaded with fuel, are designed to seismic Class I criteria to withstand the maximum credible earthquake.

The spent fuel pool is adequately protected from the effects of a turbine generated missile. The probability of a turbine generated missile is small and is detailed in Section 11.2. The fuel pool is protected against low trajectory missiles by thick concrete walls between the turbine and the pool as well as the thick concrete pool walls. Once a high trajectory missile is generated, the possibility of it landing in the pool is in the range of 10-4. Therefore, the combined risk to the fuel pool from a high trajectory turbine missile is insignificant.

The spent fuel pools are designed with substantial capability to withstand the effects of a tornado, including tornado-generated missiles. Discussion of this capability is provided in Paragraph J.5.2.

Additional information is provided in Topical Reports APED-5696, "Tornado Protection for the Spent Fuel Storage Pool" (General Electric, November, 1969) and "Tornado Criteria for Nuclear Power Plants" (Bechtel Corporation, July, 1969).

The spent fuel storage pools are located in the reactor buildings which serve as secondary containment for the reactors (subsection 5.3). Each reactor building is designed to control leakage from the building and provides filtration, through the standby gas treatment system, to limit radioactive discharges in the event of an accident.

CHAPTER 10 10.3-18 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR Ventilation air from the spent fuel pool area is not normally filtered prior to exhaust to the atmosphere. The standby gas treatment system is described in paragraph 5.3.3.

The consequences and assumptions used in evaluating a refueling accident are presented in paragraph 14.6.4. The analysis provided in subsection 14.6.4 uses conservative assumptions, similar to those provided in Regulatory Guide 1.25, to demonstrate that releases from a postulated refueling accident result in doses which are well within 10CFR100 limits.

Provisions are made for level detection to ensure the fuel in the spent fuel storage is covered with sufficient water for radiation shielding. Leakage detection instrumentation is also provided to ensure an adequate fuel pool water level is maintained. The design of the spent fuel pool structure is such as to prevent inadvertent draining of the pool.

The radiation levels are monitored in the refueling floor exhaust duct. Both low and high radiation signals are alarmed in the control room and a high-high radiation signal isolates the duct and initiates the standby gas treatment system.

The high-density SFP storage racks utilize Boraflex as a neutron absorber material for reactivity control. Due to Boraflex degradation, PBAPS implemented an ongoing Boraflex monitoring program, to include RACKLIFE simulation of the rack degradation and blackness testing using the BADGER B-10 areal density measurement system.

A SFP rack insert program has also been implemented that will replace Boraflex. The effect of plant operation at 100% rated thermal power on Boraflex degradation is accounted for by the Boraflex monitoring program until installation of the SFP rack inserts is completed. A reduction in the amount of Boraflex in the SFP racks will reduce the criticality margin such that actions are required to ensure that the Licensing Basis requirements continue to be met. To ensure the SFP storage racks can maintain criticality margin in accordance with the PBAPS Technical Specification 4.3.1.1.b requirement of 5 percent (Keff 0.95), the peak in-core fuel bundle Kinf is limited as follows:

1. A peak in-core fuel bundle Kinf limit of 1.235 has been established and applies until all of the SFP rack inserts are installed.

CHAPTER 10 10.3-19 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR

2. A peak in-core fuel bundle Kinf limit of 1.270 has been established and applies after all of the SFP rack inserts are installed.

The peak in-core Kinf limit for the fuel bundles used in the representative equilibrium cycle core design is 1.2095, which is bounded by the Kinf limits of 1.235 and 1.270. Therefore, these bundle Kinf limits ensure the SFP criticality margin is maintained before and after all of the SFP rack inserts are installed.

Dry cask storage casks were evaluated for various design basis events and normal conditions and found acceptable in accordance with the IFSSAR and 10CFR 72.212 Report.

10.3.6 Inspection and Testing Dry storage casks are appropriately inspected and tested to ensure design basis assumptions are met.

The in-service inspection program for the spent fuel storage racks involves periodic assessment of neutron poison material performance.

10.3.6.1 Boraflex Inspection and Testing This assessment may utilize jacketed Boraflex specimens contained in surveillance coupon assemblies hung on the periphery of a rack module.

A computer based Boraflex performance model and direct measurement of the B-10 areal density of representative in-service spent fuel storage rack panels may be used in conjunction with or in replacement of coupon inspection.

10.3.6.2 Neutron Absorbing Inserts Surveillance Program The rack insert surveillance program is designed to monitor the physical properties of the insert material by performing periodic physical inspection and neutron attenuation testing to confirm the ability of the material to perform its intended function.

10.3.6.2.1 Fast Start Coupon Surveillance Program Exelon initiated a "Fast Start" coupon surveillance program at LaSalle County Generating Station to provide early performance data on the coupon exposure to maximum temperature and gamma irradiation. The program consists of CHAPTER 10 10.3-20 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR 24 coupons suspended inside of a spent fuel storage rack cell and surrounded in all adjacent cells with freshly discharged fuel. Two of the coupons will be removed approximately every six months for testing, inspection and comparison to their pre-installed condition. Initial results showed essentially no change in the coupon characteristics. Because the spent fuel pool chemistries at PBAPS are similar to LaSalle, this program provides information on initial material performance and is a basis for confidence that early insert response to the SFP environment is acceptable.

PBAPS will monitor LaSalle's program to identify any unanticipated insert material performance issues including review of their coupon test reports. Information obtained will be used to evaluate the long-term and the full rack insert surveillance programs at PBAPS and make any necessary modifications.

10.3.6.2.2 Long-Term Coupon Surveillance Program The long-term coupon surveillance program consists of a specially designed monitoring tree to which a series of surveillance coupons are attached. The monitoring tree, placed within the PBAPS spent fuel pools, will reside there as long as the spent fuel storage racks with NETCO-SNAP-IN rack inserts continue to be used. Periodically, as described below, coupons will be removed and sent to a qualified laboratory for testing.

CHAPTER 10 10.3-21 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR Table 10.3.6.1 Long-Term Surveillance Coupons Coupon Type Number Objective General 48 (See next Table)

Bend 24 Track effects along bend radii Galvanic (bi-metallic) 24 Trend galvanic corrosion with 304SS, Inconel 718 and Zircaloy coupons Specific coupons will be removed from the tree on a frequency schedule in the following tables. The general coupons will be subject to pre- and post-examination according to the following:

CHAPTER 10 10.3-22 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR Table 10.3.6.2 Long-Term Surveillance General Coupon Characterization Pre- Post-Test Characterization Characterization Acceptance Criteria Visual (high X X Evidence of Visual resolution indications digital photo)

Dimension X X Min. thickness:

0.005 inch less than nominal thickness Length Change: Any change of +/-0.02 inch Width Change:

Any change of +/-

0.02 inch Thickness Change: Any change of +0.010 inch/-

0.004 inch Dry Weight X X Any change of +/- 5%

Density X X Any change of +/- 5%

Areal Density X on select X 0.0102 Boron-10 g/cm2 coupons minimum loading Weight Loss X Any change of +/- 5%

Corrosion Rate X < 0.05 mil/yr Microscopy X as required At the discretion of the test engineer Bend Coupon X 50% stress reduction Stress Relaxation (to maintain 100 lbf retention force)

The frequency for coupon inspection is shown in the following table.

CHAPTER 10 10.3-23 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR Table 10.3.6.3 Frequency for Coupon Inspection Coupon Type First Ten Years After 10 Years with Acceptable Performance General 2 coupons every 2 years 2 coupons every 4 years Bend 1 coupon every 2 years 1 coupon every 4 years Galvanic Couples 304 1 couple every 6 years Stainless 1 couple every 6 years Zircaloy 1 couple every 6 years Inconel 718 10.3.6.2.3 Full Rack Insert Surveillance Inspections Two rack inserts will be visually inspected by camera at the frequency of the general coupon removal schedule described above to visually monitor for physical deformities such as bubbling, blistering, corrosion pitting, cracking, or flaking. Special attention will be paid to development of any edge or corner defects.

A region of high duty spent fuel storage rack cell locations will be identified and will be monitored for fuel insertion and removal events to ensure that their service bounds that of the general population of storage locations. Once every 10 years, an insert will be removed from this region and will be inspected for thickness along its length at several locations and be compared with the as-built thickness measurements of the removed insert to verify it has sustained uniform wear over its service life. After the inspection, the insert will not be reinstalled.

CHAPTER 10 10.3-24 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR TABLE 10.3.1 AVAILABLE MAKEUP WATER SOURCES Rate Source Route (gpm)

Torus One RHR pump to fuel 10,000 pool(1)

Refueling water One refueling water pump 1,650 storage tank and/ to reactor well header, to or condensate fuel pool cooling pumps, to storage tank bypass filter, to fuel pool Condensate storage High-pressure decontami- 25 tank nation pump to fuel pool Condensate storage Fuel pool makeup from con- 60 tank densate transfer pump Demineralized To demin. water supplies 150 water storage in service boxes Total demineralized 1,885 water available immediately Total demineralized 11,885 water available after 1 hr(2)

River water High-pressure service water 18,000 pumps via RHR cross-tie(2,3)

River water Fire waterhose stations 70 (2-3 in)

Total river water 70 available immediately Total river water 18,070 available after 1 hr(3)

(1)

Approximately 1 hr is required to install the removable spool before supply can be used.

(2)

Can only be used if plant is shut down and RHR cooling is with RHR pumps A and/or C.

(3)

Alternate to torus water using RHR pumps.

CHAPTER 10 10.3-25 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR TABLE 10.3.2 RACK MODULE DATA (PER UNIT)

DRY WEIGHT STORAGE RACK ASSY (LBS)

QTY ARRAY LOCATIONS DIMENSIONS (INCHES) PER RACK ASSY 1 9 x 14 126 54 x 89 x 180 10,000 2 10 x 14 280 64 x 89 x 180 11,200 1 11 x 14 Mod. 119 70 x 89 x 180 9,500 1 12 x 15 180 76 x 95 x 180 14,400 1 12 x 17 204 76 x 107 x 180 16,300 2 12 x 20 480 76 x 126 x 180 19,200 2 15 x 19 570 95 x 120 x 180 22,800 1 17 x 20 340 107 x 126 x 180 27,200 4 19 x 20 1,520 120 x 126 x 180 30,400 15 racks 3,819 Storage locations center-to-center spacing (inches) 6.28 Storage cell liner dimension (inches) 6.07 Intermediate storage location inner dimension (inches) 6.12 CHAPTER 10 10.3-26 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR 10.4 TOOLS AND SERVICING EQUIPMENT 10.4.1 Introduction All tools and servicing equipment necessary to meet the reactor general servicing requirements are supplied for efficiency and safe serviceability. The flow chart in Figure 10.4.1 defines in a general way the steps that make up a routine refueling outage. The heavy lines on the chart define the critical path in a normal outage. Deviations to this path may be encountered under abnormal circumstances. The following paragraphs describe the use of some of the major tools and servicing equipment.

10.4.2 Fuel Servicing Equipment Two fuel preparation machines located in each fuel storage pool are used to remove and install channels to support inspection or servicing of fuel assemblies. The fuel preparation machines are also used for the placement of new fuel assemblies into the spent fuel pool. These machines are designed to be removed from the pool for servicing.

An equipment support railing is provided around the pool periphery in order to tie off miscellaneous service equipment and for personnel safety. Equipment lugs fabricated as part of the pool liner are required for fixtures that might later be desired by plant operating personnel. In addition, a curb with a plate of thick stainless steel on top is provided around the entire periphery of the refueling volume. Additional equipment may be mounted by welding to, or drilling into, the plate. The curb may be used as an additional support or tie-off area. Cable ways are recessed into the floor around the pool periphery with openings to pass cables into the pool from underneath this curbing.

The new fuel inspection stand is provided to restrain the fuel assembly in a vertical position for inspection. The inspection stand can hold two assemblies. The general purpose grapple is a small, hand actuated tool used generally with fuel. The grapple can be attached to the reactor building auxiliary hoist, the jib crane, and the auxiliary hoists on the refueling platform. The general purpose grapple is used to place new fuel in the inspection stand and transfer it to the fuel pool.

A channel handling boom, with spring loaded takeup reel, is used to assist the operator in supporting the weight after the channel is removed from the fuel assembly. The boom is located between the two fuel preparation machines. With the channel handling tool attached to the reel, the channel may be conveniently moved between fuel preparation machines.

CHAPTER 10 10.4-1 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR The complete channeling procedure is as follows. Using the refuel platform and the mast grapple, a spent fuel assembly is lifted into the fuel preparation machine with the carriage lowered.

After raising the assembly to its high position, the channel is unbolted from the fuel assembly using the channel bolt wrench furnished for this purpose. This wrench is used to unscrew the bolt and capture it. The channel handling tool is attached to the channel handling boom and lowered to the channel. The tool is attached to the channel triangular corner tabs by expanding two fingers on the tool. The channel is then held, and the fuel preparation machine carriage is lowered, causing the fuel bundle to slide down out of the channel. The channel is then positioned over the other fuel preparation machine, containing a new fuel assembly, and the procedure is reversed. A channel storage rack for accumulating channels is located on the wall between the fuel preparation machines. A channel check gage may be mounted on the wall adjacent to the fuel machines so the operator can check channels. The channeled fuel is stored in the pool storage racks, ready for insertion in the reactor.

10.4.3 Servicing Aids General and local area underwater lights are provided to illuminate the internal region of the reactor vessel. Drop lights are used for intense radial illumination where needed. These lights are small enough in diameter to fit into fuel channels or control blade guide tubes. A portable underwater television camera and monitor are part of the plant optical aids. The transmitted image can be viewed on the refueling platform. This remote display assists in the inspection of the vessel internals, and general underwater surveillance in the reactor vessel and fuel storage pool. General purpose, clear plastic viewing aids that will float are used to break the water surface for better visibility.

A portable underwater vacuum cleaner is provided to assist in removing debris and miscellaneous objects from the pool floor or the reactor vessel. The pump and the filter unit are completely submersible for extended periods. Fuel pool tool accessories are also provided to meet servicing requirements.

10.4.4 Reactor Vessel Servicing Equipment Reactor vessel servicing equipment is supplied for safe handling of the vessel head and its components, including nuts, studs, bushings, and seals.

The drywell head strongback is used for lifting the drywell head and mirror insulation. Cruciform in shape, with four equally spaced lifting points, the strongback is designed to keep the CHAPTER 10 10.4-2 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR drywell head level during lifting and transport. Redundant rigging is used to connect the drywell head to the single-failure-proof strongback, resulting in a single-failure-proof lift. An exception to the single-failure-proof requirements in ANSI N14.6-1978 is that two structural features added during modifications to upgrade this device were not impact-tested. (Ref. ECR 13-00378)

The Reactor Pressure Vessel (RPV) head strongback/carousel is used for lifting the vessel head. The strongback/carousel is an integrated piece of equipment consisting of a cruciform shaped strongback, a circular monorail, and a circular storage tray.

The strongback is a box beam structure which has a hook box with three pins in the center for engagement with the reactor building crane main hoist hook. Each arm has a liftrod for engagement to the four lift lugs on the RPV head. The monorail is mounted on extensions of the strongback arms and four additional arms equally spaced between the strongback arms. The monorail circle matches the stud circle of the reactor vessel and it serves to suspend stud tensioners and nut handling device.

The head strongback carousel service the following functions:

Lifting of Vessel Head - The strongback, when suspended from the reactor building crane main hook, transports the RPV head plus the carousel with all its attachments between the reactor vessel and storage on the pedestals. The strongback and its connections to the RPV head are single-failure-proof.

One exception to the single-failure-proof requirements in ANSI N14.6-1978 is that the hook and load pin material for this device was not impact-tested as specified in ANSI N14.6-1978. (Ref. ECR 13-00378)

Tensioning of Vessel Head Closure - The carousel, when supported on the RPV head on the vessel can carry up to eight tensioners, its own weight, the strongback, storage of nuts, washers, thread protectors, and associated tools and equipment. The stud tensioners are suspended equally spaced from a monorail above the vessel stud circle. Each tensioner has an air-operated hoist with individual controls.

The head holding pedestals are designed to support the vessel head to permit seal replacement and seal surface cleaning and inspection. The mating surface between vessel and pedestal is selected to minimize the possibility of damaging the vessel head.

A reactor servicing platform permits the operator to work at a level just above the reactor vessel flange, and permits servicing access for the full core diameter. A service platform support is provided, which rests on the vessel flange surface, and serves as CHAPTER 10 10.4-3 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR both a track for the servicing platform and as a seal surface protector.

A separate seal surface protector made of aluminum is provided to protect the sealing surface of the reactor pressure vessel flange when the service platform or its track is not used.

A stud tensioner assembly is provided, and consists of four tensioners transported by the reactor building crane main hoist or the head strongback/carousel. The tensioners are controlled by a hydraulic unit with pressure gages. Each tensioner contains:

1. An integral nut wrench for rotating the nut.
2. One stud elongation gage plus one elongation rod per stud to permit initial and periodic pressure/stretch indication.

10.4.5 In-Vessel Servicing Equipment The single or multiple instrument strongback is attached to the reactor building crane auxiliary hoist and is used to lift replacement in-core detectors from their shipping container. The instrument handling tool is attached to the in-core detector by the operators on the refueling platform. The single or multiple strongback initially supports the in-core detector(s) as they are lowered into the vessel, and the in-core detector is then decoupled from the strongback. Final in-core detector insertion is accomplished with the instrument handling tool. The instrument handling tool is used for removing and installing fixed in-core detectors, as well as for handling neutron sources and the WRNM dry tubes.

10.4.5.1 Reactor Cavity Work Platform The Reactor Cavity Work Platform (RCWP) is a tool used to allow in vessel inspection/activities concurrent with fuel movement thereby reducing refueling critical path time. The RCWP is a stainless steel structure which consists of four (4) quadrants connected using three sets of splice plates. The RCWP is stored in four (4) specially designed sea land containers, and is brought to the refueling floor and assembled prior to use.

The RCWP has an octagonal shaped structural framework with eight radial legs which support four (4) personnel work baskets. The eight support legs rest on the reactor building elevation 234-0 floor slab. The platform, when placed in the reactor cavity above the open reactor pressure vessel (RPV), is slightly submerged into the reactor cavity water. The bottom of the work baskets is approximate elevation 231-0 which provides approximately 7-0 CHAPTER 10 10.4-4 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR clearance to the underside of the refueling bridge. The RCWP legs have the capability to both extend/retract and rotate in order to avoid obstructions such as the electrical pits and refuel bridge gearbox, which are present on the operating deck. The RCWP has a 30-degree refueling opening in the direction of the fuel pool to allow for refuel bridge mast and fuel bundle movement while performing in vessel activities. Electrical power and station air outlets are also provided in the RCWP work baskets.

10.4.6 Refueling Equipment The refueling platform is used as the principal means of transporting fuel assemblies back and forth between the reactor well and the storage pool. The platform travels on rails extending along each side of the reactor well and fuel pool. The platform supports the fuel grapple and the frame-mounted and monorail auxiliary hoists. The grapple is suspended from a trolley system that can traverse the width of the platform.

Platform operations are controlled from either auxiliary hoist control pendant or the fuel grapple controller consoles. The platform contains a position-indicating system that indicates the position of the fuel grapple over the core. The platform is prevented from contacting the fuel pool and reactor walls by a boundary zone interlock system.

One-half ton auxiliary hoists are mounted on both the reactor well side of the refueling platform and on the platform trolley. These hoists normally can be used with appropriate grapples to handle control rods, in-core detectors, sources, and other internals of the core. The auxiliary hoists can also serve as a means of shuffling fuel elements and other equipment within the pool and reactor.

A single operator is capable of controlling all the motions of the platform required to handle the fuel assemblies during refueling. Interlocks on both the grapple hoist and auxiliary hoists prevent lifting a fuel assembly over the core with control rod withdrawn; interlocks also prevent withdrawal of a control rod with a fuel assembly over the core attached to either the fuel grapple or auxiliary hoists. Interlocks also block travel of the refueling platform over the reactor in the startup mode. The refueling interlocks are described and evaluated in subsection 7.6, "Refueling Interlocks."

A Service Pole Caddy platform is attached on the rear side of either the Unit 2 or Unit 3 refueling platform at PBAPS. The platform provides an auxiliary work station for unlatching and latching the steam separator head bolts during refueling activities. The platform can also be utilized for other underwater servicing needs, such as jet pump beam bolt untorquing CHAPTER 10 10.4-5 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR and steam line plug installation. The platform is provided with high torque service poles and a motorized hoist to handle the poles.

10.4.7 Storage Equipment In addition to the new and spent fuel storage racks, other storage equipment is provided.

Defective fuel assemblies may be placed in special fuel cans which would be stored in the defective fuel storage rack.

10.4.8 Under-Reactor-Vessel Servicing Equipment The necessary equipment to remove CRD's during a refueling outage is provided. An equipment handling platform with a rectangular open center is provided. This platform is rotatable to provide space under the vessel so the CRD can be lowered and removed.

A thermal sleeve installation tool (Figure 10.4.3) is used to rotate the thermal sleeve (Figure 10.4.2) within the CRD housing.

Sleeve rotation permits disengagement of the guide tube. A rope and pulley integral with the tool permits complete sleeve removal.

Miscellaneous wrenches are provided to install and remove the neutron detectors. Flow through the drain tube pulls the fixed in-core detector string into the in-core guide tube thus sealing the opening in the in-core flange during in-core servicing. A drain can be opened after in-core insertion to drain any residual water. Correct seating of the in-core string is indicated when drainage ceases.

10.4.9 Equipment Storage Pit Large radioactive components, such as the steam dryer and steam separator assembly are stored in the storage pit. The storage pit is separated from the drywell by removable concrete blocks that serve as a shield when the dryer and separator are stored and the water level is lowered. Other large items, such as the pressure vessel head and drywell head, are stored on the refueling floor.

To minimize worker exposure, a wet transfer of the dryer is normally expected. To minimize operator exposure during a dry transfer of the dryer assembly, the storage pit canal is deep enough so that the top of the dryer can be kept at least 2 ft below the operating floor level during transfer. The storage pit is deep enough below the canal that, with the reactor well drained, a minimum of 6 in of water shielding can be maintained above the separator plenum dome.

CHAPTER 10 10.4-6 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR Special liner considerations account for the abrasion and high unit loadings that occur on areas where the dryer and separator assemblies are placed.

The storage pit is lined with stainless steel for leaktightness and corrosion resistance.

10.4.10 Reactor Building Crane The reactor building crane for each unit is designed such that no credible postulated failure of any crane component will result in the dropping of the fuel cask; therefore, the consequences of this accident are precluded.

The reactor building cranes have been evaluated using the criteria of NUREG-0554 and NUREG-0612, Appendix C to establish the maximum critical load (MCL) rating at which they can be considered single-failure proof. The results of this evaluation resulted in a MCL rating of 125 tons for the main hoist reactor building cranes.

Thus, for loads within this limit, a load drop is not credible.

The design of the main hoist is as follows:

A single hoist motor drives two separate shafts. The motor has two centrifugally tripped limit switches, one outboard of each hoist input pinion at each end of the motor shaft assembly. These provide an automatic safety shutdown and protection from any control or motor malfunction which might result in a runaway condition of the load. Each motor driven shaft passes through a 150 percent capacity solenoid-actuated brake. A failure of either the motor shaft, the connecting shafts, or the shaft couplings singly would not result in a load drop as the brakes would be effective in holding the load. On loss of power to the motor, both brakes engage. They can also be engaged by the operator.

Additionally, there is a 90 percent capacity eddy-current brake to limit the rate of load lowering.

After the brake, each motor shaft enters its own gear reducer. If a component of one gear case (gear teeth, shafts, bearings, or structural component) should fail, the other gear reducer holds the load with its brake with a safety factor of 5.

Each gear case is fitted on its output end with a pinion meshing with the drum gear. A failure of a pinion, drum gear, pinion shaft, or pinion bearing results in the load being carried by the other similar set of parts on the other end of the drum. Again a safety factor of 5 remains in the functioning parts. In each of the main hoist gear cases, there is a mechanical load brake, with cooling of the gear case oil, to offer additional safety in load handling.

CHAPTER 10 10.4-7 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR In the event of failure of the drum shaft, drum bearing, or drum bearing bracket, the drum flange drops a fraction of an inch onto machined structural seats so located that the drum is supported and the remaining pinion and gear stay in mesh to restrain the load. A safety factor of 5 still remains.

Two separate ropes are led from the drum, each being reeved through a set of block sheaves, upper and lower, and back to an equalizer bar, and are arranged for equal division of the load between the two ropes. With both ropes functioning and equalized, the safety factor of the ropes is 7 on a static basis. If one rope fails, the remaining rope supports the load with a residual safety factor of 3.5 on a static basis. The equalizer bar is fitted with double acting hydraulic cylinders and hydraulic accumulator to minimize the shock when the entire load is transferred to one rope. Therefore, load drop is precluded for a postulated single rope failure. The equalizer bar is contained within structural components so that if it breaks or if its pivot point breaks, the parts are retained within the trolley and load drop is precluded.

To protect against overloading of the cables a load sensing system consisting of tension type load cells supports the load sensing sheave frame assembly. The load cells are supported by the load cell support brackets attached to the trolley frame. To protect against an unbalanced load, limit switches provide visual warning indication to the crane operator. The limit switches, attached to the trolley frame, are activated by movement in the equalizer bar assembly.

All sheaves, both upper and block sheaves, are contained in heavy structural casings which usually carry a negligible load. In the event of a sheave pin failure, the sheaves rise to the top of the block or drop to the base of the upper sheave housing and stop at those points, and load drop is precluded. The block assembly contains two 100 percent capacity hooks of "load carrying devices." This redundancy in attachment to lifting assembly and in load carrying capability are such that a single failure does not cause load drop. Additional nondestructive testing (ultrasonic and magnaflux testing for the load block swivel and the sheave shafts of the upper assembly) provides further assurance that this crane is of a quality suitable for nuclear services. Electrical circuits have been reviewed and it has been determined that no single credible electrical component failure causes the load to drop.

The auxiliary hoist is designed to satisfy the Single-Failure-Proof Guidelines of Section 5.1.6 of NUREG-0612, and thus eliminating the need to analyze the effects of drops of heavy loads per the evaluation criteria of Section 5.1 of NUREG-0612.

CHAPTER 10 10.4-8 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR Protection of the pool liners in the cask storage area for the normal cask lowering operation is provided by a 1 in thick steel wearing plate. This prevents any damage to the liner over plant life occasioned by normal fuel cask handling.

The adequacy of the drywell head for a postulated drop of one of the shield plugs was performed in a load drop analysis performed in the Peach Bottom Calculation PS-0288, Drywell Head Load Drop Analysis.

No vital equipment is located in compartments below the fuel pool floor; therefore, no loss of function of vital equipment would result from falling objects and flooding caused by a postulated event.

Strict administrative control assures that the cask is not unnecessarily lifted higher than required during maneuvering above the refueling floor and also that the cask is not brought over the reactor vessel or the fuel storage portion of the pool.

10.4.11 Heavy Loads Compliance The licensee has a defense-in-depth program to manage the handling of heavy loads on site such that no credible load drop will endanger the public safety and health. Loads that are either not considered as heavy loads (i.e., less than 1200 pounds) or have been determined to not potentially impact irradiated fuel, the reactor vessel, or safe shutdown equipment are not within the scope of the heavy loads program. Any heavy loads that have not previously been evaluated will be evaluated prior to being lifted.

This evaluation would include ensuring at least one of the following measures are in place for the lift:

Mechanical stops or electrical interlocks that prevent heavy loads movement over irradiated fuel or safe shutdown equipment, Verification analysis that the consequences of a potential load drop are within accepted bounds, or Use of a single-failure-proof handling system.

Lifts are conducted in accordance with good rigging practices and in accordance with the licensee's approved procedures.

In July 1980, the NRC issued NUREG-0612, Control of Heavy Loads at Nuclear Power Plants. This NUREG was issued to resolve NRC Generic Technical Activity A-36. This generic issue involved reviewing the adequacy of NRC requirements for controlling the handling of heavy loads over or in proximity to spent fuel, the reactor core, and safe shutdown equipment. NUREG-0612 recommendations were planned to be assessed by the NRC in two phases (i.e., Phase I and Phase II). Phase I concerned itself CHAPTER 10 10.4-9 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR with seven requirements that assured a defense-in-depth approach was taken in regards to handling heavy loads. Phase II of NUREG-0612 concerned itself with plant specific analyses to ensure that the potential for load drop was extremely small or if there was a load drop no significant impact to spent fuel, the reactor vessel or safe shutdown equipment would occur. The NRC issued a safety evaluation report concerning Peach Bottom compliance to NUREG-0612 Phase I on 9/21/83. Peach Bottom submitted its intent concerning compliance with Phase II. However, prior to NRC issuance of a final SER for Peach Bottom, the NRC discontinued its review of Phase II submittals. In Generic Letter 85-11, dated 6/28/85, the NRC reported to the industry that due to their reviews of Phase I activities and proposed Phase II activities, there did not warrant a need to take further action on Phase II. The Peach Bottom response to this generic letter on 2/11/86 stated that changes to Phase II actions would be considered on a case-by-case basis.

Lifts are conducted in accordance with good rigging practices and in accordance with the licensees approved procedures.

10.4.11.1 NUREG-0612 Phase I Requirements All heavy loads that could be brought over or in proximity to irradiated fuel, the reactor vessel or safe shutdown equipment are handled in accordance with a defense in depth philosophy. The following seven criteria ensure appropriate handling of heavy loads is in place.

1. Safe Load Paths Safe Load Paths (SLPs) are established for the movement of heavy loads to minimize the potential for heavy loads, if dropped, to impact irradiated fuel in the reactor or spent fuel pool, or to impact safe shutdown equipment required to be operable. These load paths are controlled under approved design documents. Design documents and procedures also control rigging exclusion zones and height/weight restrictions. Administrative procedures require that the cognizant supervisor review safe load paths prior to the lift. Any deviations from designated SLPs must be approved by engineering.

Concerning the Emergency Diesel Generator (EDG) Cranes, heavy loads lifts may only be performed when the EDG is inoperable or declared inoperable for purposes of heavy load lifts.

Load movements along the safe load paths are directed by a qualified signalman.

2. Load Handling Procedures CHAPTER 10 10.4-10 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR Load handling procedures are in place for the handling of heavy loads over or in proximity to reactor fuel or safe shutdown equipment. A governing administrative procedure defines the overall requirements to perform these lifting operations including the NUREG-0612 Phase I requirements. Implementing procedure(s) ensure that appropriate details of complicated lifts are defined.

As appropriate, the above procedures direct the identification of required equipment, inspections and acceptance criteria required before moving the load, the steps and proper sequence to be followed in handling the load, definition and use of appropriate safe load paths and require that Phase I requirements are met for heavy load operations.

3. Crane Operator Training For lifts performed within the scope of the heavy loads program, crane operators will be trained, qualified and conduct themselves in accordance with Chapter 2-3 of ANSI B30.2-1976, Overhead and Gantry Cranes.
4. Special Lifting Devices Special Lifting Devices used in areas where a load is carried over or in proximity to the reactor vessel, spent fuel pool, or safe shutdown equipment meet the requirements of ANSI N14.6-1978 with the following exceptions:
a. Inspections shall be performed at least once per operating cycle rather than annually.
b. Critical welds may be non-destructively examined in lieu of the routine 150% load test
c. Dry fuel storage cask trunnions are waved from the periodic load test or examination requirements.
d. The drywell strongback has two steel features that were added during modifications that did not receive the required materials testing (Charpy impact or drop weight testing). (Ref. ECR 13-00378).
e. The RPV head carousel hook and load pins did not receive the required materials testing (Charpy impact or drop weight testing) (Ref. ECR 13-00378).

The stress design factor stated in section 3.2.1.1 of ANSI N14.6-1978 is based on the combined maximum static and dynamic loads that could be imparted on the handling device based on the characteristics of the crane which will be used. Devices used for CHAPTER 10 10.4-11 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR handling the spent fuel cask/lid are designed to ANSI N14.6 - 1986 which is equivalent to or exceeds the 1978 version.

5. Lifting Devices (not specifically designed)

Procedures are in place which require that all lifting devices not specifically designed (i.e., slings) that are used to lift heavy loads over or in proximity to the reactor vessel, spent fuel pool or safe shutdown equipment meet the requirements of ANSI B30.9-1971, Slings or Twin-Path Extra TPXC Synthetic Round Slings constructed with K-Spec fiber meeting the requirements of ASME B30.9-2010, used in combination with engineered softeners and abrasion protection devices as required by station procedures.

Additionally, a dynamic load factor of 25% of the dead load will be used in selecting the sling.

6. Cranes (Inspection, testing and maintenance)

Procedures are in place which ensure that crane inspection, testing and maintenance is performed in accordance with ANSI B30.2 (1967 version), Overhead and Gantry Cranes. Additionally, if repairs of load sustaining members are made by welding, identification of materials shall be made and appropriate welding procedures will be followed.

7. Crane Design The Reactor Bldg, Turbine Bldg, Pump Structure, and EDG Cranes meet the intent of the requirements of Chapter 2-1 of ANSI B30.2-1976, Overhead and Gantry Cranes and of CMAA-70, Specifications for Electric Overhead Traveling Cranes. Turbine Building Cranes are upgraded to meet single failure proof requirements of NUREG-0554 for the increased main and auxiliary hoist capacities of 115 Ton and 30 Ton respectively. Structural analyses are performed using commercially available, NRC-approved computer programs.

Concrete anchor bolts are analyzed per American Concrete Institute (ACI) Code 349-01, approved by the NRC for this purpose.

10.4.11.2 NUREG-0612 Phase II Requirements Heavy load lifts made by permanent station cranes and hoists, as well as by mobile cranes and temporary rigging, are performed in a manner to minimize the threat to irradiated fuel, the reactor vessel or safe shutdown equipment. This necessitates that the following three criteria of NUREG-0612, Phase II are met, except for alternatives which may be approved on a case-by-case basis in accordance with station procedures:

1. The lift is performed as single failure-proof equivalent (either using redundant rigging or increased safety factors) or, CHAPTER 10 10.4-12 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR

2. The lifting system has electrical interlocks or mechanical stops such that loads could not be handled over or in proximity to fuel, the reactor vessel, or safe shutdown equipment or,
3. An evaluation is performed that ensures that a load drop could not cause damage to fuel, the reactor vessel, or loss of a safe shutdown function.

10.4.11.3 Safety Evaluation Heavy load lifts are performed using a defense-in-depth program such that no credible load drop will endanger the public safety and health. The procedural controls that implement NUREG-0612 Phase I make the risk of a load drop very unlikely. In addition, single-failure-proof lifts are employed to further reduce the risk of load drop to an acceptably low level. Where single-failure-proof lifts are not used, the consequences of a postulated load drop are evaluated, and must be demonstrated to be acceptable.

Resulting restrictions on load height, weight, lift configuration, and/or equipment required to be operable are procedurally controlled.

CHAPTER 10 10.4-13 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR 10.5 FUEL POOL COOLING AND CLEANUP SYSTEM 10.5.1 Power Generation Objective The power generation objectives of the fuel pool cooling and cleanup system are to provide fuel pool water temperature control and to maintain fuel pool water clarity, purity, and level.

10.5.2 Power Generation Design Basis

1. The fuel pool cooling and cleanup system minimizes corrosion product buildup and controls water clarity through filtration and demineralization.
2. The fuel pool cooling and cleanup system minimizes fission product concentrations which could be released from the pool water to the reactor building environment.
3. The fuel pool cooling and cleanup system monitors fuel pool water level and maintains a water level above the fuel sufficient to provide shielding for normal building occupancy.
4. The fuel pool cooling and cleanup system limits the fuel pool water temperature during normal and refueling operations.

10.5.3 Description The fuel pool cooling and cleanup system cools the fuel storage pool by transferring decay heat through heat exchangers to the service water system (Drawing M-363, Sheets 1 and 2). Water purity and clarity in the storage pool, reactor well, and dryer-separator storage pit are maintained by filtering and demineralizing the pool water (Drawing M-364, Sheets 1 and 2).

See paragraph 10.3.4.2 for the description of the spent fuel pool.

Connections also exist to use the "B" filter-demineralizer to process liquid radwaste, as shown on Drawing M-363, Sheet 1.

The system consists of three fuel pool cooling pumps, three heat exchangers, filter-demineralizer(s), two skimmer surge tanks, and associated piping, valves, and instrumentation. The three fuel pool pumps are connected in parallel, as are the three heat exchangers. The pumps and heat exchangers are located in the reactor building below the bottom of the fuel pool.

The filter-demineralizers, which collect radioactive corrosion products, are located in the radwaste building and are typically arranged so that one filter-demineralizer is aligned to each reactor unit and the third is a spare. Up to three filter-CHAPTER 10 10.5-1 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR demineralizers may be aligned to one unit to support water clarity and water chemistry improvements, as required.

The pumps circulate the pool water in a closed loop, taking suction from the skimmer surge tanks through the heat exchangers, circulating the water through the filter demineralizer, and directing the processed spent fuel cooling water through the system discharge lines located in the fuel pool and reactor well.

This return flow of spent fuel cooling water is discharged downward from the discharge lines into the pool at an elevation that is above the top of the storage racks. The cooled water traverses the pool picking up heat and debris before starting a new cycle by discharging over the skimmer weirs and scuppers into the skimmer surge tanks. Makeup water for the system can be transferred from the condensate storage tank to the skimmer surge tanks. System and equipment parameters are listed in Table 10.5.1.

An evaluation of the fuel pool cooling system was performed for normal refueling of approximately 40% (320 bundles) of the core every 24 months and a full core offload just before normal refueling assuming all storage cells in the spent fuel pool are filled. The evaluations assume that the offloaded fuel has operated in the reactor at 3951 MW. For the normal refueling offload of 40% of the core, the evaluation assumes a normal complement of three fuel pool cooling trains (three fuel pool cooling pumps and three fuel pool cooling heat exchangers) in service as well as a single failure where only two fuel pool cooling trains (two fuel pool cooling pumps and two fuel pool cooling heat exchangers are in service). For the full core offload case, no fuel pool cooling trains are assumed available and fuel pool cooling is performed by the RHR system. The evaluation also considered the time for the fuel pool to boil if there is a loss of fuel pool cooling. See Table 10.5.2 for a summary of the results of these cooling system evaluations.

When flooded up, the Fuel Pool Cooling system and the RHR fuel pool assist mode can be used to remove decay heat from both the spent fuel pool and the reactor vessel by cooling the spent fuel pool. A cross-connection between the drain line from the skimmer surge tank and the RHR system allows the RHR system to take a suction from the fuel pool. This is called Fuel Pool Assist mode, when water is returned to the fuel pool and called Alternate Decay Heat Removal (ADHR) mode when water is returned to the reactor vessel through the normal shutdown cooling return line. In addition, a Split Flow mode is available when the RHR discharge flow is split between the fuel pool and the reactor vessel.

During ISFSI operation, it may be necessary to return a loaded dry storage cask to one of the Spent Fuel pools for unloading. The CHAPTER 10 10.5-2 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR heat introduced to the pool by the latent heat of the cask materials and the decay heat of the 68 contained assemblies is less that the full core offload heat that the Fuel Pool Cooling and Cleanup System has been analyzed for.

Since each refueling offload is cycle specific, then the variations in the number of fuel assemblies discharged, the in-core decay time, the fuel assembly transfer rate and the power history can vary as long as analysis shows that the spent fuel pool bulk temperature will not exceed 150F and localized boiling will not be expected to occur.

The system flow rate is larger than that required for two complete water changes per day of the fuel pool, or one change per day of the fuel pool, reactor well, and dryer-separator pit. The maximum system flow rate is twice the flow rate needed to maintain water quality.

For refueling operations, water to fill the reactor well and dryer-separator storage pit is stored in the refueling water tank.

Water is transferred to the refueling area by two refueling water pumps and/or via the CST and core spray system. During drainage, water can be pumped through one of the condensate filter-demineralizer units before being returned to the storage tank.

When placing a dry fuel storage cask into the fuel pool, the water level of the pool is managed by controlling the skimmer surge tank level and the fuel pool level as needed. Procedures ensure that a new cask is inspected and cleaned as necessary prior to placement in the pool.

Fuel pool water is continuously recirculated. The circulation patterns within the reactor well and fuel pool are established by the placement of the diffusers in the reactor well and the placement of skimmers and discharge lines in the fuel pool so as to sweep particles dislodged during refueling operations away from the work area and out of the pools.

Pool water clarity and purity are maintained by a combination of filtration and ion exchange. The filter-demineralizer units are located separately in shielded cells. The filter-demineralizer maintains the Fuel Pool water quality to within the limits specified in EPRI BWR Water Chemistry Guidelines for compatibility with materials and equipment in the fuel pool that require corrosion protection. Particulate matter is removed by the filter-demineralizer unit in which finely divided, powdered ion-exchange resin and fiber material serves as the filtering medium.

Alternately, a combination of powdered resin and cellulose may be used as the disposable filter medium. The filter elements are a CHAPTER 10 10.5-3 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR stainless steel mesh element mounted vertically in a tube sheet and replaceable as a unit. The filter vessel is constructed of carbon steel and coated with a phenolic material. The resin is replaced when the pressure drop across the filter is excessive or when instrumentation indicates the ion exchange capacity is low.

Alarms, differential pressure indicators, and flow indicators monitor the condition of the filter-demineralizers. Backwashing and precoating operations are controlled from a local panel in the radwaste building. The spent filter medium is removed from the elements by backwashing with air and condensate, then flushed to the waste sludge tank.

There are no connections to the fuel storage pool which could allow the fuel pool to be drained below the pool gate between the reactor well and the fuel pool when the pool gate is in place or below 10 feet above the top of active fuel. Fuel pool cooling and RHR discharge lines that extend below this level are equipped with syphon breaker holes to prevent inadvertent pool drainage. A level indicator, mounted at the valve rack, monitors reactor well water level during refueling. Any significant leakage through the refueling bellows assembly, drywell to reactor seal, or the fuel pool gates is annunciated on the operating floor instrument racks and in the main control room.

Instrumentation is provided for both automatic and manual operation. The surge tanks have high and low level alarms and pump trip switches. The pumps are controlled locally at the pump or from a control panel near the filter-demineralizers. Pump low suction pressure automatically turns off the pumps. A pump low discharge pressure causes alarm annunciation in the main control room and in the pump room. Also see paragraph 10.3.4.3 for spent fuel pool instrumentation.

10.5.4 Inspection and Testing No special equipment tests are required because at least one pump, heat exchanger, and filter-demineralizer are normally in operation while fuel is stored in the pool.

Routine visual inspection of the system components, instrumentation, and trouble alarms is adequate to verify system operability. Pool level indicators and associated alarms are tested by simulating low water level to the sensors.

CHAPTER 10 10.5-4 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR TABLE 10.5.1 FUEL POOL COOLING AND CLEANUP SYSTEM Design Core Thermal Power 4,030 MWt Total Pool, Well, and Pit Volume 111,400 cu ft Fuel Storage Pool Volume 53,350 cu ft System Design Flow 555 gpm Maximum Flow 1,665 gpm Fuel Pool Cooling Water Pumps Quantity 3 Type Horizontal, centrifugal Design Flow/TDH (each) 580 gpm/250 ft Motor hp 60 hp Fuel Pool Cooling Heat Exchangers Quantity 3 Heat Exchanger Capability One exchanger in service = 3.75 x 106 Btu/hr Two exchangers in service = 7.50 x 106 Btu/hr Three exchangers in service =11.25 x 106 Btu/hr Material Tube/Shell 304 SS/carbon steel Design Code ASME B&PV, Sec. VIII CHAPTER 10 10.5-5 REV. 25, APRIL 2015

PBAPS UFSAR TABLE 10.5.1 (Continued)

Fuel Pool Filter-Demineralizers Type Pressure precoat Quantity 1 per unit, 1 common spare Design Filter Area 270 sq ft Filter Capacity 550 gpm/unit Pressure Drop 25 psi (dirty)

Design Code ASME & B&PV, Sec.

VIII Holding Pump Flow 27 gpm Precoat Flow 450 gpm Flow Control Valve Pressure Drop 100 psi (max) 10 psi (min)

CHAPTER 10 10.5-6 REV. 25, APRIL 2015

PBAPS UFSAR TABLE 10.5.2

SUMMARY

OF COOLING SYSTEM ANALYSIS RESULTS

1) Heat Exchanger Capability One exchanger in service = 3.75 x 106 Btu/hr Two exchangers in service = 7.50 x 106 Btu/hr Three exchangers in service = 11.25 x 106 Btu/hr
2) Maximum Pool Heat Load to insure exit temperature is below 150F One exchanger in service = 8.66 x 106 Btu/hr Two exchangers in service = 17.33 x 106 Btu/hr Three exchangers in service = 26.0 x 106 Btu/hr
3) Normal Refueling a) Full Cooling Capability Equipment in service:

3 FPCCS Pumps (1665 gpm total SFP flow) 3 FPCCS Heat Exchangers (2400 gpm total service water flow, 90oF service water temperature)

Start of Offload (hours after shutdown): 80 Max. SFP Temperature: 140oF Time to Boil from Max. Temperature: 11.4 hrs Makeup Flow Required at Boiling: 49 gpm Max Heat Load (MBTU/hr): 23.9 b) Single Failure Equipment in service:

2 FPCCS Pumps (1110 gpm total SFP flow) 2 FPCCS Heat Exchangers (1600 gpm total service water flow, 90oF service water temperature)

Start of Offload (hours after shutdown): 200 Max. SFP Temperature: 150oF Time to Boil from Max. Temperature: 12.3 hrs Makeup Flow Required at Boiling: 40 gpm Max Heat Load (MBTU/hr): 19.5 TABLE 10.5.2 (continued)

CHAPTER 10 10.5-7 REV. 25, APRIL 2015

PBAPS UFSAR

4) Full-Core Offload, Full Cooling Capability Equipment in service:

1 RHR Pump (5000 gpm total SFP flow) 1 RHR Heat Exchanger (4500 gpm total HPSW flow, 92oF HPSW water temperature)

Start of Offload (hours after shutdown): 150 Max. SFP Temperature: 140oF Time to Boil from Max. Temperature: 6.0 hrs Makeup Flow Required at Boiling: 88 gpm Max Heat Load (MBTU/hr): 41.3 CHAPTER 10 10.5-8 REV. 25, APRIL 2015

PBAPS UFSAR 10.6 SERVICE WATER SYSTEM 10.6.1 Power Generation Objective The power generation objective of the service water system is to supply water required for plant services.

10.6.2 Power Generation Design Basis

1. The service water system continuously supplies screened and chlorinated cooling water to the plant during normal plant operation and shutdown periods.
2. System interconnections are provided to enable the emergency service water system to serve the reactor building cooling water heat exchangers in the event of a loss of off-site power. This design feature exists although the heat sink, emergency service water (ESW),

for the reactor building closed cooling water (RBCCW) system has been eliminated as a result of locking closed the ESW-RBCCW cross-tie valves. Therefore, little, if any, cooling would be provided to the service water system loads during a loss of off-site power.

3. The service water system supplies cooling water to the core standby cooling equipment and space coolers during normal plant operation and shutdown period only.
4. The system inhibits the release of radioactive material into the river.

10.6.3 Description The service water system consists of three one-half capacity service water pumps in the pump structure, three horizontal fuel pool service water booster pumps in the reactor building, and associated piping, valves, and instrumentation (Drawing M-314, Sheets 1 through 9).

The three service water pumps are vertical, turbine-type pumps, connected in parallel, taking suction from the pump structure, and each delivering 14,000 gpm at a pump head of 155 ft. The pump bearings are supplied from lube water pumps. Nominal system pressure is 65 psig. The three fuel pool service water booster pumps deliver service water to the fuel pool cooling heat exchangers. These horizontal, centrifugal pumps are rated at 900 gpm at a pump head of 135 ft.

The safeguards equipment coolers and space air cooler are automatically served by the emergency service water system.

CHAPTER 10 10.6-1 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR To inhibit leakage of radioactivity from potentially contaminated systems (mechanical vacuum pump and fuel pool heat exchangers),

service water pressure is maintained higher than process fluid pressure. A radiation monitor on the service water effluent header from the reactor building cooling water heat exchangers detects leakage of radioactive material from these exchangers. The monitor indicates, records, and alarms in the main control room.

10.6.4 Inspection and Testing The service water system components are proven operable by their use during normal plant operations. Portions of the system normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure their operability and the integrity of the system.

CHAPTER 10 10.6-2 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR TABLE 10.6.1 SERVICE WATER SYSTEM DATA Service Water Pumps Quantity 3 Type Vertical, Turbine Type, Wet-Pit Flow/Pump Head 14,000 gpm/155 ft Bhp Rating 655 hp Speed 900 rpm Motor Type Vertical, Induction Type Voltage/Phase/Frequency 2,300 V/3 phase/60 Hz Rated Horsepower 700 hp Fuel Pool Service Water Booster Pumps Quantity 3 Type Horizontal Centrifugal Flow/Pump Head 900 gpm/135 ft Bhp Rating 39 hp Speed 3,600 rpm Motor Type Horizontal Voltage/Phase/Frequency 460 V/3 phase/60 Hz Rated Horsepower 40 hp CHAPTER 10 10.6-3 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR 10.7 HIGH PRESSURE SERVICE WATER SYSTEM 10.7.1 Safety Objective The safety objective of the high pressure service water system is to provide a reliable supply of cooling water for RHR under post-accident conditions.

10.7.2 Safety Design Basis

1. The high pressure service water system is designed to seismic Class I criteria to withstand the maximum credible earthquake without impairing system function.
2. The high pressure service water system is operable during flood conditions.
3. The high pressure service water system is designed with capacity and redundancy to supply cooling water to the RHRS under post-accident conditions.
4. The high pressure service water system is operable during the loss of offsite power.

10.7.3 Power Generation Objective The power generation objective of the high pressure service water system is to supply cooling water to the RHRS for shutdown cooling and for torus cooling.

10.7.4 Power Generation Design Basis

1. The high pressure service water system supplies a reliable source of cooling water to the RHRS.
2. The high pressure service water system is designed for remote-manual initiation.
3. The high pressure service water system inhibits leakage of radioactive material from the RHRS to the environment.
4. The high pressure service water system provides an additional source of water for post-accident containment flooding by a cross tie between the high pressure service water system and the RHRS.

10.7.5 Description Each high pressure service water system consists of four 4,500-gpm pumps installed in parallel in the pump structure (Drawing CHAPTER 10 10.7-1 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR M-315, Sheets 1 through 4). Normal water supply to the suction of the pumps is from Conowingo Pond. When the high pressure service water system is operated in conjunction with the emergency heat sink (subsection 10.24, "Emergency Heat Sink"), the suction is from the HPSW pump bay which is fed from emergency cooling tower basin. The pump discharge is manifolded and provided with a normally closed, motor-operated valve separating the four pumps into groups of two. Two parallel headers run from the pump structure to the reactor building. Each header delivers the discharge from two pumps to two RHR heat exchangers also in parallel. Under normal conditions, when the respective loop of HPSW is in operation, the service water pressure on the discharge side of the RHR heat exchanger is maintained positive with respect to the RHRS side to inhibit leakage of radioactive material into the environment. In the event of a design basis accident or transient in which additional containment cooling capacity is required, a second HPSW pump can be aligned to a second RHR heat exchanger by opening the cross-tie valve.

Under abnormal operating conditions RHRS pressure could exceed high pressure service water system pressure. An RHR heat exchanger leak under these abnormal conditions would result in radioactive RHR water migrating into the high pressure service water system and into the river. To limit the release of radioactive water to the river from this potential release path, signals from the radiation monitors in the sample system which samples the high pressure service water system upstream and downstream of the RHR heat exchangers initiate an alarm in the control room at a predetermined radiation level.

Flanged connection points are available on the high pressure service water system, downstream of the RHR heat exchangers, to allow for a temporary flow path of the RHR heat exchanger cooling water in the event that the normal flow path becomes unavailable.

This alternative flow path is intended to be routed through secondary containment. Therefore, this flow path may only be used when secondary containment is not required.

An intertie is provided between units 2 and 3 high pressure service water system to provide flexibility. A cross tie to the RHRS provides the capability for primary containment flooding.

The high pressure service water system pumps are vertical multistage turbine type. The pump mounting base is of watertight construction to withstand the hydrostatic pressure at the design flood condition. The pump design data is given in Table 10.7.1.

The high pressure service water system piping and valves are designed as described in Appendix A.

CHAPTER 10 10.7-2 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR 10.7.6 Safety Evaluation The high pressure service water system pumps are installed in a seismic Class I structure. The system meets seismic Class I criteria and is protected against the design flood level.

Each pump is sized to accommodate the design heat removal capacity of one RHRS heat exchanger. They have adequate head (1) to maintain the high pressure service water system cooling water at a higher pressure than the RHRS, thus inhibiting the release of radioactive material to the environment, and (2) to permit operation in conjunction with the emergency heat sink. Further, the pumps have both a normal and a standby power supply. In the event of the loss of offsite power, the pumps are supplied from the diesel generators and manually started as required.

Sufficient redundancy is provided in the number of pumps and power supplies, and in the piping arrangement, so that no single system component failure can prevent the system from supplying cooling water to accommodate the normal shutdown mode and the containment cooling mode. Therefore, core decay heat removal during the shutdown periods, or containment cooling during the post-accident condition, can be maintained.

10.7.7 Inspection and Testing Pumps in the high pressure service water system are proven operable by their use or testing during normal station operations.

Motor operated isolation valves can be tested to assure they are capable of opening and closing by operating manual switches in the control room and observing the position lights. Portions of the high pressure service water system normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure their operability and the integrity of the system.

CHAPTER 10 10.7-3 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR TABLE 10.7.1 HIGH PRESSURE SERVICE WATER SYSTEM EQUIPMENT DATA High Pressure Service Water Pumps Quantity 4 Per Unit Type Vertical, Turbine Type Flow/Head Design Point 4,500 gpm at 700 ft Bhp at Rating < 975 hp Speed 1,770 rpm Number of Stages 6 Pump Design:

Shut-Off Head > 368 and < 445 psig Material:

Bowl/Impeller Cast Carbon Steel or Moly Iron/Bronze or Cast Stainless Steel Discharged Head/Column Carbon Steel/Carbon Steel Line Shaft Stainless Steel Bearings Brass/Bronze/Rubber Motor:

Type Vertical, Induction Horsepower 1,000 hp Voltage/Phase/Frequency 4,160 V/3 Phase/60 Hz CHAPTER 10 10.7-4 REV. 23, APRIL 2011

PBAPS UFSAR 10.8 REACTOR BUILDING COOLING WATER SYSTEM 10.8.1 Power Generation Objective The power generative objective of the reactor building cooling water system is to provide cooling water to auxiliary plant equipment associated with the nuclear steam supply system (NSSS).

10.8.2 Power Generation Design Basis

1. The reactor building cooling water system is designed to cool auxiliary plant equipment over the full range of reactor power operation.
2. The reactor building cooling water system is designed to inhibit the release of radioactive material to the environment.

10.8.3 Description The reactor building cooling water system consists of two full-capacity pumps, two full-capacity heat exchangers, one head tank, one chemical feed tank, and associated piping, valves, and controls (Drawing M-316). The cooling water pumps and heat exchangers are located in the reactor building auxiliary bay. The head tank is located on the reactor building refueling floor. The system equipment data is given in Table 10.8.1.

The system is a closed loop utilizing inhibited demineralized water. The heat exchangers are designed with service (river) water on the tube side and demineralized water on the shell side.

The reactor building cooling water system is designed for an operating pressure of 140 psig.

The head tank, located at the highest point in the loop, accommodates system volume changes, maintains static suction pressure on the pump, aids in detecting gross leaks in the reactor building cooling water system, and provides for adding makeup water. An automatic makeup control valve maintains water level in the tank. The automatic function is not required and may be valved out to monitor system inventory. High and low water levels are alarmed in the main control room. An inhibitor is added as necessary to the demineralized water by means of a chemical addition tank to limit corrosion.

The reactor building cooling water system supply and return headers penetrating the primary containment are each provided with a motor-operated isolation valve outside the containment. These isolation valves are manually controlled remotely from the main control room.

CHAPTER 10 10.8-1 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR Electrical power for operating the reactor building cooling water system pumps during failure of offsite power is supplied from the standby power supply.

In the event of offsite power failure, the reactor building cooling water system supply to the reactor water cleanup system non-regenerative heat exchanger and pumps, instrument nitrogen compressor skids, and various sample station coolers is isolated, and the water supply is maintained to the reactor recirculation pump motor oil and mechanical seal water coolers and the reactor building equipment drain sump cooler. In addition, water is supplied to the drywell air cooling system and the drywell equipment drain sump cooler, which are normally served by the chilled water system, and to the CRD pump oil coolers and air compressor jacket and after coolers, which are normally served by the turbine building cooling water system.

The reactor building cooling water system can also supply water to the fuel pool cooling heat exchangers, via removable spool pieces, in the event of loss of normal cooling water. The control and instrumentation is designed for remote system startup from the main control room.

These design features do exist although the heat sink, emergency service water (ESW), for the reactor building closed cooling water (RBCCW) system has been eliminated as a result of locking closed the ESW-RBCCW cross tie valves. These valves were locked closed because of the lack of required structural design of the piping, and due to the adverse hydraulic effects to safety related components served by ESW. Therefore, the cooling effect of the RBCCW system to any of the components described above will be minimal.

A radiation monitor is provided at the cooling water return header to indicate, record, and alarm leakage of radioactivity.

10.8.4 Inspection and Testing Equipment in the reactor building cooling water system is proven operable by use during normal plant operations. Motor operated isolation valves can be tested to assure they are capable of opening and closing by operating manual switches in the control room and observing the position lights. Portions of the reactor building cooling water system normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure their operability and the integrity of the system.

CHAPTER 10 10.8-2 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR TABLE 10.8.1 REACTOR BUILDING COOLING WATER SYSTEM EQUIPMENT DATA Reactor Building Cooling Water System Pumps 2 (full-capacity)

Type Horizontal Centrifugal Flow and Head 1,350 gpm at 140 ft Bhp at Rating 65 hp Material:

Casing/Impeller/Shaft Cast Iron/Bronze/Stainless Steel Motor: Size 75 hp Voltage/Phase/Frequency 440 V/3 Phase/60 Hz Speed 3,600 rpm Reactor Building Cooling Water System Heat Exchangers Quantity 2 (full-capacity)

Type Horizontal, Shell and Tube Heat Transfer Duty 25,500,000 Btu/hr Shell Design:

Pressure/Temperature 150 psig/200F Material Carbon steel Flow Medium Inhibited Demineralized Water Tube design:

Pressure/Temperature 125 psig/200F Material:

Tube Admiralty Tube Sheet Carbon Steel Tube Joint Rolled Flow Medium River Water CHAPTER 10 10.8-3 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR 10.9 EMERGENCY SERVICE WATER SYSTEM 10.9.1 Safety Objective The safety objective of the emergency service water system is to provide a reliable supply of cooling water to diesel generator coolers, ECCS and RCIC compartment air coolers, Core Spray Pump Motor Oil Coolers and other selected equipment during a loss of offsite power or during a loss of normal station service water due to the design flood condition or the loss of the Conowingo pond.

10.9.2 Safety Design Basis

1. The emergency service water system is designed to seismic Class I criteria.
2. The emergency service water system is operable during the design flood condition and loss of Conowingo pond.
3. The emergency service water system has sufficient capacity and redundancy so that no single active component failure can prevent the system from achieving its safety objective.
4. The emergency service water system is operable during the loss of offsite power.

10.9.3 Description The emergency service water system is common to both Units 2 and

3. The system consists of two full-capacity pumps installed in parallel in the seismic Class I portion of the pump structure, and associated equipment coolers, valves, and controls (Drawing M-315). Normal water supply to the suction of the emergency service water system pumps is from Conowingo Pond. The pump discharge piping consists of two headers with service loops to ensure water supply to the diesel engine coolers. These two headers combine, forming a common header, to supply selected equipment coolers.

Valves in the supply headers provide loop isolation. A common discharge header routes the system effluent normally to the pond.

The emergency service water system pumps are vertical, single-stage, turbine type with an 8,000 gpm capacity developing a normal average system pressure of 40 psig and a normal system flow of approximately 4500 gpm. The pump mounting base is of watertight construction to withstand hydrostatic pressure at the maximum design flood condition. The pump design data is given in Table 10.9.1.

The emergency service water system is a standby system to provide adequate cooling water supply to the emergency equipment coolers CHAPTER 10 10.9-1 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR and compartment air coolers during a loss of offsite power or during a loss of normal station service water due to the design flood condition or the loss of the Conowingo pond. During normal plant operating conditions, the cooling water supply to the equipment served by the emergency service water system, except the diesel generator coolers, is normally provided from the service water system. This allows testing of safeguards equipment using service water without starting the emergency service water system pumps.

Chemical injection and corrosion monitoring systems are installed to mitigate corrosion damage to emergency service water system piping.

The emergency service water system may also be operated in conjunction with the emergency heat sink (subsection 10.24). This configuration (closed loop) is the preferred system alignment during the design flood condition and loss of Conowingo pond.

Both emergency service water pumps start after a 36 second time delay whenever 4 kV power is available (following the loss of offsite power or a diesel generator start). One of the emergency service water system pumps is manually shut off if both pumps are running and emergency service water system pressure is verified to be adequate. All system supervisory instrumentation and controls are located in the main control room.

The emergency service water system piping and valves are designed as described in Appendix A.

10.9.4 Safety Evaluation The emergency service water system pumps are installed in a seismic Class I structure. The system meets seismic Class I criteria, and the pumps are further protected against the design flood level using watertight construction. The emergency service water system is designed with redundant pumps and piping. Each loop is powered from a separate division of both normal and standby power. Therefore, the system is both redundant and single failure proof and is operable in the event of a loss of offsite power.

10.9.5 Inspection and Testing The cooling of equipment served by the emergency service water system, except the standby diesel generator coolers, is functionally tested using the plant service water system. Pump operation and diesel generator cooling capability is verified when operability of the diesel generators is tested. Motor operated CHAPTER 10 10.9-2 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR valves can be exercised to confirm operability. Emergency service water system operability is verified by flow and heat transfer testing. Emergency service water system piping integrity is verified by visual and ultrasonic inspection and corrosion monitoring.

Emergency service water pump performance is verified in accordance with ASME Code requirements. Cooling equipment minimum flows are verified by magnetic or ultrasonic flow measurement devices.

The timer used to sequence the emergency service water pump during a LOCA is tested (with offsite power available) in accordance with surveillance test procedures. The test verifies the setting, operability, and functional performance of the relay, and provides assurance that the automatic loading sequence is being maintained and performs as required.

CHAPTER 10 10.9-3 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR TABLE 10.9.1 EMERGENCY SERVICE WATER SYSTEM EQUIPMENT DATA Emergency Service Water System Pumps*

Quantity 2 (common for Units 2 and 3)

Type Vertical, Turbine Type Flow/Head 8,000 gpm/96 ft Bhp at Rating 237 hp Speed 1,170 rpm Number of Stages 1 Pump Design:

Shutoff Head 132 ft Maximum Working Pressure 200 psig Material: Moly Iron Bowl/Impeller Cast Iron/Bronze Discharge Head/Column Carbon Steel/Carbon Steel Line Shaft Stainless Steel Bearings Rubber Motor Design:

Type Vertical Induction Type Horsepower 250 hp Voltage/Phase/Frequency 4,160 V/3 Phase/60 Hz

  • Emergency cooling water pump and motor are identical except for the pump column length.

CHAPTER 10 10.9-4 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR 10.10 TURBINE BUILDING COOLING WATER SYSTEM 10.10.1 Power Generation Objective The power generation objective of the turbine building cooling water system is to provide cooling water to auxiliary plant equipment associated with the power conversion systems.

10.10.2 Power Generation Design Basis The turbine building cooling water system is designed to cool non-nuclear auxiliary plant equipment over the full range of plant operation.

10.10.3 Description The system consists of two full-capacity pumps, two full-capacity heat exchangers (system design does allow use of both heat exchangers if necessary due to high river temperatures or other limiting operating conditions), one head tank, one chemical feed tank, and associated piping, valves, and controls (Drawing M-316, Sheets 1 to 4). The cooling water pumps and heat exchangers are located on the turbine building ground floor. The system design data is given in Table 10.10.1.

The system is a closed loop utilizing inhibited demineralized water. The heat exchangers are designed with service (river) water on the tube side and demineralized water on the shell side.

The head tank, located at the highest point in the loop, accommodates system volume changes, maintains static suction pressure on the pumps, aids in detecting gross leaks in the turbine building cooling water system, and provides a means for adding makeup water. An automatic makeup control valve maintains water level in the tank. The automatic function is not required and may be valved out to monitor system inventory. High and low water levels are alarmed in the main control room. An inhibitor is added as necessary to the demineralized water by means of a chemical addition tank to limit corrosion.

In the event of offsite power failure, the turbine building cooling water system is not operated. Under loss of offsite power, the water supply to the instrument and service air compressor skids, CRD pump lube oil coolers and the thrust bearing housings is maintained from the reactor building cooling water system. This design feature still exists although the heat sink, emergency service water (ESW), for the reactor building closed cooling water (RBCCW) system has been eliminated as a result of locking closed the ESW cross tie valves.

CHAPTER 10 10.10-1 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR Therefore, little, if any, cooling would be provided by the reactor building cooling water system during a loss of offsite power.

10.10.4 Inspection and Testing Equipment in the turbine building cooling water system is proven operable by use during normal plant operations. Transfer valves in the system can be tested to ensure that they are capable of transferring the water supply of essential equipment from the turbine building cooling water system to the reactor building cooling water system on loss of offsite power. This design feature still exists although the heat sink, emergency service water (ESW), for the reactor building closed cooling water (RBCCW) system has been eliminated as a result of locking closed the ESW cross tie valves. Therefore, little, if any, cooling would be provided by the reactor building cooling water system during a loss of offsite power. System subsections normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure their operability and system integrity.

CHAPTER 10 10.10-2 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR TABLE 10.10.1 TURBINE BUILDING COOLING WATER SYSTEM EQUIPMENT DATA Turbine Building Cooling Water System Pumps Quantity 2 (full-capacity)

Type Horizontal, Centrifugal Flow and Head 525 gpm at 180 ft Bhp at Rating 34 hp Material:

Casting/Impeller/Shaft Cast Iron/Bronze/Stainless Steel Motor: Size 40 hp Voltage/Phase/Frequency 440 V/3 Phase/60 Hz Speed 3,600 rpm Turbine Building Cooling Water System Heat Exchangers Quantity 2 (full-capacity)

Type Horizontal, Shell and Tube Heat Transfer Duty 3,850,000 Btu/hr Shell Design:

Pressure/Temperature 150 psig/200F Material Carbon Steel Flow Medium Inhibited Demineralized Water Tube Design:

Pressure/Temperature 125 psi/200F CHAPTER 10 10.10-3 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR TABLE 10.10.1 (Continued)

Material:

Tube Admiralty Tube Sheet Carbon Steel Tube Joint Rolled Flow Medium River Water CHAPTER 10 10.10-4 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR 10.11 CHILLED WATER SYSTEM 10.11.1 Power Generation Objective The power generation objective of the chilled water system is to provide cooling water to the auxiliary equipment inside the primary containment.

10.11.2 Power Generation Design Basis

1. The chilled water system is designed to cool the auxiliary equipment inside the primary containment over the full range of plant operation.
2. The chilled water system provides a reliable source of cooling water.
3. The chilled water system is provided with inter-ties with the reactor building cooling water system, which serves the chilled water system during a loss of offsite power. This design feature exists although the heat sink, emergency service water (ESW), for the reactor building closed cooling water (RBCCW) system has been eliminated as a result of locking closed the ESW-RBCCW cross tie valves. Therefore, little, if any, cooling would be provided by the chilled water system during a loss of offsite power.

10.11.3 Description The chilled water system consists of three half-capacity, centrifugal refrigeration units, three half-capacity chilled water pumps, an expansion tank, piping, valves, instrumentation, and controls (Drawing M-327, Sheets 1 through 4). It is a closed-loop system utilizing inhibited demineralized water. The pumps circulate warm return water to the refrigeration unit chillers.

The chilled water is then piped to the drywell air coolers, the recirculation pump motor coolers, and the drywell equipment sump cooler. Two parallel supply headers and return headers penetrate the primary containment. A motor operated isolation valve is located outside the containment in each line. The inter-tie with the reactor building cooling water system is made by motor operated three-way valves. An automatic transfer from system to system is made upon loss of offsite power. Chilled water system shutdown requires a manual switchover. Chillers and pumps are remotely controlled from the main control room. A standby start feature is provided for each chilled water pump. Standby equipment is provided to assure system reliability.

CHAPTER 10 10.11-1 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR 10.11.4 Inspection and Testing The chilled water system is proved operable by use during normal plant operation. Portions of the system normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure operability and integrity of the system.

CHAPTER 10 10.11-2 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR 10.12 FIRE PROTECTION PROGRAM The Fire Protection Program (FPP) is described in a document transmitted to the NRC on September 30, 1986 titled, "Fire Protection Program, Peach Bottom Atomic Power Station, Units 2 and 3", and is hereby incorporated by reference into the UFSAR.

Chapter 1 of the FPP is an introduction.

Chapter 2 provides a general description of the fire detection and suppression systems.

Chapter 3 presents an item-by-item comparison of the Peach Bottom Atomic Power Station Units 2 and 3 fire protection program with the guidelines set forth in Branch Technical Position APCSB 9.5-1, Appendix A, the requirements of Appendix R to 10CFR50, and the requirements of the Fire Protection Safety Evaluation Report.

Chapter 4 provides a tabulation of the combustible loadings in plant fire areas, describes fire barriers, and describes fire detection and suppression systems in each area. The plant is divided into 47 fire areas.

Chapter 5 provides an evaluation of the ability to safely shut the plant down in the event of a fire in any one of the plant's 47 fire areas.

Chapter 6 addresses special topics.

Chapter 7 contains the fire protection requirements which have been relocated from the Technical Specifications by Technical Specifications Change Request 90-05, which was submitted to the NRC on March 28, 1994. The relocation of these requirements was in accordance with NRC Generic Letters (GL) 86-10, "Implementation of Fire Protection Requirements," and GL 88-12, "Removal of Fire Protection Requirements from Technical Specifications."

In addition to the above, administrative procedures, system operating procedures, surveillance tests, and pre-fire strategy plans have been established to implement the Fire Protection Program.

CHAPTER 10 10.12-1 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR 10.13 MAIN CONTROL ROOM AIR CONDITIONING 10.13.1 Power Generation Objective The power generation objective of the main control room air conditioning system is to provide a suitable environment for continuous personnel occupancy and to ensure the operability of control room equipment and instruments under normal and accident conditions per 12.3.4.

10.13.2 Power Generation Design Basis

1. The system is designed to provide an environment with a controlled temperature. Humidity control is available during periods of auxiliary boiler operation.
2. The system is capable of purging the main control room.
3. Redundant components are provided to ensure reliable system operation.

10.13.3 Safety Design Basis

1. The system is designed such that the control room is habitable even under the design basis accident conditions.
2. The fresh air portion of the system is designed to be operable during the loss of offsite power by using the standby power supplies.
3. The fresh air intake is filtered when main control room emergency ventilation is initiated to prevent iodine and particulate contamination of the main control room air.

10.13.4 Description The main control room air conditioning system consists of ventilation air supply fans (normal), emergency air supply fans, air conditioning supply and return fans, filters, heating coils and cooling coils, refrigerant water chillers, chilled water pumps, dampers, duct work, instrumentation, and controls (Drawing M-384).

Outside air is drawn through a filter by a fresh air supply fan and is discharged to the inlet of the air conditioning supply fan suction, and is then discharged to duct work leading to the main control room and adjacent offices. This air is conditioned to maintain a controlled temperature environment using heating and CHAPTER 10 10.13-1 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR cooling coils. Humidity is conditioned during periods of auxiliary boiler operation. Normally, control room air is recirculated by one of two return air fans. These fans take a suction from the north and south ends of the control room and discharge to the air conditioning supply fan suction with filtered outside air from the fresh air supply fans.

The control room heating coils are supplied from the auxiliary steam supply. Cooling is provided by a chilled water system consisting of two 100% chiller units, two 100% chilled water pumps, and a piping system which also supplies chilled water to the cable spreading room fan-coil supply unit and the health physics and chemistry labs fan-coil supply unit. The fresh air supply fans, both normal and emergency, are operable from the standby power supply during the loss of offsite power. The control room chiller and air conditioning supply and return fans do not run following loss of offsite power. The instrumentation and control for the main control room air conditioning system is designed for automatic operation. One fresh air supply fan, one air conditioning supply fan, and one return air fan are normally in operation. Emergency cooling and ventilation systems for the control room and other safety-related equipment rooms are installed in seismic Class I structures and are provided with 100 percent redundancy. Monitoring and adjustment of the control room emergency ventilation system air flow may be performed locally.

If an operating fan fails, the loss of duct pressure is sensed and the standby fan starts automatically, the associated fan dampers open, and an alarm sounds in the control room. Fans may also be started manually.

A radiation monitoring system in the fresh air intake duct work monitors the radioactivity level in the incoming outside air. This system includes two flow switches that monitor air flow through the fresh air intake duct work. If a high activity level or loss of flow is detected, the operating normal fresh air supply fan stops, one emergency air supply fan starts, and the air conditioning supply and return air fans shut down. The air is diverted through one of the two high efficiency and charcoal filter trains automatically. The monitor also annunciates in the control room. If a high-high activity level is detected, the monitor will indicate in the control room.

The control room is capable of being purged with 100 percent outside air. A once-through flow is established using the air conditioning supply fans, with the return air fans discharging to atmosphere at the radwaste building roof.

CHAPTER 10 10.13-2 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR 10.13.4.1 Control Room Habitability The primary design function of the Main Control Room (MCR) / Main Control Room Emergency Ventilation (MCREV) System is to provide a safe environment in which the operator can keep the nuclear reactor and auxiliary systems under control during normal operations and can safely shut down those systems during abnormal situations to protect the health and safety of the public and plant workers.

Technical Specifications 3.7.4 and its Bases are in place to ensure that appropriate equipment is maintained operable and inoperabilities are managed through compensatory actions and other plant actions.

A Control Room Envelope (CRE) Habitability Program is required by Technical Specifications 5.5.13. The program is established and implemented to ensure that the CRE habitability is maintained such that, with an operable MCREV system, CRE occupants can control the reactor safely under normal conditions and maintain it in a safe condition following a radiological event, hazardous chemical release as applicable, or a smoke challenge. The program shall ensure that adequate radiation protection is provided to permit access and occupancy of the CRE under design basis accident (DBA) conditions without personnel receiving radiation exposures in excess of 5 rem total effective does equivalent (TEDE) for the duration of the accident. The program includes elements required by Technical Specification 5.5.13.

As a result of Technical Specification 3.7.4 and 5.5.13 requirements, PBAPS is committed to applicable portions of NRC Reg Guide 1.197, NRC Reg Guide 1.196 as invoked by the Technical Specifications or its Bases. PBAPS is committed to NRC Reg Guide 1.78 (6/74) and NRC Reg Guide 1.95 (2/75), as applicable, for hazardous chemical assessments. The computer code HABIT is utilized for hazardous chemical assessments, which was approved in Revision 1 of Reg Guide 1.78. This is an exception to Revision 0, to which PBAPS remains committed. Additionally, Peach Bottom performs hazardous chemical assessments by probabilistic analysis in accordance with NUREG-0800, Standard Review Plan, Section 2.2.3.

10.13.5 Safety Evaluation The fresh air portion of the main control room ventilation system permits continuous occupancy of the main control room under normal and accident conditions, including maximum credible earthquake, contaminated outside air, and loss of offsite power.

The system has sufficient redundancy to maintain uninterrupted main control room ventilation for personnel occupancy and CHAPTER 10 10.13-3 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR instrument operability. Evaluation as to the expected dose rates under the design basis accident conditions is included in paragraph 12.3.4.

10.13.6 Inspection and Testing The main control room air conditioning system is proven operable by its use during normal plant operation. Portions of the system normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure operability and integrity of the system.

CHAPTER 10 10.13-4 REV. 26, APRIL 2017

PBAPS UFSAR 10.14 EMERGENCY VENTILATING SYSTEM 10.14.1 Safety Objective The safety objective of the emergency ventilating systems is to maintain suitable temperatures in the plant engineered safeguards equipment rooms for equipment protection.

10.14.2 Safety Design Basis

1. The systems protect the safeguards equipment against overheating.
2. Selected systems shall be provided with redundant components for reliable operation.
3. The equipment is provided with alternate power supplies in the event of loss of offsite power.
4. The equipment is designed to seismic Class I criteria.

10.14.3 Description The emergency ventilating systems include the following:

1. Emergency switchgear and battery rooms.
2. Standby diesel generator rooms.
3. Pump structure ventilation system (ESW/HPSW Compartment).
4. Pump rooms for the RHR, RCIC, HPCI, and core spray pumps.

The reactor building heating and ventilating system normally supplies ventilation air to the RHR, RCIC, HPCI, and core spray pump rooms (paragraph 5.3.2).

10.14.3.1 Emergency Switchgear and Battery Rooms The system consists of a common air supply system and separate exhaust systems for emergency switchgear and battery rooms (Drawing M-399). Outdoor air is filtered, conditioned by heating coils when required, and discharged by one of the two supply fans to the emergency switchgear and battery rooms of Units 2 and 3.

One of the two emergency switchgear room return air fans exhaust air to atmosphere at the radwaste building roof or back to the suction of the supply fan as controlled by an air-operated damper.

One of the two battery room exhaust fans discharges exhaust air from the battery rooms to atmosphere at the radwaste building CHAPTER 10 10.14-1 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR roof. Loss of duct pressure automatically starts standby fans and sounds an alarm in the main control room.

The equipment is installed in a seismic Class I structure adjacent to the main control room. The ventilation system is normally in operation and continues to operate during accident conditions including the loss of offsite power. All system controls are from a local panel. Redundant fans are provided for reliable system operation. A seismically supported, safety grade, pneumatic supply has been provided to maintain the dampers open in accident conditions.

10.14.3.2 Standby Diesel Generator Rooms Each standby diesel generator room is provided with ventilation air supply fans and an exhaust relief damper (Drawing M-385).

Combustion air for the diesel engine is taken from the room. The ventilation systems are supplied with power from the diesels during the loss of offsite power.

10.14.3.3 ESW/HPSW Compartments The ESW/HPSW compartment housing the high pressure service water pumps, emergency service water pumps, fire pumps, and service water screen wash pumps is provided with a ventilation supply and exhaust system in each of the two seismic Class I compartments.

The ventilation system is supplied with standby power during the loss of offsite power. Redundant ventilation equipment is furnished in each compartment for uninterrupted service. The pump structure ventilation system for each HPSW subsystem is single failure proof.

10.14.4 Safety Evaluation The emergency equipment rooms are provided with cooling and ventilating systems with sufficient redundancy to ensure proper operation of equipment during normal and accident conditions. In addition, equipment is designed and installed in accordance with seismic Class I criteria and is supplied with normal and standby power.

10.14.5 Inspection and Testing The emergency ventilating systems are proved operable by use during normal plant operation. The effectiveness of the energy removal from the local environments can be evaluated by measuring the compartment air temperatures where the equipment is located.

Portions of the systems normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure operability and integrity of these systems.

CHAPTER 10 10.14-2 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR The instantaneous auxiliary relays used to sequence the diesel generator room vent supply fans and the residual heat removal compartment fan coolers during a LOCA (with offsite power available) will be tested in accordance with surveillance test procedures. The test will verify the settings, operability, and functional performance of the relays, and will provide assurance that the automatic loading sequence is being maintained and will perform as required.

CHAPTER 10 10.14-3 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR 10.15 PLANT HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS 10.15.1 Power Generation Objective The power generation objective of the plant heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems is to control the plant air temperatures and the flow of airborne radioactive contaminants to ensure the operability of plant equipment and the accessibility and habitability of plant buildings.

10.15.2 Power Generation Design Basis The plant heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems:

1. Provide appropriate temperature control for personnel comfort and equipment performance.
2. Provide sufficient filtered fresh air supply for personnel.
3. Provide air movement patterns from areas of lesser to areas of progressively greater contamination potential prior to final exhaust.
4. Minimize the possibility of plant exhaust air recirculation into the plant air intake.

10.15.3 Description 10.15.3.1 General The plant heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems provide heated or cooled air to main areas of the plant. Supply air temperature is controlled by heating coils and cooling coils.

Generally, airflow is routed from areas of lesser to areas of progressively greater contamination potential prior to final exhaust. Also, the ventilation system has sufficient design capacity to protect equipment from excessive temperatures.

The exhaust ventilation air from the turbine building and radwaste building is discharged to atmosphere from the ventilation stack above the reactor building roof. Exhaust from areas where radioactive particulate may be present, such as equipment rooms, is not recirculated but is exhausted through high-efficiency filters to atmosphere. Clean exhaust air from other plant areas is not filtered prior to being released to atmosphere.

The reactor building heating and ventilating system is described in paragraph 5.3.2. The main control room air conditioning system is described in subsection 10.13, and the emergency heating and ventilating systems are described in subsection 10.14.

CHAPTER 10 10.15-1 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR 10.15.3.2 Turbine Building The ventilation system supplies filtered and tempered outdoor air to the operating floor, main condenser area, and equipment compartments (Drawing M-387). The main condenser area is maintained at a slight negative pressure to reduce exfiltration of potential radioactive contaminants to the adjacent areas.

Ventilation air to the operating floor is recirculated or exhausted as required to maintain space temperature. The exhaust air from the operating floor and the main condenser area is discharged to the atmosphere through the ventilation stack located at the top of the reactor building. Air from potentially contaminated equipment compartments is exhausted through high-efficiency filters prior to release to the atmosphere at the ventilation stack. Supplementary cooling in the main condenser area and condensate pump room is provided by fan-coil units using service water for cooling. Additionally, unit heaters are provided in various areas for equipment freeze protection.

10.15.3.3 Radwaste Building The ventilation system for the radwaste building maintains a supply of filtered and tempered fresh air to all areas of the radwaste building (Drawing M-389). Generally, air is distributed from areas of lesser to areas of progressively higher contamination.

Two exhaust systems are used: normal and equipment compartment exhaust. The normal exhaust is unfiltered and is discharged to atmosphere at the reactor building roof through the ventilation stack. The equipment compartment exhaust air is filtered prior to release to atmosphere from the ventilation stack. Air vented from tanks containing radioactive liquids is exhausted through high-efficiency filters prior to joining the equipment compartment exhaust duct work.

10.15.3.4 Miscellaneous Rooms and Buildings The cable spreading room, located beneath the main control room, is provided with its own supply and exhaust fans, filters, heating and cooling coils, duct work, instrumentation, and controls.

Redundancy in the number of fans provides continued operation of the system. These fans shut down on a loss of offsite power.

The computer room, located in the cable spreading room area, is provided with self-contained air conditioning units, filters, and controls to maintain constant temperature and humidity in the room. These units operate from the standby power supply during a loss of offsite power.

CHAPTER 10 10.15-2 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR The administration building, chemical laboratory rooms, shop and warehouse building, water treatment building, and other structures in the plant are provided with separate conventional heating, ventilating, and/or air conditioning system.

10.15.4 Inspection and Testing The plant heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems are proved operable by their use during normal plant operation.

Portions of the systems normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure operability and integrity of the systems.

CHAPTER 10 10.15-3 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR 10.16 MAKEUP WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM 10.16.1 Power Generation Objective The power generation objective of the plant makeup water treatment system is to provide a supply of water suitable as makeup for the plant and reactor systems and other water requirements.

10.16.2 Power Generation Design Basis The makeup water treatment system is designed to provide reactor quality water for pre-operational tests, startup, and normal power operation.

10.16.3 Description The makeup water treatment system is common to Units 2 and 3 (Drawings M-317 and M-319).

The makeup water treatment system receives river water from the service water system. The system consists of a raw water treatment system, a clarified water storage tank, a makeup demineralizer system, a demineralized water tank, and associated pumps, piping, and instrumentation.

The raw water treatment system consists of skid mounted equipment that is vendor supplied and operated. This equipment produces up to 400 gpm of clarified and filtered water with a nominal flow of 200 gpm for use in the makeup demineralizer system, domestic water, and other uses. This water is pumped to a 200,000 gallon clarified water storage tank. The clarified and filtered water is continuously monitored by vendor supplied turbidity and pH measuring devices which initiate an alarm on a vendor panel.

The makeup water demineralizer system consists of three feed pumps taking suction on the clarified water storage tank and discharging to vendor supplied ultra pure water equipment. The discharge from the ultra pure water equipment goes to a 50,000-gal demineralized water storage tank. The discharge to the storage tank is monitored for quality by conductivity measuring devices which initiate an alarm on a local panel. Also, silica content is continuously monitored and recorded. The quality of water discharged to the storage tank is controlled to maintain water within the limits specified in EPRI BWR Water Chemistry Guidelines.

The piping, tanks, and associated equipment of the demineralized water treatment system are of corrosion-resistant metals which prevent contamination of the makeup water with foreign material.

CHAPTER 10 10.16-1 REV. 23, APRIL 2011

PBAPS UFSAR 10.16.4 Inspection and Testing The makeup water treatment system is an operational system in daily use and as such does not require testing to ensure operability. High demineralizer effluent conductivity automatically initiates an alarm. Grab samples are tested in the laboratory to check demineralizer performance and to ascertain stored water quality.

CHAPTER 10 10.16-2 REV. 23, APRIL 2011

PBAPS UFSAR 10.17 INSTRUMENT AIR, SERVICE AIR, AND INSTRUMENT NITROGEN SYSTEMS 10.17.1 Safety Objective The safety objective of the instrument air, service air, and instrument nitrogen systems is to provide a safety grade, pneumatic supply to support short-term and long-term operations of safety equipment.

10.17.2 Safety Design Basis

1. The containment atmospheric control system containment purge and vent isolation valves are each provided with a backup, safety grade, pneumatic (nitrogen) supply to the valves' inflatable seals.
2. The containment isolation and flow control valves in the CAD vent lines are each provided with a separate, backup, safety grade, pneumatic (nitrogen) supply. The control valves in the CADS supply are provided with a safety grade supply of nitrogen from the CADS nitrogen supply.
3. The ADS valves are provided with a separate short-term, safety grade, pneumatic supply and also a long-term, backup, safety grade, pneumatic supply of nitrogen. To fulfill the requirements of Appendix R to 10CFR, Part 50 manual actions may be performed to connect a back-up safety grade pnuematic nitrogen supply to enable remote operation of safety relief valves. See FPP Table A-4 for actions required to credit this pneumatic supply.
4. A separate short-term, backup, safety grade, pneumatic supply is provided to each of the MSIVs.
5. The suppression chamber-to-secondary containment vacuum breaker air-operated valves are each provided with a backup, safety grade, pneumatic supply.
6. The emergency switchgear and battery room dampers are provided with a backup, safety grade, pneumatic supply.

10.17.3 Power Generation Objective The power generation objective of the instrument air and service air systems is to supply suitable quality air at adequate pressure for power plant operation.

CHAPTER 10 10.17-1 REV. 25, APRIL 2015

PBAPS UFSAR 10.17.4 Power Generation Design Basis

1. The instrument air system supplies clean, dry, oil-free air, nominally at 100 psig, to station instrumentation and controls.
2. The service air system supplies clean air, nominally at 100 psig, for station services.
3. Standby onsite power is provided to the backup air compressors, following a loss of offsite power, to replenish compressed air storage as required. This design feature exists although the heat sink, emergency service water (ESW), for the reactor building closed cooling water (RBCCW) system has been eliminated as a result of locking closed the ESW-RBCCW cross tie valves.

Therefore, little, if any, cooling would be provided to the backup air compressors during a loss of offsite power.

4. Service air use is restricted during emergency conditions so that the instrument air supply shall not be impaired.
5. Two separate systems are provided for each unit for the condensate filter demineralizer backwash operations.
6. Instrument nitrogen/instrument air is provided to the MSIV's for maintaining the valves open when operating the steam cycle.
7. A separate air supply system is provided to selected radwaste equipment.

10.17.5 Description The instrument air and service air systems (Drawing M-320) consist of four air compressors per unit operating in parallel to supply common discharge headers via individual air receiver tanks, piping, valves, and instrumentation. The instrument and service air systems of Units 2 and 3 can be crosstied.

Two of the three larger compressors (650 SCFM) normally supply all compressed air requirements for one reactor unit during normal operation. The three larger compressors are fed from non-1E power sources. During emergency conditions when neither station nor offsite power are available, the smaller (419 SCFM) compressor, which is fed by a Class 1E power source, is designed to provide desired operational flexibility. This design feature exists although the heat sink, emergency service water (ESW), for the CHAPTER 10 10.17-2 REV. 25, APRIL 2015

PBAPS UFSAR reactor building closed cooling water (RBCCW) system has been eliminated as a result of locking closed the ESW-RBCCW cross tie valves. Therefore, little, if any, cooling would be provided to the air compressors during a loss of offsite power.

The instrument air compressors normally operate (load and unload) within a pressure range of approximately 10 psi. The service air compressor, which can feed either of the instrument air headers and the service air header, operates over approximately a 15 psi range so that it will not assume control from the instrument air compressors. In the unlikely event that header pressure decays to 97 psig, an air operated valve in the supply to the service air header will close, thus utilizing the instrument and service air compressors for instrument air only. The duty status of all three compressors can be changed to allow for maintenance and equalization of wear. During a loss of station or offsite power, only the 419 SCFM compressor (backup compressor), is fed by diesel backed power. This design feature exists although the heat sink, emergency service water (ESW), for the reactor building closed cooling water (RBCCW) system has been eliminated as a result of locking closed the ESW-RBCCW cross tie valves. Therefore, little, if any, cooling would be provided to the air compressors during a loss of offsite power. During a LOCA event the affected unit's backup compressor will trip if running or will be prevented from starting for 60 seconds. Identical backup compressors are provided for each unit, and manual crossties are provided so that either or both backup compressors can be utilized to supply either unit. A single backup compressor is sufficient to supply operational flexibility for one unit during shutdown following a LOOP and/or LOCA.

Each of the four compressors is of the 2-stage oil-free rotary screw design. These compressors are water cooled and are complete packaged units, incorporating an inter-cooler, after-cooler, oil cooler, bleed-off cooler, and all controls and instrumentation in a single sound attenuating enclosure. "Compressor trouble" alarms actuated by any compressor trip functions are provided both in the control room and locally on the compressors.

The lead compressors are rated at 691 ACFM at 125 psig maximum and utilize a 150 HP motor with a 1.15 service factor. The backup compressors are rated at 456 ACFM at 125 psig maximum and utilize a 100 HP motor with a 1.15 service factor. All compressor motors are capable of starting and accelerating at 75% of nominal voltage.

The prefilters of the air dryer are the coalescing type and are designed to remove effluent to 0.0013 ppmw. The dual tower instrument air dryer package is rated at 900 scfm, is of the heatless design and utilizes activated alumina desiccant for absorption of moisture. The dryer is designed for a discharge dew CHAPTER 10 10.17-3 REV. 25, APRIL 2015

PBAPS UFSAR point of -40F. Each dryer incorporates a moisture sensing control which measures the actual moisture load present on the desiccant during each cycle. It then limits the number of regeneration (purge) cycles to only those required to remove moisture to maintain the required outlet dew point. The after filters are designed to remove particulate to 0.9 micron absolute.

Also incorporated in the dryer skid package are a flow meter and a dew point analyzer. The flow meter is provided with flow recording and totalizing capabilities to enable continuous monitoring of plant air usage. The dew point meter gives a continuous readout of moisture level. There are local alarms on each dryer skid to indicate high differential pressure across the prefilters, high moisture content in the outlet air, and dryer control malfunctions. There is one common alarm window per unit, located on C212L in the control room, to indicate an alarm condition exists on either of the two dryer skids for that unit.

The discharge from the dryer package than passes to the plant instrument air headers.

Breathing air stations are provided with air from the service air system headers.

Since the air is supplied by non-lubricated compressors, the instrument air system is supplied with clean, dry, oil-free air for use by instrumentation and controls. This system supplies air to the main steam isolation valves external to containment. The main steam isolation valves are provided with accumulators for reliable operation without compressor operation.

The control rod hydraulic control system air requirement is for scram reset purposes only, and its demand is met by the CRDS storage capacity. Other pneumatic-operated devices are also designed for the fail-safe mode, and do not require a continuous air supply under abnormal conditions.

The Condensate Filter Demineralizer backwash operation employs the use of two separate air backwash systems. The primary system is a high pressure air surge system which uses a non-lubricated, two stage, water cooled compressor rated at 200 scfm at 200 psig.

Each unit has two separate receiver tanks (150 ft3 each) which are cross-tied to allow either compressor to charge both units. In addition each unit is provided with a backup low pressure air scrub backwash system using low pressure centrifugal blowers rated at 1400 scfm.

The containment atmospheric control system purge and vent valves are supplied with separate safety grade pneumatic supplies to the inflatable seals to maintain their leaktight condition. The source of this pneumatic supply is from the Safety Grade CHAPTER 10 10.17-4 REV. 25, APRIL 2015

PBAPS UFSAR Instrument Gas (SGIG) system. The SGIG supplies pressurized nitrogen gas from the CAD tank as a backup to normal instrument air. The safety grade pneumatic supply is isolated from the nonsafety grade portion of the air supply by spring-loaded, soft-seat, check valves designed for zero leakage. The purge and vent valves alarm upon opening or on loss of seal pressure.

The suppression chamber-to-secondary containment vacuum breaker air-operated valves are each supplied with separate, safety grade, pneumatic supplies. There are two suppression chamber-to-secondary containment vacuum breaker lines on each unit. Each line is provided with a normally closed, fail open, air-operated butterfly valve. Each of these valves is provided with a safety grade pneumatic supply in order to maintain valve closure. One valve on each unit is equipped with an inflatable seal which is also supplied by the safety grade pneumatic supply. These valves alarm upon opening or, for the valves equipped with the inflatable seal, on loss of seal pressure. The source of this pneumatic supply is from the Safety Grade Instrument Gas (SGIG) system. The SGIG supplies pressurized nitrogen gas from the CAD tank as a backup to normal instrument air. The safety grade pneumatic supply is isolated from the nonsafety grade portion of the air supply by spring-loaded, soft-seat, check valves designed for zero leakage.

The safety grade supply to the CADS valves is described in paragraph 5.2.3.9 of subsection 5.2.

A separate air supply system is provided to selected radwaste equipment; the system contains two air compressors, associated controls, a receiver, and separate piping to connect the air supply to the equipment. This system eliminates the potential of service air system contamination in other areas of the plant due to backflow from radwaste equipment.

The ADS accumulators, which provide the short-term, backup, safety grade supply, and their long-term, safety grade, pneumatic supply are described in paragraph 4.4.5 of subsection 4.4.

An MSIV accumulator is located close to each isolation valve to provide pneumatic pressure for valve closing in the event of failure of the normal, non-safety grade, air supply system. The accumulator volumes are designed for inboard and outboard isolation valves when the normal pneumatic supply to the accumulator has failed. The supply line to the accumulator is large enough to make up pressure to the accumulator at a rate faster than the rate the valve operation bleeds pressure from the accumulator during valve opening and closing. The air supply lines are provided with check valves to assure the integrity of the accumulator air supplies.

CHAPTER 10 10.17-5 REV. 25, APRIL 2015

PBAPS UFSAR In order to eliminate the introduction of compressed air into the containment and to minimize the need for venting and discharge of the primary containment gases to the environment, an instrument nitrogen system is provided for pneumatic service to ensure the oxygen concentration is maintained less than 5 percent inside the drywell (Drawing M-333, Sheets 1 and 2).

Essentially, this system takes suction from the containment nitrogen atmosphere and discharge to a receiver which will be the source of supply for the required pneumatic services inside the drywell. In this manner, no air will be added to the containment atmosphere, but rather the containment nitrogen atmosphere will be recycled, with any losses of nitrogen made up by the normal inerting system.

The instrument nitrogen system lines are seismic Class I from the containment penetrations to the second isolation valve, and have automatic isolation valves which function as part of the primary containment and reactor vessel isolation control system when required.

Pneumatically operated devices located within the primary containment are normally operated by the instrument nitrogen system. A cross connection is provided between the instrument air system and the instrument nitrogen system to service the components in the primary containment should the instrument nitrogen system be inoperable. Additionally, vital components, such as the main steam isolation valves and main steam relief valves, are provided with accumulators for reliable operation without compressor operation.

The emergency switchgear and battery room dampers are supplied with safety grade pneumatic supplies to maintain the dampers open.

The source of the pneumatic supply is nitrogen cylinders. The safety grade pneumatic supply is isolated from the non-safety grade potion of the air supply by spring-loaded, soft seat, check valves. The safety grade supply to the E.S.G.B.R. dampers is described in paragraph 10.14.3.1.

10.17.6 Safety Evaluation The safety grade, pneumatic supplies to the essential valves of the CADS are provided so that the system can supply post-LOCA nitrogen addition to the containment and can facilitate controlled venting of containment. The safety evaluation for the CADS is contained in paragraph 5.2.3.9.

The safety grade, pneumatic supply to the containment purge and vent valves is provided to maintain pressure in the inflatable CHAPTER 10 10.17-6 REV. 25, APRIL 2015

PBAPS UFSAR valve seats to assure leaktight conditions. The safety evaluation is contained in paragraphs 5.2.3.7 and 5.2.4.

The safety grade, pneumatic supply to each of the suppression chamber-to-secondary containment vacuum breaker butterfly valve is provided to maintain valve closure. It also provides the pneumatic supply to the inflatable seal utilized in one of the valves on each unit. The safety evaluation is contained in paragraphs 5.2.3.6 and 5.2.4.

Each ADS valve is provided with a short-term, backup, safety grade, pneumatic supply by means of its associated accumulator and check valve to provide sufficient capacity to cycle the valve open five times at atmosphere pressure, twice at 70% of containment design pressure, or once at containment design pressure, all within a 4-hour period.

A long-term, backup, safety grade, pneumatic supply has been provided to the ADS valve accumulators inside the primary containment to assure ADS valve operability for a period of 100 days following an accident.

A split ring header is installed inside the containment with three ADS valves connected to one section of the split header and the remaining two ADS valves connected to the other section of the split header. The safety grade, pneumatic pressure is a series of nitrogen cylinders located within the reactor building with a connection provided outside the reactor building for the installation of additional bottles, as required. Also, a long-term, backup, safety grade pneumatic nitrogen supply has been provided to SRVs RV2(3)-02-071E, H&J. This pneumatic supply is provided to enable remote operation of the above valves for a period of 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> following a Design Basis fire in Fire Areas 6S (Unit 2) and 13S (Unit 3) which has been postulated to render the ADS valves available for only short-term operation. The source of the pneumatic nitrogen supply is the Safety Grade Instrument Gas (SGIG) system. The SGIG system is tied into the 6,000 gallon liquid nitrogen tank which supplies the Containment Atmospheric Dilution (CAD) system. The CAD tank is located outside of Fire Areas 6S (Unit 2) and 13S (Unit 3).

Spare primary containment penetrations, two for each unit, have been modified to provide a permanent means of connection to each section of the safety grade, pneumatic supply headers within each drywell. Containment isolation has been provided for the instrument gas supply lines into containment by the use of check valves and other automatic valves outside the primary containment.

The outer, automatic valves are manually controlled from the control room and automatically close on low differential pressure CHAPTER 10 10.17-7 REV. 25, APRIL 2015

PBAPS UFSAR between pneumatic supply pressure and containment pressure or if gas flow becomes excessively high.

The MSIV accumulators are provided to supply a safety grade, backup, pneumatic supply to close the MSIV's by pneumatic pressure following the loss of normal non-safety grade pneumatic supply.

The safety function of the accumulators is assured by a safety grade check valve which isolates the accumulators and allows them to perform their safety function.

The safety grade, pneumatic supply to the emergency switchgear and battery room dampers is provided to assure continued operation of the ventilation system.

10.17.7 Inspection and Testing The instrument air and service air systems are proved operable by their use during normal plant operation. Portions of the system normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure operability and integrity of the system.

The post-LOCA CADS is functionally tested in accordance with plant procedures. The atmospheric analyzing system is functionally tested in accordance with the Technical Requirements Manual.

Inspection and testing of the ADS is discussed in paragraph 4.4.8.

CHAPTER 10 10.17-8 REV. 25, APRIL 2015

PBAPS UFSAR 10.18 DOMESTIC AND SANITARY WATER SYSTEM 10.18.1 Power Generation Objective The power generation objective of the domestic and sanitary water system is to provide the potable water supplies and sewage treatment necessary for normal plant operations and shutdown periods.

10.18.2 Power Generation Design Basis

1. Domestic water is chlorinated.
2. Sanitary system water (sewage) is treated prior to release.

10.18.3 Description Domestic water is supplied from the clarified water system, discussed in subsection 10.16, "Makeup Water Treatment System."

The domestic water system consists of a 5,000-gal domestic water storage tank, two domestic water pumps, a domestic water hydro-pneumatic tank, hypo-chlorinator, and distribution piping (Drawing M-317). Clarified and filtered water is chlorinated and stored in the domestic water storage tank, then pumped to the hydro-pneumatic tank, where it is pressurized for system distribution.

Water heating units are provided for domestic showers.

An onsite sewage treatment plant is provided to treat the normal sewage prior to release. The facility has the capacity to handle Units 2 and 3 and to handle the variable loading at the plant due to population fluctuations between outage and non-outage periods.

The sewage treatment system is designed to provide an effluent that meets the regulations of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.

10.18.4 Inspection and Testing The domestic and sanitary water system is proved operable by its use during normal plant operation. Portions of the system normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure operability and integrity of the system.

CHAPTER 10 10.18-1 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR 10.19 PLANT EQUIPMENT AND FLOOR DRAINAGE SYSTEM 10.19.1 Power Generation Objective The power generation objective of the plant equipment and floor drainage system is to collect and remove waste liquids from their points of origin to a suitable disposable area.

10.19.2 Power Generation Design Basis

1. Liquid waste drains are classified in accordance with radioactive contamination potentials and conductivity levels and chemical content.
2. Potentially radioactive liquid wastes are collected separately from the non-radioactive wastes, in a controlled and safe manner.

10.19.3 Description The plant equipment and floor drainage system handles both radioactive and potentially radioactive wastes. Radioactive wastes are collected in the building sumps and transferred to the radwaste building for treatment, sampling, and analysis prior to disposal or reuse in the plant. Non-radioactive wastes are pumped or drained by gravity into the sewer system, storm drain system, or intake bay, and released.

10.19.3.1 Radioactive Equipment Drainage System

1. Reactor Building Drains Reactor containment systems' equipment wastes are collected in two separate systems. The drywell equipment drain sump system collects equipment drains located in the primary containment. The reactor building equipment drain sump system handles drainage from equipment drains located in the secondary containment. Equipment drains are collected in closed piping and discharged to the equipment drain sump.

Pumps transfer these wastes to the radwaste system.

Containment is provided in transferring waste from the sumps to the radwaste system by maintaining a minimum water level in the sump, which seals the pump suction lines. To prevent blowout of water seals, the drywell equipment drain discharge line penetrating the primary containment has two isolation valves which close upon a high drywell pressure signal.

CHAPTER 10 10.19-1 REV. 25, APRIL 2015

PBAPS UFSAR

2. Turbine Building The turbine building radioactive equipment drainage system is collected in sumps located below the basement level. Sump pumps transfer the liquid to the radwaste system.
3. Radwaste Building The radwaste building is provided with an equipment drain sump. Sump pumps transfer the liquid to the radwaste system. Radioactive drainage within the radwaste onsite storage facility is discussed in section 9.3.3.2.
4. Recombiner Building The recombiner building is provided with an equipment drain sump. Sump pumps transfer the liquid to the radwaste system.

10.19.3.2 Floor Drainage System In general, floor drains from the primary containment, reactor building, turbine building, recombiner building, and radwaste building are collected in sumps located in the basement or lowest level of the building. Sump pumps transfer the waste from the sumps to the radwaste system.

10.19.3.3 Non-Radioactive Drainage System Roof drains from the reactor buildings, turbine building, radwaste building, and other buildings, and some floor drains in the turbine building service areas are collected and typically discharged by gravity to the storm drain system. Floor and equipment drains associated with the Unit 2 and Unit 3 critical pump portions of the Circulating Water Pump Structure are collected in a common sump and pumped to the intake bay.

Rainwater from the roof drain is normally routed directly to the intake bay. Refer to UFSAR Section 12.2.10 for details regarding how this drainage system provides protection of critical equipment during external flood conditions.

10.19.3.4 Miscellaneous Drainage System Non-radioactive chemical liquid wastes are collected, neutralized, and routed to the settling basin prior to release to the pond.

Oil drains and oil-contaminated liquid drains are collected in a separate oil collection tank for offsite disposal.

CHAPTER 10 10.19-2 REV. 25, APRIL 2015

PBAPS UFSAR 10.19.3.5 Torus Dewatering Facilities A 1.2 million-gal capacity storage tank and associated valving and piping is provided for dewatering the torus to support containment suppression chamber inspections and/or modifications. The tank provides temporary storage for the entire volume of the torus.

The Torus De-Watering System (TDWS) is only connected to the torus for dewatering/polishing in plant modes 4 and 5. Removable spool pieces with isolation valves are utilized to allow the TDWS pump suction to be connected to the torus. The spool piece assemblies (with closed isolation valves) are fully qualified to allow the torus to maintain a reliable source of water for ECCS operation while operations with the potential to drain the vessel are in progress.

Torus water transfer is via the torus dewatering pumps (Units 2 and 3) and sludge pump (Unit 3 only). The torus water may be sent to either the Condensate Storage Tank or the Torus Dewatering Tank (TDT). Transfer is generally routed through a condensate filter demineralizer to improve water quality prior to storage in the TDT. Additionally, the TDWS may be used to filter and polish the torus water by operating the system in closed loop from the torus through a condensate filter demineralizer, and back to the torus.

10.19.4 Inspection and Testing The plant equipment and floor drainage system is proved operable by use during normal plant operation. Portions of the system normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure operability and integrity of the system.

CHAPTER 10 10.19-3 REV. 25, APRIL 2015

PBAPS UFSAR 10.20 PROCESS SAMPLING SYSTEM 10.20.1 Power Generation Objective The power generation objective of the process sampling system is to monitor the operation of equipment and systems, and to provide information for making operational decisions.

10.20.2 Power Generation Design Basis

1. The process sampling system is designed to obtain representative samples which can be used in the radiochemical laboratory.
2. The process sampling system minimizes contamination and radiation effects at the sampling stations.
3. The process sampling system is designed to reduce decay and sample line plateout.

10.20.3 Description Samples are taken at locations throughout the plant from the process and auxiliary systems (Table 10.20.1). Sample points are grouped as much as possible at normally accessible locations, and drains are provided at these locations to limit the risk of contamination. Lines are sized to ensure purging and sufficient velocities to obtain representative samples. The samples are analyzed and the resulting information is used to evaluate the condition of the plant.

10.20.4 Inspection and Testing The process sampling system is proved operable by its use during normal plant operation. Grab samples are taken to verify the proper operation of the continuous samplers. Portions of the system normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure the operability and integrity of the system.

CHAPTER 10 10.20-1 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR TABLE 10.20.1 PROCESS SAMPLING SYSTEM Description Locations Purpose Nuclear Steam Supply System Reactor water Recirculation pump discharge Reactor water quality, crack arrest verification Main steam Main steam line Carryover, moisture RHRS RHR HX outlet HX leakage Cleanup Demineralizer Filter-demineralizer Influent header Reactor water quality Filter-demineralizer Powdex unit effluent Filter condition Filter-demineralizer Precoat recycle line Element leakage Regenerative HX Return to reactor HX leakage Non-regenerative HX Cooling water outlet pipe HX leakage Condensate System Condensate Hotwell trays Tube leakage Condensate Condensate pump discharge Tube leakage, water quality Condensate demineralizer Influent header Condensate quality Condensate demineralizer Powdex unit effluent Filter condition Condensate demineralizer Effluent header Treated condensate quality Consensate demineralizer Precoat recycle line Element leakage Feedwater Systems Heater drains Heater No. 3 outlet Water quality Feedwater Heater No. 5 outlet Water quality Feedwater Reactor inlet Water quality Closed Cooling Water Systems Turbine building cooling water Pump discharge Inhibitor concentration Reactor building cooling Pump discharge Inhibitor concentration Circulating and Service Water Systems Service water Pump discharge header Determine background Circulating water Condenser outlet Chlorine residual Circulating water Discharge canal Activity release CHAPTER 10 10.20-2 REV. 23, APRIL 2011

PBAPS UFSAR TABLE 10.20.1 (Continued)

Description Locations Purpose Circulating and Service Water Systems Service water Pump discharge header Determine background Circulating water Condenser outlet Chlorine residual Circulating water Discharge canal Activity release Liquid Radwaste System Laundry drain tank Pump discharge Process data Laundry drain filter Filter effluent Water quality Floor drain collector tank Pump discharge Process data Floor drain filter Filter effluent Process data Floor drain demineralizer Demineralizer effluent Process data Floor drain sample tank Pump discharge Discharge suitability Waste collector tank Pump discharge Process data Waste surge tank Pump discharge Process data Waste collector filter Filter effluent Process data Waste demineralizer Demineralizer effluent Process data Waste sample tank Pump discharge Discharge suitability R/W fuel pool F/D precoat Precoat recycle line Element testing Fuel pool HX HX outlet Fuel pool quality, HX leakage Fuel pool filter demineralizer Powdex unit effluent Filter/demineralizer condition Chemical waste tank Pump discharge Process data Condensate phase separator decant Pump discharge Process data Cleanup phase separator decant Pump discharge Process data Centrifuge liquid effluent Liquid discharge pipe Process data Makeup Water Treatment Systems Raw water inlet GE M52 skid inlet Process data Filtered water outlet GE M52 outlet Process data Domestic water Pump discharge Chlorine residual Carbon filter Filter effluent Process data CHAPTER 10 10.20-3 REV. 23, APRIL 2011

PBAPS UFSAR TABLE 10.20.1 (Continued)

Description Locations Purpose Makeup Water Treatment Systems (Continued)

Cation unit Effluent Process data Anion unit Effluent Process data Mixed bed unit Effluent Water quality Dilute acid Header Process data Dilute caustic Header Process data Neutralizer tank Outlet pipe Process data Demineralized water storage tank Pump discharge Water quality Condensate transfer system Pump discharge Water quality Refueling water transfer system Pump discharge Water quality Plant Off-Gas Systems Air ejector discharge Header Activity; H2, 02, and air in-leakage Off-gas stack sample Main stack Noble gas monitoring and particulate and iodine samples to determine release rates Recombiner area monitoring Fan discharge from individual Activity equipment rooms, hydrogen analyzers, instrument racks, equipment sumps, and cooling water surge tank. Identifica-tion of specific source of leakage is obtainable.

Building ventilation exhaust Building ventilation stack Noble gas monitoring and particulate and iodine samples to determine release rates Control room, radwaste, Fan discharge Activity recombiner ventilation CHAPTER 10 10.20-4 REV. 23, APRIL 2011

PBAPS UFSAR 10.21 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 10.21.1 Power Generation Objective The power generation objective of internal and external communications is to establish a combined system of loudspeakers and telephones to provide convenient, effective operational communications between various plant buildings and locations.

10.21.2 Power Generation Design Basis

1. Voice communication to points outside the station is provided by a dial telephone system.
2. Voice communication between various plant buildings and locations is provided.

10.21.3 Description The following means of communication are provided in the plant:

1. A dial phone system with a self-contained power supply is provided for communicating with points outside the station.
2. An intraplant communication system consisting of handsets and loudspeakers is provided for paging and communications in all appropriate areas. The intraplant system employs equipment that operates from the AC instrument bus. Loudspeakers powered by individual amplifiers are located throughout the station, with muting facilities provided where required. Paging plus two-party line channels are provided for simultaneous operation.
3. A separate intraplant telephone system allows uninterrupted private communication for maintenance and general use between the main control room, reactor refueling area, and other selected plant areas. The system is designed to ensure that no interference in vital communication is caused by other plant communication systems.
4. An evacuation alarm system is located in strategic points throughout the plant to warn personnel of emergency conditions. Additional speakers are located, especially in high noise areas, to provide plant evacuation signal.

CHAPTER 10 10.21-1 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR

5. A distributed antenna system was installed throughout the plant to provide the capability of using low power walkie talkies as a supplementary means of communicating within the plant. Because these walkie talkies are low power, they will not interfere with plant instrumentation.
6. A dedicated communications system, using the distributed antenna system is installed to allow plant operators to communicate between the main control room and the Unit 2 and Unit 3 Alternative Control Stations. This system is used for coordinating testing of the Alternative Control Stations and in an Emergency, for a Safe Shutdown from the Alternative Control Stations. See the Fire Protection Program (FPP) for details.

10.21.4 Inspection and Testing The communication systems are proved operable by use during normal plant operation. Loss of offsite power operation can be tested to ensure operability and integrity of the systems.

CHAPTER 10 10.21-2 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR 10.22 STATION LIGHTING SYSTEM 10.22.1 Power Generation Objective The power generation objective of the station lighting system is to provide adequate normal and emergency indoor station lighting.

Power is supplied from a normal AC source, standby AC system, and from the station battery system.

10.22.2 Power Generation Design Basis

1. Lighting intensities approximate levels recommended by the Illuminating Engineering Society.
2. Mercury vapor fixtures and mercury switches are not used inside the primary containment or directly above the reactor on the refueling floor.
3. The main control room has a fluorescent lighted, glare-free, luminous ceiling to reduce glare and shadows at the control boards.
4. Emergency lighting is provided in the control room, diesel generator rooms, emergency switchgear area, and other points where lighting may be required under abnormal conditions.

10.22.3 Description The station lighting system is supplied from the station auxiliary power system described in Section 8.0, "Electrical Power Systems."

Normal power is supplied from the unit auxiliary or the startup transformers. The power supply for lighting areas required during shutdown or abnormal conditions is automatically transferred to the standby diesel generator system if the normal power supply is lost.

The lighting distribution system has separate, dry-type lighting transformers and circuit breaker type panel boards.

A separate emergency DC lighting system, energized from the station batteries, is provided for safe exit lighting if all AC power sources are lost.

Separate 8-hour, battery-powered lighting is provided to support safe shutdown operations remote from the control room (Reference Table A-4 of the PBAPS Fire Protection Program). Task lighting is provided at the sites of the operations. The routes used to access and egress the sites are also illuminated. See Fire Protection Program (FPP) for details.

CHAPTER 10 10.22-1 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR 10.22.4 Inspection and Testing The station lighting system is proven operable during normal plant operation. Loss of offsite power operation can be tested to ensure operability and integrity of the system.

CHAPTER 10 10.22-2 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR 10.23 PLANT AUXILIARY BOILERS 10.23.1 Power Generation Objective The power generation objective of the plant auxiliary boiler system is to supply necessary steam for plant uses.

10.23.2 Power Generation Design Basis

1. The plant auxiliary steam system operates independently from the nuclear steam system. Wherever the two systems have interfaces, a positive means of separation is provided.
2. The auxiliary steam system is designed to provide operational flexibility to accommodate the seasonal steam demand.

10.23.3 Description The plant auxiliary boilers are common to both Units 2 and 3. The auxiliary steam system consists of two 40,000-lb/hr, oil-fired, water-tube package boilers and associated equipment and instrumentation (Drawing M-324, Sheets 1, 1A, 2, 2A, 3, 3A, and 4). The boilers have a design and maximum allowable working pressure of 275 psig. The boilers are designed, fabricated, tested, and stamped in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section I, and the rules and regulations of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.

Process steam (200 psig system) and plant heating steam (50 psig system) are distributed from the boiler steam outlet header.

Except for cold startup of a boiler or a startup subsequent to a safety trip, the boiler control system is designed for unattended operation.

The 200 psig process steam header provides the following process steam during the plant startup until the nuclear steam pressure is adequate:

1. Condensate deaeration in the hotwell during startup.
2. Turbine shaft seal steam during startup.

The condensate from this process is not returned to the deaerator but is drained to the main condenser.

CHAPTER 10 10.23-1 REV. 23, APRIL 2011

PBAPS UFSAR 10.23.4 Inspection and Testing The auxiliary steam system is proven operable by its use during normal plant operation. Portions of the system normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure operability and integrity of the system.

CHAPTER 10 10.23-2 REV. 23, APRIL 2011

PBAPS UFSAR 10.24 EMERGENCY HEAT SINK 10.24.1 Power Generation Objective The power generation objective of the emergency heat sink is to provide an onsite heat removal capability so that the reactors of Units 2 and 3 can be shut down in the event of the unavailability of the normal heat sink.

10.24.2 Power Generation Design Basis

1. The emergency heat sink has a sufficient capacity for removing the sensible and decay heat from the reactors' primary systems and auxiliary systems so that the reactors can be shut down in the event of the unavailability of the normal heat sink.
2. The emergency heat sink has the heat removal capacity to supply a source of cooling water to the emergency service water system and the high pressure service water system when required.
3. The emergency heat sink provides sufficient water storage capacity to permit emergency cooling tower operation until a makeup water supply can be established.
4. The emergency heat sink can operate during a loss of offsite power and can withstand a seismic event.

10.24.3 Description The emergency heat sink facility consists of a fireproof, multicell, mechanical, induced-draft cooling tower, constructed as a seismic Class I structure, with an integral onsite 3.55 million-gal water storage reservoir (Drawing C-2). The facility operates in conjunction with the high pressure service water pumps (subsection 10.7), the emergency service water pumps (subsection 10.9) at the pump structure, and the emergency service water booster pumps (Drawing M-330). The equipment, valves, and piping in the emergency heat sink system are designed in accordance with seismic Class I criteria. Power requirements are supplied from the standby power supply. Equipment data is shown in Table 10.24.1.

The high pressure service water pumps take suction from the pump bays to supply water to the RHR heat exchangers. Sufficient head is available to pump the return water directly to the emergency cooling tower. Water supplied from the onsite reservoir flows by gravity to the pump structure in two full-capacity lines, this CHAPTER 10 10.24-1 REV. 25, APRIL 2015

PBAPS UFSAR flow being regulated by two motor operated flow control valves in series in each line. The emergency service water pumps, also located in the pump structure, take suction from the pump bays and supply water to standby diesel generator coolers and the CSCS's pump room air coolers. The return water from the various coolers is boosted in pressure by one of two full-capacity emergency service water booster pumps and delivered to the emergency cooling tower. After an extended period of time, the fuel pool cooling system may be served by the emergency service water system by adding cross connections.

Sluice gates in the pump structure isolate the high pressure service water and emergency service water pump bays from Conowingo Pond. These gates are manually closed prior to utilizing the onsite reservoir.

The cooling tower is a mechanical, induced-draft type consisting of three cells each capable of handling the heat transfer duty of one RHR heat exchanger (one HPSW pump) plus the plant auxiliary cooling requirement (one ESW pump). The tower heat transfer duty is based on the heat duty occurring when the RHRS operating mode is switched from the containment (torus) cooling mode to the shutdown cooling mode at the time the reactor water temperature reaches 300F.

The emergency heat sink system supplies cooling water to two high pressure service water pumps and one emergency service water pump continuously until all the nuclear fuel can be shipped offsite.

Makeup water is supplied from an offsite source.

The installed capacity of 3.55 million gal of water stored in the emergency cooling reservoir is adequate for 1 week of operation without makeup. Makeup of water to the system will be initiated as expeditiously as possible after shutdown of the reactors and will be continued for an indefinite period as required.

After a two-reactor shutdown, assuming the turbine condensers are not available as heat sinks, it is estimated that continued operation of the RHRS in the shutdown cooling mode can cool the reactors to 212F in approximately 12 hr and to 125F in about 3 weeks. Based on controlled cooling tower operation at the rated flow condition, the total water consumed at the end of 7 days is approximately 2.9 x 106 gal and a makeup rate of 250 gpm will be required after the first week. The turbine-condensers, if available, will be used as heat sinks for the removal of reactor heat as long as effective. The minimum Conowingo Pond level required for effective operation of the main condenser circulating water pumps is approximately 93.8 feet (C.D.). Note: Water level CHAPTER 10 10.24-2 REV. 25, APRIL 2015

PBAPS UFSAR in the pump bays will be lower due to level differential across the traveling screens.

The offsite makeup water supply to the plant will be made by truck trailers, or temporary hose lines, and portable pumping equipment will be available and used to withdraw water from waterholes in the Susquehanna River or Rock Run Creek. Water transportation into the plant will be initiated as soon as practicable after the loss of the dam accident. The 250 gpm makeup rate required 1 week after reactor shutdown represents about three 5,000 gal water trucks per hour.

The feasibility of transporting a large quantity of water was demonstrated during the 1965 drought period in York, Pennsylvania, when several million gallons were delivered by truck daily to the potable water system of that city. Fuel oil is also delivered (two or three trucks per hour) to several generating stations on the licensees system.

10.24.4 Inspection and Testing To assure that the emergency heat sink will function properly, the tower and reservoir are inspected for integrity and reservoir level. The high pressure service water, emergency service water, and emergency cooling water pumps are tested in conjunction with their systems' testing. Portions of the system normally closed to flow can be tested to ensure operability and integrity of the system.

Flow measurement devices are provided in the emergency cooling water system to facilitate testing of the emergency cooling water pump and the emergency service water booster pumps in accordance with AMSE Code requirements.

The timer used to sequence the emergency cooling water pump during a LOCA will be tested in accordance with surveillance test procedures. The test will verify the setting, operability, and functional performance of the relay, and will provide assurance that the automatic loading sequence will be maintained and will perform as required.

CHAPTER 10 10.24-3 REV. 25, APRIL 2015

PBAPS UFSAR TABLE 10.24.1 EMERGENCY HEAT SINK EQUIPMENT DATA Design Performance and Type Type Induced Draft/

Counter Flow Design Wet Bulb Temperature 78.0F Number of Towers/Number of Cells per Tower 1 / 3 Total Heat Load 357 x 106 Btu/hr Water Side High Pressure Flow Hot Water Flow 9,000 gpm Hot Water Temperature 160F Cold Water Temperature 90F Evaporation Loss at Rated Flow 7%

Low Pressure Flow Hot Water Flow 8,000 gpm Hot Water Temperature 100F Cold Water Temperature 90F Evaporation Loss at Rated Flow 1%

Total Water Concentration/Cell 3.69 gpm/ft2 Water Load on Tower Base Area 187 gal/ft2*

Hot Water Overload Capability 50% (Approx.)

Cold Water Temperature at Overload Flow 96F

  • Drift Water Loss at Rated Flow <0.05%

Retention Time through Tower 7.0 sec Air Flow Stack Height 20.0 ft Air Flow 8.01 x 106 lb/hr Draft Loss Inches 0.633 in H20 Total Fan Power Demand, Bhp at Motor Coupling 185.0/cell

  • Both systems at 50 percent overload.

CHAPTER 10 10.24-4 REV. 21, APRIL 2007

PBAPS UFSAR TABLE 10.24.1 (Continued)

Mechanical Equipment (per Cell)

Fans Number 1 RPM 116.7 rpm Blade Material Reinforced Fiberglass Epoxy Tower and Cell Structure Tower Height 57 ft 4 in Air Intake Height 10 ft 6 in Cell Dimension 48.0 ft x 48.0 ft Stack Height 20.0 ft Emergency Cooling Water Pumps For specifications see Table 10.9.1 Emergency Service Water Booster Pumps Quantity 2 (common to both units)

Pump Design Type Horizontal split Flow/Head 8,000 gpm/100 feet Bhp at Rating 230 Speed 1,170 rpm Number of Stages 1 Material Bowl Bronze Shaft AISI 303 Shaft Sleeve AISI 440c Wear Ring Bronze Impeller/Liner ASTM B143 Bronze Motor Design Type Horizontal Induc-tion Type Horsepower 250 hp Voltage/Phase/Frequency 4,000 V/3 Phase/

60 Hz CHAPTER 10 10.24-5 REV. 21, APRIL 2007